TSCM40_I
Planning / Manufacturing I
SAP ERP - Production
Date
Training Center
Instructors
Education Website
Instructor Handbook
Course Version: 95
Course Duration: 10 Day(s)
Material Number: 50099842
Owner: Frank Layer (D036000)
An SAP Compass course - use it to learn, reference it for work
Copyright
Copyright © 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose
without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
Trademarks
•
Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
•
IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,
S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
•
ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
•
INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered
trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.
•
UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
•
Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,
VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks
of Citrix Systems, Inc.
•
HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World
Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
•
JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
•
JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
•
SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP
EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries
all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
Disclaimer
THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,
INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST
PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED
SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.
g2011018104524
About This Handbook
This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this
course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.
Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following
typographic conventions are also used.
Type Style
Description
Example text
Words or characters that appear on the screen. These
include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well
as menu names, paths, and options.
Also used for cross-references to other documentation
both internal and external.
2010
Example text
Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of
graphics, and tables
EXAMPLE TEXT
Names of elements in the system. These include
report names, program names, transaction codes, table
names, and individual key words of a programming
language, when surrounded by body text, for example
SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example text
Screen output. This includes file and directory names
and their paths, messages, names of variables and
parameters, and passages of the source text of a
program.
Example text
Exact user entry. These are words and characters that
you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the
documentation.
<Example text>
Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you
replace these words and characters with appropriate
entries.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
iii
About This Handbook
TSCM40_I
Icons in Body Text
The following icons are used in this handbook.
Icon
Meaning
For more information, tips, or background
Note or further explanation of previous point
Exception or caution
Procedures
Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor’s
presentation.
iv
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Contents
Course Overview ......................................................... vii
Course Goals ...........................................................vii
Course Objectives ...................................................... x
Unit 1: Course Overview ................................................. 1
Academy Overview .....................................................2
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and
Manufacturing .............................................................. 9
Types of Data in SAP ERP .......................................... 11
Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production..... 20
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management..... 37
Plants ................................................................... 38
Storage Locations..................................................... 45
MRP Areas............................................................. 53
Unit 4: Material Masters ................................................ 61
Overview of the Material Master .................................... 63
Creating a Material Master .......................................... 70
Classification of the Material Master ..............................102
Managing the Material Master......................................122
Unit 5: Bills of Material ................................................ 151
Overview of the Bill of Material .....................................152
Managing Bills of Material ..........................................167
BOM Reporting.......................................................195
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process .................... 215
Modeling Manufacturing ............................................217
Basic Work Center Data and Defaults ............................224
Capacities in the Work Center .....................................245
Integrating Costing with the Work Center.........................257
Unit 7: Task Lists........................................................ 263
Overview of the Task List ...........................................265
Creating a Routing and Material Assignment ....................280
Suboperations and User-Defined Fields ..........................291
Reporting and Mass Changes......................................302
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
v
Contents
TSCM40_I
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions ...................... 321
Phantom Assemblies ................................................323
Co-Products and By-Products......................................328
Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material.....336
Multiple and Variant BOMS .........................................352
Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser .............376
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions .............................. 387
Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes ....389
Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes..................400
Reference Operation Sets ..........................................412
Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates ...........423
Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing .....432
Trigger Points in the Routing .......................................448
Scrap and Its Effects ................................................456
Production Resources/Tools........................................472
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces ................................ 485
Structure of the Engineering Workbench .........................487
Navigating in the Engineering Workbench .......................494
Engineering Workbench Work Areas..............................512
Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface .....................526
Unit 11: Appendix ....................................................... 549
Configuration of the Material Master ..............................551
Configuration of the Bill of Material ................................574
Configuring the Work Center ......................................590
Configuring the Routing .............................................622
Index ....................................................................... 635
vi
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Course Overview
The course TSCM40 teaches you how to work with master data (course week 1)
and production planning (course week 2) in SAP ECC.
The course material therefore consists of two course books: TSCM40_I and
TSCM40_II.
This course book TSCM40_I only deals with the content of the first week of
TSCM40. The second week is covered by the course book TSCM40_II.
Target Audience
This course is intended for the following audiences:
•
Application consultants responsible for the implementation of planning as
part of the SAP Business Suite in SAP ERP.
Course Prerequisites
Required Knowledge
•
•
•
•
•
SAP125 – SAP Navigation 2005 (e-learning)
TERP01 – SAP ERP: Introduction (e-learning)
TERP02 – SAP ERP: Introduction to SAP NetWeaver (e-learning)
TERP51 – SAP ERP: Introduction to Processes in Material Planning
(e-learning)
TERP52 – SAP ERP: Introduction to Processes in Manufacturing Execution
(e-learning)
Recommended Knowledge
•
No additional knowledge required
Course Duration Details
Unit 1: Course Overview
Academy Overview
10 Minutes
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and
Manufacturing
30 Minutes
Types of Data in SAP ERP
Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in
45 Minutes
Production
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
20 Minutes
Plants
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
vii
Course Overview
TSCM40_I
Storage Locations
MRP Areas
Unit 4: Material Masters
Overview of the Material Master
Creating a Material Master
Exercise 1: Creating Material Masters
Classification of the Material Master
Exercise 2: Material Classification
Managing the Material Master
Exercise 3: Managing Material Masters
30 Minutes
45 Minutes
40 Minutes
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
45 Minutes
20 Minutes
Unit 5: Bills of Material
Overview of the Bill of Material
Exercise 4: BOM Basics
Managing Bills of Material
Exercise 5: Changing Bills of Material
BOM Reporting
Exercise 6: Multilevel BOM Reporting
45 Minutes
20 Minutes
45 Minutes
40 Minutes
20 Minutes
15 Minutes
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
Modeling Manufacturing
Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Exercise 7: Create a Work Center
Capacities in the Work Center
Exercise 8: Capacities in the Work Center
Integrating Costing with the Work Center
30 Minutes
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
45 Minutes
15 Minutes
20 Minutes
Unit 7: Task Lists
Overview of the Task List
Exercise 9: Create a Simple Routing
Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Exercise 10: Material Assignment and Component
Allocation
Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Exercise 11: Suboperations for Material-Specific
Capacity Constraints
Reporting and Mass Changes
Exercise 12: Task List Changes with ECM
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Phantom Assemblies
Co-Products and By-Products
Exercise 13: Co-Products in Production Orders
Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of
Material
Exercise 14: Substitute Items in Production Orders
Multiple and Variant BOMS
viii
20 Minutes
15 Minutes
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
25 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
20 Minutes
40 Minutes
2010
TSCM40_I
Course Overview
Exercise 15: Multiple/Alternative Bills of Material
Exercise 16: Variant BOMs
Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
Exercise 17: Mass Changes and the Product
Structure Browser
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing
Processes
Exercise 18: Creating Alternative and Parallel
Sequences
Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Exercise 19: Creating Alternative Routings and
Production Versions
Reference Operation Sets
Exercise 20: Reference Operation Sets
Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Exercise 21: Scheduling
Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the
Routing
Exercise 22: Time Elements of the Operation in
Scheduling
Trigger Points in the Routing
Scrap and Its Effects
Exercise 23: Scrap in Production
Production Resources/Tools
Exercise 24: Creating and Assigning PRTs
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Exercise 25: Navigating in the EWB
Exercise 26: Navigating in the EWB II
Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Exercise 27: Create a Work Area
Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Exercise 28: Using the PLM Web User Interface
Unit 11: Appendix
Configuration of the Material Master
Exercise 29: Material Types, Field Control and
Material Status
Configuration of the Bill of Material
Exercise 30: Bill of Material Configuration
Configuring the Work Center
Exercise 31: Work Center Category and Field
Selection Control, Default Work Center (Optional)
Exercise 32: Optional: Work Center Formulas
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
15 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
10 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
30 Minutes
30 Minutes
25 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
10 Minutes
40 Minutes
45 Minutes
30 Minutes
35 Minutes
20 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
20 Minutes
60 Minutes
30 Minutes
30 Minutes
15 Minutes
45 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
ix
Course Overview
TSCM40_I
Configuring the Routing
45 Minutes
Course Goals
This course will prepare you to:
•
•
Understand the general handling of logistics master data in SAP ECC
Understand and describe the positioning, integration, and functions of the
planning area within the SAP ERP application
Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
•
Use the relevant master data elements for the modelling of planning and
production processes
Evaluate, describe, and implement the options provided by SAP-ERP-based
planning
•
SAP Software Component Information
The information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Components
and releases:
•
•
SAP ERP Central Component 5.0
SAP ERP Central Component 6.05
Important Information
It is strongly recommended to check necessary information published
on the SAP Service Market Place. All information essential for course
preparation like instructor guides, system setup guides, trouble shooting
guides, logon information, and so on, you will find under the alias /curr-info
(http://service.sap.com/curr-info).
In case you cannot access this site please ask the responsible education coordinator
(the sender of this document) to make the relevant information available to you.
x
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 1
Course Overview
1
Welcome the participants to the first week of the course and introduce yourself and
briefly the overall course content and objectives. Familiarize the participants with
the course schedule. Ask the participants to introduce themselves.
Unit Overview
The academy course TSCM40 operates exclusively within SAP ECC as far as
content, demonstrations, and exercises are concerned, dealing with the master data
background and production planning process in the system. The course builds on
the basics contained in the according e-learning sessions.
As an introduction, the course contents are outlined.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
Give an overview of the scope of the training
Unit Contents
Lesson: Academy Overview......................................................2
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
1
Unit 1: Course Overview
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
Academy Overview
2
Lesson Duration: 10 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson provides an overview of the training required for the Application
Associate Planning & Manufacturing with SAP ERP 6.0.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Give an overview of the scope of the training
Provide the participants with a brief overview of the academy course. Refer to the
e-learning courses that the participants should already have attended.
Business Example
Basic Training
The training courses TSCM40 (Planning/Manufacturing I) and TSCM42
(Planning/Manufacturing II (including case study)) provide the participants with
knowledge of the business processes of planning and manufacturing in a basic
training geared towards manufacturing companies.
In the training course TSCM40 (Planning/Manufacturing I), you learn about
the master data required for production (material masters, bills of material, work
centers, routings, etc.), including master data management, as well as about the
concepts and business processes of selected planning areas. The course deals
with the processes of production planning using material requirements planning
(ERP-PP-MRP module), as well as the different planning strategies for creating a
master plan. The course also demonstrates evaluation methods for evaluating the
planning results.
The follow-up training course TSCM42 (Planning/Manufacturing II (including
case study)) teaches you the different options for controlling production. This
includes order-based production with production orders or process orders,
repetitive manufacturing, and Kanban. These options provide effective support
for the complete manufacturing process including the process steps of material
staging, sequencing, creation of shop floor papers, confirmation, goods receipt,
and settlement of production activities. The focus is set on production order
management. An overview is provided of the other options named above.
2
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Academy Overview
Moreover, the training course also contains a summary of capacity planning as
well as a case study. The latter allows you to apply the knowledge you have
acquired by configuring specified integrated business processes. The training
course ends with an exam (certification C_TSCM42_65).
The following diagram provides an overview of the scope of the training.
Figure 1: Consultant Profile Application Associate - Planning &
Manufacturing with SAP ERP 6.0: Basic Training
Alternative project team training
The training materials for the Solution Academy are predominantly based on the
corresponding standard training course, but are supplemented by topics that are
relevant for consultants. The following table shows the topics that were taken
from the standard training course and the topics that are dealt with in addition:
Note that the e-learning courses are not included in this overview.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
3
Unit 1: Course Overview
TSCM40_I
Solution Academy Training
Course Content
TSCM40 (Planning/Manufacturing
I)
5 days PLM114 (Basic Data)
5 days SCM240 (Production Planning
(ERP))
TSCM42 (Planning/Manufacturing
II (incl. Case Study))
4.5 days SCM310 (Production Orders)
0.5 days KANBAN from SCM300
(Production Overview)
1 day from SCM365 (Capacity
Planning (ERP))
1 day Repetitive Manufacturing and
Process Manufacturing from SCM300
(Production Overview)
2.5 days Integrated Case Study
(academy only!)
3 hours Certification Exam
C_TSCM42_65
4
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Academy Overview
Facilitated Discussion
Optional
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
Ask the customers who is intending to take the Certification Exam.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
5
Unit 1: Course Overview
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Give an overview of the scope of the training
6
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Give an overview of the scope of the training
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
7
Unit Summary
8
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 2
Overview of Master Data for Product
Management and Manufacturing
7
This unit is designed as an introduction to the use of master data in
production planning and execution in SAP ERP. Participants might have taken
SCM100/SCM300 or SCM130 to have a more detailed overview of the Planning
and execution functions in SAP ERP. This section is designed as a refresher for
those participants and enlighten participants who have not taken the necessary
prerequisites.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces you to how master data will be used in supporting the SAP
ERP production planning and execution process. The different master data and
organizational data are discused at a summary level. Each object will be covered
in more detail in following lessons.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the types of data used in modeling and executing manufacturing
in SAP ERP
Identify the production planning organizational units (configuration)
Identify the procurement organizational units
Identify the Sales and Distribution organizational units
Identify the production planning master data objects
Unit Contents
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP ........................................... 11
Demonstration: Configuration in SAP ERP .............................. 12
Procedure: Configuring SAP ERP ........................................ 14
Demonstration: Production Planning Master Data ...................... 15
Demonstration: Transactional Data ....................................... 16
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
9
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production ..... 20
Demonstration: Organizational Structures in SAP ERP................ 25
Demonstration: Views and Fields in the Material Master .............. 28
Demonstration: BOMs ...................................................... 29
Demonstration: Work Centers ............................................. 31
Demonstration: Routings ................................................... 32
10
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
8
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP
Types of Data in SAP ERP
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will discuss the different types of data that users and project team
members will deal with during an implementation and after go live.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the types of data used in modeling and executing manufacturing
in SAP ERP
This section is designed for true beginners. If you have an experienced class, gloss
over the material at high level. This will be an introduction to configuration.
Business Example
Your company, Precision Pumps, has just purchased SAP ERP to efficiently run
your business. As a member of the project team in a company that manufactures
pumps, you are responsible for the introduction of basic data for manufacturing.
The defined basic data will be used in the procurement, scheduling, manufacturing,
and costing of all components and products necessary for the manufacturing of
pumps. You must introduce the basic concepts of configuration in SAP ERP, as
well as master data and organization data.
Data Types in SAP ERP
When dealing with a software system as robust as SAP ERP, you need to have
perspective on how your business will be modeled in a software environment. In
SAP ERP, users will have essentially three types of data:
•
•
•
Configuration data
Master data
Transactional data
Configuration Data
Configuration data is often referred to as one-time data. This means that the data
should not change, but if it does it will be tracked or controlled.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
11
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Figure 2: Configuration in SAP ERP
During an implementation, the SAP ERP landscape will typically consist of three
servers: DEV (development), QA (quality assurance), and PROD (production).
Each server may have several clients. The DEV server is where a sandbox client
will exist, as well as the golden client, where the final configuration resides.
During the project, team members will try different iterations of configuration
in the sandbox client and test the results. If the results meet the organizations
requirements, they are configured again in the golden client. From there, the Basis
team moves it to the QA server for further evaluation. The Basis team will us a
tool called the Change and Transport System (CTS). This allows them to track the
configuration changes from DEV to QA, and QA to PROD.
Once the configuration changes are moved to the QA server, integration testing
will take place within the PP module and within the other applications in SAP
ERP, such as materials management (MM) and Sales and Distribution (SD), for
example. Once fully tested in the QA system, the configuration will be transferred
to PROD, or the production server/client.
Demonstration: Configuration in SAP ERP
Purpose
Show New Project Team members how to Access IMG
12
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Show students Transaction code SPRO. Do not bother to show menu path as
it seems to change for every new release.
2010
2.
Select Reference IMG
3.
follow menu path : Production → Basic Data → Bill of Material → Control
Data for Bill of Material → Define Default Parameters
4.
Explain Configuration
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
13
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
10
TSCM40_I
Configuring SAP ERP
1.
Enter transaction code SPRO.
2.
Select Reference IMG.
3.
Choose Production → Basic Data → Bill of Material → Control Data for
Bill of Material → Define Default Parameters.
Master Data in SAP ERP
Configuration will be the foundation upon which most master data will be built.
Master data is often referred to as “slowly changing” data. This means the data of
a particular object does not change all the time, but often several times a year.
Figure 3: Master Data
Master data in SAP ERP is a centralized function. This means that the data is be
intended to be stored once and replication is to be avoided. The master data that
will be used for production planning in SAP ERP is as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
14
Material masters
Bills of material
Work centers
Task lists/routings
Cost centers
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP
Business users will be limited to creating, changing, or displaying data based on
their role within the organization. During implementations, each business must
determine how the Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) process within SAP
ERP will integrate with their specific business processes.
As organizations change, so must the master data to support the business; this
needs to be modeled properly within the SAP ERP environment.
Demonstration: Production Planning Master Data
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Show users the menu paths they will be using over the next several days.
2.
Follow Menu path : Logistics → Production → Master Data
3.
Point out the folders for the material master, Bill of material, Work Center
and Routing.
Transactional Data
Every day, businesses perform tens of thousands of transactions that make the
business function. Some transactions are directly related to outside events with
customers or suppliers. Other events are internal to the business and affect the
interaction between departments within a business or division.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
15
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Figure 4: Transactional Data
Within SAP ERP, all transactional data is related to some form of master data or
configuration data. In the world of production planning, you will be executing
planning runs that will be generating replenishment suggestions, generating
production execution directions, or executing production confirmations. In SAP
ERP production planning, all transactional data typically revolves around the
material master, bill of material, or routing.
In this class you will learn how master data works; however you may be asked
to analyze how it works in conjunction with day-to-day business events or
transactions, such as a production order.
Demonstration: Transactional Data
Purpose
Demonstrate creating a production order and the need for master data
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow menu path: Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order
→ Create → With Material
16
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
2010
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP
2.
Enter material T-F200, plant 1000, order type PP01. Select Enter
3.
Enter 10 pcs and enter a finish date of on month from today. Select Enter
4.
Show customers the Material master , Bill of Material, Routing and work
centers.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
17
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
18
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Types of Data in SAP ERP
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the types of data used in modeling and executing manufacturing
in SAP ERP
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
19
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
Lesson:
13
TSCM40_I
Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in
Production
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will be exposed to organizational data and its potential impact
on production planning in SAP ERP.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Identify the production planning organizational units (configuration)
Identify the procurement organizational units
Identify the Sales and Distribution organizational units
Identify the production planning master data objects
This lesson is designed for new customers that have never worked SAP ERP or
production planning. If class participants are knowledgeable in SAP ERP use this
as an overview and move through the material quickly.
Note: We have included information about other application
organizational levels as students will come across the objects within the
PP master data. It is collateral information only. If they wish to know
more about SD organizational structures suggest SCM600. If they wish to
know more about MM organizational Structures suggest SCM500.
Business Example
As a member of the project team, you must understand how organizational
structures, production planning, and master data are used to develop an
organizational plan to support existing and future business.
Organizational Objects in Production Planning
The foundation of the SAP ERP system is the organizational structure that will be
configured at the early stages of your company’s implementation of the software.
All other configuration or master data will be built on top of the organizational
structures.
20
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Figure 5: Organizational Structure
To better understand the structure, you must familiarize your self with several
definitions:
Client
The client is a unit within an SAP ERP system that is self-contained both
in legal and organizational terms, and in terms of data, with separate master
records and an independent set of tables. From a business viewpoint, the
client represents a corporate group, for example.
The client is the highest hierarchical level in the SAP ERP system.
Specifications or data that you make and enter at this level apply to all
company codes and all other organizational units. Therefor, you do not have
to enter the specifications and data in the system at client level more than
once. This ensures a uniform data status.
Access authorization is assigned on a client-specific basis. A user master
record must be created for every user in the client in which he or she wishes
to work. If the Client field has not been prepopulated, each user must
specify a client key when logging on to an SAP ERP client. The client key
is uniquely defined in the system and is a three-digit number. In this way,
the user specifies the client in which he or she wishes to work. All user
input is stored and separated by client.
The processing and evaluation of data is likewise carried out on a
client-specific basis.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
21
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Company code
A company code is the smallest organizational unit of external accounting
for which a complete, self-contained bookkeeping system can be replicated.
This includes the entry of all events that require posting to the accounts and
the creation of a complete audit trail for balance sheets and profit-and-loss
statements. A company code represents an independent unit producing its
own balance sheet, for example, a company within a corporate group (client).
You can set up several company codes in one client in order to keep separate
sets of financial books. You can use a special Customizing function to copy a
company code. In the process, company-code-dependent specifications are
adopted for your new company code.
A company code is defined in the system by means of a four-character
alphanumeric key that is unique in the client.
Plant
The plant is an organizational unit within logistics that subdivides an
enterprise from the viewpoints of production, procurement, and materials
planning.
Storage Location
The storage location is an organizational unit that facilitates the
differentiation of stocks of materials within a plant. Inventory management
on a quantity basis is carried out in the plant at storage-location level. The
physical inventory is also carried out at this level.
A storage location is defined by means of a four-character alphanumeric key
that is unique in the plant.
Organizational units are tightly linked to each other to quickly process the relevant
data for a business area. For example:
Plant
1000 is assigned to
company code
1000
Company code
1000 is assigned to
controlling area
1000
Therefore, whenever a transaction involving cost occurs in plant 1000, the relevant
records in controlling area 1000 are automatically updated. The valuation area is
the organizational level at which material quantities and values are managed. It is
essential for product costing that a valuation area exists for each plant.
Within each valuation level, you can differentiate between values and quantities
for valuation (in-house production and external procurement) by using different
valuation types. In Customizing for materials management (define valuation type),
balance sheet valuation is set up at company-code or valuation-area level.
Selection of valuation-area level automatically causes the creation of a valuation
area for each plant. To use product costing and order costing, inventory must be
valuated at plant level.
22
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Purchasing Organization
Outside of production planning, other areas of the SAP ERP system need
additional configuration to support their specific functional needs. In addition to
the client and company code requirements, purchasing requires an additional
organizational structure.
Figure 6: Purchase Organization
A purchasing group is a key for a buyer or a group of buyers who are responsible
for certain purchasing activities. Internally, the purchasing group is responsible for
the procurement of a material or class of materials. Externally, it is the principal
channel for an enterprise’s dealings with its vendors.
Note: The purchasing group is not assigned to other units of the enterprise
structure in SAP ERP.
Purchasing groups are not defined in Customizing for the enterprise structure, but
in Customizing by choosing Materials Management → Purchasing → Create
Purchasing Groups.
The purchasing organization is an organizational unit within logistics that
subdivides the enterprise according to the purchasing requirements. A purchasing
organization procures materials or services, negotiates conditions of purchase with
vendors, and assumes responsibility for these transactions.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
23
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
You can incorporate purchasing into the company structure by assigning the
purchasing organization to a company code and to plants. This means that
you can take into account whether purchasing is organized on a centralized or
decentralized basis in your company. You can have a combination of these two
organizational forms.
You can assign several purchasing organizations to one company code.
However, a certain purchasing organization can only belong to one company
code. You can decide not to assign the purchasing organization to a company
code (cross-company-code purchasing). There is an m:n relationship between
purchasing organizations and plants. In other words, you can assign several plants
to one purchasing organization, and one plant to several purchasing organizations.
Sales Organization
Similar to the purchasing side of an organization, the group responsible for sales
has additional unique business requirements.
Figure 7: Sales Organization
The sales organization is responsible for selling and distributing goods and
services. It is liable for the products sold and responsible for a customer’s rights of
recourse. The sales organization can be used to represent a regional, national, or
international subdivision of a marketplace in which products are sold.
A sales organization is uniquely assigned to a company code, however a company
code may have more than one sales organization assigned to it. If the Sales and
Distribution module is used, at least one sales organization must be defined.
The sales organization is the highest summation level in sales statistics. Customer
master data will be created for each sales organization. Documents created
throughout the Sales and Distribution process (order, delivery, and billing
document) will belong to a sales organization.
24
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
A distribution channel is a means through which saleable materials or services
reach the customer. A distribution channel is assigned to a sales organization. A
sales organization may have more than one distribution channel assigned to it. If
the Sales and Distribution module is used, at least one distribution channel must
be defined and assigned to a sales organization.
A distribution channel allows customers to be treated differently depending on the
channel they are assigned to. For example, a customer assigned to a wholesale
distribution channel may receive preferred pricing compared to a retail distribution
channel customer.
A sales organization can have several divisions assigned to it, but must have at
least one division. A division is used to group materials and services. A division
can represent a product group or product line, which allows:
•
•
Restricted price agreements to a certain division
Statistical analysis by division
A sales area is a unique and allowable combination of a sales organization,
distribution channel, and division. Each Sales and Distribution document is
assigned to exactly one sales area. This assignment cannot be changed. A sales
area can belong to only one company code. This relationship is created by the
assignment of the sales organization to the company code in Customizing.
The shipping point is the organizational element that manages your shipping
activities. Each outbound delivery is processed at a shipping point.
A shipping point can be a physical location, for example, a loading dock, a mail
room, or a railroad depot. It can also be a logical location, for example, a group of
employees responsible for processing next-day deliveries or less-than-truckload
orders.
Shipping points are assigned to plants. A shipping point should have physical
proximity to the plant to which it is assigned. More than one shipping point can
be assigned to a plant. Several plants can also have a shared shipping point
assigned to them, for example, several plants in same physical proximity sharing
the same railroad depot.
Demonstration: Organizational Structures in SAP ERP
Purpose
Show participants how org structures are assigned.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
25
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow Menu Path: SPRO → Enterprise Structure → Assignment →
Logistics-General → Assign Plant to Company Code →
2.
Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area...
3.
SPRO → Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution →
Assign Sales Org to Company Code...
4.
SPRO → Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Materials Management →
Assign Purchasing Org to Company Code...
Master Data Objects in Production Planning
Once your company has established an organization structure, the different
business areas can proceed with developing the application-specific master data
to activate the necessary functionality required to run the day-to-day activities
of your business.
Figure 8: Master Data for Production Planning
26
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Within the PP application, several pieces of master data are required to carry
out planning and execution functionality. The following master data objects are
required to initiate planning and execution functions in SAP ERP:
•
•
•
•
Material master
Bill of material
Work center
Routing/task list
Material Masters
Material Master Record: Definition
The material master contains information on the materials that a company
constructs, procures, manufactures, stores, and sells. The information is stored in
a database that is a central source of data on materials. The material master record
integrates data from different areas of a company.
Figure 9: Material Masters in SAP ERP
For the company, the material master record represents the central source for data
on materials. The material master is used by various SAP logistics applications.
The material can be a finished product (product or article), a semi-finished product
(subassembly), or a raw material (purchased part).
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
27
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Demonstration: Views and Fields in the Material
Master
Purpose
Demonstrate the material master
System Data
System:
Client:
8##
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
P-100 in plant 1000
1. Show material P-100 in plant 1000. Follow menu Path: Logistics →
Production → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change
→ Immediately
Bills of Material
A bill of material (BOM) is a complete, formally structured list of the components
that make up a product or assembly. The list contains a description and object
number for each component, together with the quantity and unit of measure. Bills
of material can exist at the plant and/or client level. The header and components all
contain validity dates that can be affected using Engineering Change Management.
28
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Figure 10: Bills of Material In SAP ERP
Bills of material will be integrated with the material master and can be used in
conjunction with routing to schedule a more precise usage point. These BOMs
are used in material requirements planning, production, procurement, and product
costing.
A BOM consists of header material and BOM items (components). The base
quantity in the header material specifies the finished production quantity on which
the component quantities are based. BOM items indicate individual parts and
assemblies, which are identified by their material numbers.
BOMs are single level. A BOM item can also contain components, so that
multi-level production can be described by the single-level BOMs from the
finished product, assemblies, or assemblies of the assemblies (and so on). In
addition to stock items, which flow into the finished product, a BOM can also
contain documents or text items.
Demonstration: BOMs
Purpose
In the BOM P-100 show the BOM header and the components with their item
categories.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
2010
8xx
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
29
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. In the BOM P-100 show the BOM header and the components with their
item categories.
Show material P-100 in plant 1000. Follow menu Path: Logistics →
Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material →
Material BOM → Change
Work Centers
A work center is a location that defines when and where production resources are
required according to order requirements. In different companies, work centers
are also called machine, labor, or capacity centers.
Figure 11: Work Centers in SAP ERP
Work centers can be defined as individual or multiple machines, people, tools, and
so on. Work centers are used in routings (routings, standard networks, inspection
plans, maintenance task lists, and rough-cut planning profiles) and in orders.
30
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Demonstration: Work Centers
Purpose
Where to find work centers.
System Data
System:
Client:
8##
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Show Work Center 1310 in plant 1000. Follow menu Path: Logistics →
Production → Master Data → Work Center → Work Center → Change
Task Lists and Routings
A routing defines operations and the sequence in which they are carried out. The
following is also defined in the routing:
•
•
•
•
2010
Where the work is to be done
How long the work should take
What materials are needed for each operation
What tools and fixtures are required
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
31
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Figure 12: Routings in SAP ERP
A routing shows operations in a sequence and acts as a template for production
orders. Each step defines the work center in which specific work will be
accomplished. The planned time for each operation is stored in the routing as
a standard value.
These standard values are the basis for:
•
•
•
Lead time scheduling
Product costing
Capacity planning
Demonstration: Routings
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
32
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
1.
2010
Show Routing P-100 in plant 1000. Follow menu Path: Logistics →
Production → Master Data → Routings → Routings→ Standard Routing →
Change
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
33
Unit 2: Overview of Master Data for Product Management and Manufacturing
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Perform overview of lesson.
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
•
•
34
What are the PP-relevant organizational elements?
Describe how master data objects are dependant on one another.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Use of Organizational Data and Master Data in Production
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Identify the production planning organizational units (configuration)
•
Identify the procurement organizational units
•
Identify the Sales and Distribution organizational units
•
Identify the production planning master data objects
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
35
Unit Summary
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the types of data used in modeling and executing manufacturing
in SAP ERP
•
Identify the production planning organizational units (configuration)
•
Identify the procurement organizational units
•
Identify the Sales and Distribution organizational units
•
Identify the production planning master data objects
36
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 3
Organizational Data in Supply Chain
Management
27
In this lesson you will introduce the participants to the concepts of configuration
and the IMG. This lesson is designed to be as informative to new users and a
refresher for experienced users.
Unit Overview
In this unit, you will be introduced to how your company’s organization structure
will be mapped out in SAP ERP. In addition, you will see how this organizational
structure will affect your master data structures and maintenance process.
Lastly, you will be introduced to the concept of configuration in the SAP ERP
Implementation Guide (IMG).
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Describe the purpose of a plant in SAP ERP
Describe the purpose of a storage location in SAP ERP
Describe the purpose of an MRP area in SAP ERP
Unit Contents
Lesson: Plants ................................................................... 38
Demonstration: Configuration of a Plant ................................. 40
Procedure: Configuring a Plant............................................ 42
Lesson: Storage Locations ..................................................... 45
Demonstration: Configuration of a Storage Location ................... 48
Procedure: Configuring a Storage Location ............................. 50
Lesson: MRP Areas ............................................................. 53
Demonstration: Configuring and Using an MRP Area .................. 55
Procedure: Using MRP Areas ............................................. 57
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
37
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
Lesson:
28
TSCM40_I
Plants
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about plants in relation to the organizational structure
and how they are integrated into master data.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of a plant in SAP ERP
In the past this course has never expanded on organizational structures. The point
of this unit is to show participants how important the plant is, especially the
plant calendar since it will affect both order scheduling and Planned independent
requirements (forecast)
Business Example
Your company currently has many locations where they store and manufacture
products. In order to make the most of out of your implementation, you must be
aware of how to model various installations in SAP ERP. You want to learn more
about how the SAP ERP plant will fit your supply chain model.
Plants in SAP ERP
The plant is a logistics-based organizational element that is used by all the
logistics modules. The plant is assigned to a company code, and a company
code may have many plants assigned to it. In production planning, the main
organizational element is the plant. A plant is typically configured in conjunction
with the company code and valuation area due to tax rules and regulations
38
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Plants
Figure 13: Definition of a Plant
A plant may be defined for different purposes, depending on the role the plant
will have in the organization. In Sales and Distribution, a plant can represent
the location from which finished goods materials are stored and distributed. A
plant may also be the location from which services are rendered. In materials
management, a plant represents a location where material flow is managed. Stock
requirements are managed from inbound and outbound perspectives. Material
stock is consumed, planned and purchased in the plant. In production, a plant
represents a manufacturing facility where materials are produced.
Figure 14: Plant in the Organizational Structure
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
39
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
When creating a new plant, you can use the plant copy function. In the process,
all entries in the plant table and all Customizing and system tables that depend
on it (and in which the plant occurs as the key) are taken into account. A plant
is defined in the system by means of a four-character alphanumeric key that
is unique in the client.
Once a plant is configured, it must be assigned to several other organizational
elements to assure cross-functional integrations. Here is an example of where the
plant will be assigned:
•
•
•
•
Company code
Business area
Sales organization
Purchasing organization
Plants are often determined as single geographical locations where those
necessary business functions must be tracked. In certain situations, companies can
combine several locations that are closely geographically located into one plant
to minimize the organizational hierarchy. Due to tax reasons, some companies
will split a single location into multiple plants. For example, companies will sell
their finished goods to another company immediately after production, while
the distribution location belongs to another facility. Both plants may exist in the
same geographical location, but remain as two separate plants reporting to two
separate company codes.
As mentioned earlier, the plant is the key focal point for production planning. All
master data, planning, and execution activities are defined and performed the plant
level. Some examples of these dependencies are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calendar
Material master
Bill of material
Work center
Routing
Planned/production order types
MRP configuration
Demonstration: Configuration of a Plant
Purpose
Create a Plant
System Data
System:
Client:
40
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Plants
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Demonstrate the configuration of a plant. Follow IMG Menu Path:
Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics-General → Define, copy,
delete, check plant
2.
Select Define Plant. Select Plant 1000 and select
Details
Note: Point out the Factory Calendar that is assigned to the plant.
Inform participants that this calendar will affect order scheduling
and demand during planning.
3.
Select Back twice to the pop-up window and select Copy, delete, check plant.
4.
Select
5.
Enter Copy From 1000 and copy to P114 and select
6.
Once completed exit to the main menu and demonstrate the following IMG
transactions
7.
IMG Menu Path: Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics-General
→ Assign plant to company code
Copy Org. Object
Continue (Enter)
Review Company code 1000 Note: Plant P114 has been assigned to company code 1000.
8.
IMG Menu Path: Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data →
Order → Define Order-type Dependent Parameters
Select Position and enter plant P114
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
41
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
31
TSCM40_I
Configuring a Plant
1.
Choose Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics-General → Define,
copy, delete, check plant.
2.
Choose Define Plant. Select Plant 1000 and choose
3.
Select Back twice to the dialog box and select Copy, delete, check plant.
4.
Choose
5.
Enter 1000 in Copy From field and P114 in Copy To field and choose
Continue (Enter).
6.
Once completed, exit to the main menu.
7.
Choose Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics-General → Assign
plant to company code.
Details.
Copy Org. Object.
Review Company code 1000.
Note: Plant P114 has been assigned to company code 1000.
8.
Choose Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Logistics-General → Assign
plant to company code.
Review Company code 1000.
Note: Plant P114 has been assigned to company code 1000.
42
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Plants
Facilitated Discussion
Lesson Review
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
•
2010
Why are plants important to Production planning?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
43
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of a plant in SAP ERP
44
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
33
Lesson: Storage Locations
Storage Locations
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn how the storage location is incorporated into the
organizational structure and how it impacts master data in production planning.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of a storage location in SAP ERP
In previous versions of this class storage locations were never given much
consideration. The group responsible for inventory management will typically
control these. However, manufacturing will decide if backflushing is done or
MRP Areas will be needed. This requires participants to have a more thorough
understanding of storage locations in SAP ERP.
Business Example
Your company currently has many areas where they store products within a facility.
In order to make the most of out of your implementation, you must be aware of
how to model areas in SAP ERP. You want to know how the SAP ERP storage
location will fit your supply chain model for planning and execution purposes.
Storage Locations in SAP ERP
The storage location is an organizational unit that facilitates the differentiation of
stocks of materials within a plant. Inventory management on a quantity basis is
carried out in the plant at storage-location level. The physical inventory is also
carried out at this level within materials management and Inventory Management.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
45
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
Figure 15: Storage Locations in SAP ERP
As with all organizational elements, storage locations are configuration and are
defined in the IMG. A storage location is defined by means of a four-character
alphanumeric key that is unique in the plant.
The enterprise structure is created through the assignment of organizational levels
to each other. A client may therefore contain several company codes. In turn, a
company code may contain several plants. However, a plant can only ever belong
to one single company code in the SAP system.
Hint: Since the plant key is unique in a client, and a plant can only belong
to one company code, by specifying the plant you simultaneously specify
the company code.
Several storage locations may be assigned to a plant, but when a certain storage
location is assigned to a plant it forms a compound key. Storage locations are
defined especially for a plant and are thus assigned to this plant. The storage
location key need only be unique within a plant. Within a client, the same key can
be used for different storage locations, since when you specify a storage location
you always have to specify the plant as well.
46
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Storage Locations
Figure 16: Storage Location Address
Note: To create storage locations, in the IMG, choose Enterprise Structure
→ Definition → Materials Management → Maintain Storage Location.
Here you can create a storage location in reference to a plant.
Upon creating a storage location, you will define a unique four-character value.
This value is alphanumeric, so a company could create an exhaustive number of
storage locations for each facility. In addition, when creating a storage location,
companies have the opportunity to define a different address for each storage
location. This may be done for one of several reasons:
•
•
The storage location represents a sub-contractor location where inventory
is held.
The storage location represents a company facility with a different shipping
address.
A material can be stored at several storage locations. To store data specific to each
storage location, you must create the relevant material master record (or extend an
existing material master record) for each storage location. If the material master
record already exists, it can be extended to include storage-location-specific data
either manually or automatically.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
47
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
The material master record is automatically extended the first time a goods receipt
is posted for the material. All data specific to the storage location is updated in the
material master record. The system can be configured in this way in Customizing
by choosing Materials Management → Inventory Management and Physical
Inventory → Goods Receipt → Create Storage Location Automatically.
In this step, you specify whether the automatic creation of storage location data is
allowed for goods receipts. This is advisable if you want to post a goods receipt
without having to maintain the storage location view of the material master record
in advance. First, you have to allow automatic creation per plant. You then have to
explicitly allow the creation of storage location data for each movement type. The
storage location data is only created if the quantity is posted to “standard” storage
location stock. It is not created for receipts into a special stock (for example,
into sales order stock).
Note: The standard system is set in such a way that the storage location
data is created automatically for all types of receipts (goods receipt with or
without reference, stock transfers, initial entry of stock balances, reversal
of goods issues, and so on).
To manually create storage locations, enter the storage locations for a material
master record collectively. This is much less time-consuming than entering the
data for each storage location individually. This can be performed from the
application menu path by choosing Logistics → Production → Master Data →
Material Master → Other → Enter Storage Locations (MMSC).
Once a material exists in a storage location users, will see a Storage location view
on the material master. In addition, they will be able to make settings for material
requirements planning (MRP) at the storage-location level in the MRP 4 view.
Demonstration: Configuration of a Storage Location
Purpose
Demonstrate to Participants how to create a new Storage location for your plant
P114
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. To create storage locations follow the IMG menu path: Enterprise Structure
→ Definition → Materials Management → Maintain Storage Location.
2.
48
Choose
Execute
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
2010
Lesson: Storage Locations
3.
Enter Plant P114
4.
Choose New Entries
5.
Enter the storage location number OS01, and a description of Off Site 1
6.
Select the new storage location and select the folder Addresses of Storage
locations TWICE
7.
Choose new entries, and place a 1 in theNO. (sequential Address number)
Field, and put any address in the fields
8.
Choose
Save
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
49
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
37
50
TSCM40_I
Configuring a Storage Location
1.
In the IMG, choose Enterprise Structure → Definition → Materials
Management → Maintain Storage Location.
2.
Choose
3.
Enter Plant P114 and choose
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
Enter the storage location number OS01 and a description of OFF Site 1.
6.
Select the new storage location and select the folder Addresses of Storage
locations twice.
7.
Choose new entries, place a 1 in theNO (sequential address number) field,
and put any address in the fields.
8.
Choose
Execute.
Continue.
Save.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Storage Locations
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
51
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of a storage location in SAP ERP
52
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
39
Lesson: MRP Areas
MRP Areas
Lesson Duration: 15 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will discuss the concept of MRP areas and how they may be an
alternative to creating additional plants in your organizational model.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of an MRP area in SAP ERP
This lesson is to be position to the participants as a possible alternative to
modeling multiple plants within a given location. For example a ship yard may
be laid out over several square kilometers/miles, with various buildings. Instead
of each building being a plant, MRP areas May be an alternative to creating
multiple plants.
Note: MRP Areas are only related to planning, so they have no financial
impacts
If more information is required, direct students to the online help or SCM240.
Business Example
Your company currently has many areas where they store products within a
facility. To make the most of out of your implementation, you must be aware of
how to model areas in SAP ERP. Often times your company has requirements to
keep inventory and demand separate from other areas of the business. You want to
know how the SAP ERP MRP area will fit your supply chain model for planning
and execution purposes.
MRP Areas in SAP ERP
During the blueprint process of an implementation, when teams are considering
the organizational structure, the will have to consider not only financial impacts
but those of the logistics planning and execution.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
53
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
Note that MRP areas are not part of the standard org structure. However they will
use storage locations as part of their definition. This may lead to creating addition
storage locations to use with MRP Areas, than what was previously decided.
Figure 17: Organizational Structure Overview
In many situations, the logistics side of the business has specific requirements
from customers to keep inventory and demand separate from other streams of
demand. This may be due to subcontracting requirements or storing spare/service
parts separate from the rest of the facility. One option companies have is creating
a separate plant, but from a configuration standpoint this requires a lot of overhead
and possible maintenance while having no positive financial impact.
MRP areas are not part of the physical organization structure, but can use the
storage locations within a plant to break up requirements and inventory during
planning.
54
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: MRP Areas
Figure 18: MRP Areas
MRP areas are defined as part of MRP configuration. There are three types of
MRP areas: plant, storage location, and Vendor (subcontractor). We will only
focus on the storage location aspect since that can affect the modeling of your
organizational structure.
Note: To find MRP Areas in the IMG, choose Production → Materials
Requirements Planning → Master Data → MRP Areas → Define MRP
Areas.
When creating MRP areas, you must specify the MRP area type, plant, and
receiving storage location for Type 2 (storage location). Companies have the
options of assigning one or more storage locations to each MRP area. Once an
MRP area is defined, users must assign material masters to the MRP areas they
wish to segregate from the rest of the plant.
Note: When demand is placed at the storage location level – either through
sales order, demand management, or via some dependent demand – if
the material master is assigned to an MRP area that contains the storage
location, all demand and inventory are kept separate from the plant.
Demonstration: Configuring and Using an MRP Area
Purpose
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
55
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. IMG Menu path to MRP Areas: Production → Materials Requirements
Planning → Master Data → MRP Areas → Define MRP Areas
2.
56
Select New Entries
Field
Value
MRP Area
OS01-P114
Description
Out Sided Storage
MRP Area Type
02 - Storage Location
Plant
P114
3.
Press Enter
4.
Enter receiving storage location OS01, and select
5.
From the application menu follow: Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Material Master → Material → Change → immediately
6.
Enter T-F1## and select MRP 1 at Plant 1000.
7.
At the bottom of the MRP 1 screen select MRP Areas.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Save
2010
TSCM40_I
42
2010
Lesson: MRP Areas
Using MRP Areas
1.
In the IMG, choose Production → Materials Requirements Planning →
Master Data → MRP Areas → Define MRP Areas.
2.
Choose New Entries and enter the data from the table below.
Field
Value
MRP Area
OS01-P114
Description
Out Sided Storage
MRP Area Type
02 - Storage Location
Plant
P114
3.
Press ENTER.
4.
Enter receiving storage location OS01and choose
5.
From the application menu, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Material Master → Material → Change → immediately.
6.
Enter T-F1## and select MRP 1 at Plant 1000.
7.
At the bottom of the MRP 1 screen, select MRP Areas.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Save.
57
Unit 3: Organizational Data in Supply Chain Management
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Review why a company might use MRP areas instead of plants.
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
58
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: MRP Areas
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of an MRP area in SAP ERP
Related Information
For more information as it pertains to production planning, see online help or
SAP course SCM240.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
59
Unit Summary
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of a plant in SAP ERP
•
Describe the purpose of a storage location in SAP ERP
•
Describe the purpose of an MRP area in SAP ERP
60
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 4
Material Masters
45
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants the different phases of a
material masters life cycle. This will include, creation, updates, and deletion. In
this unit you will create several material masters that will be used in the bill of
material lessons.
Unit Overview
In this unit you will be introduced to the concept of the SAP ERP material master.
You will be instructed on the creation, maintenance, and configuration of the
material master. In addition, you will execute various transactions to manage
the process surrounding its life cycle.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010
Describe the organizational layout of the material master
List the prerequisites to creating material masters
Use various methods to create material masters
Describe the request process with interactive forms and explain how it might
benefit your business
Describe how the material master can use classification to include
company-specific fields
Describe how classification can be used for batch management of inventory
Describe how classification can be used for variant configuration
Describe different ways to update or change the material master
Demonstrate the mass maintenance features of the material master
Describe how the material master can be updated using the request processes
with interactive forms for materials management
Describe the archiving and deletion process for the material master
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
61
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Unit Contents
Lesson: Overview of the Material Master..................................... 63
Demonstration: Organizational Levels of the Material Master......... 66
Procedure: Organizational Levels of the Material Master .............. 67
Lesson: Creating a Material Master ........................................... 70
Demonstration: Prerequisite for Creating Material Master ............. 77
Demonstration: Setting Up Defaults ...................................... 80
Demonstration: Creating a Material from Scratch....................... 81
Demonstration: Setting Up MRP Profiles ................................ 82
Exercise 1: Creating Material Masters.................................... 87
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master ...............................102
Demonstration: Updating the Material Master ..........................103
Demonstration: Demonstrate Set up of Classification .................106
Demonstration: .............................................................108
Demonstration: Demonstrate Batch classification of the material
Master ........................................................................ 110
Demonstration: Demonstrate variant configuration of the material
master ........................................................................ 113
Exercise 2: Material Classification ....................................... 115
Lesson: Managing the Material Master ......................................122
Demonstration: Extending the Material Master.........................124
Demonstration: Changing the Material Type............................125
Demonstration: Change Material Master MM02 .......................126
Demonstration: .............................................................128
Demonstration: Demonstrate Updating Material Masters with Mass
Maintenance.................................................................130
Demonstration: Demonstrate Archiving the Material Master .........134
Exercise 3: Managing Material Masters .................................139
62
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
47
Lesson: Overview of the Material Master
Overview of the Material Master
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about the material master at a high level and its
purpose in SAP ERP.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the material master
This lesson is designed to be an overview for the material master to gain introduce
them to a specific topic. The important element of this lesson is to ensure students
know the data exists in multiple tables and are attached to organizational structures.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing material master files, you must be aware of
the structural design of the objects in SAP ERP. You want to learn how the material
master is structured to integrate it with several business areas in your company.
Introduction to the Material Master
The material master contains information on the materials that a company
constructs, procures, manufactures, stores, and sells. The information is stored in
a database that is a central source of data on materials. The material master record
integrates data from different areas of a company.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
63
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Figure 19: The Material Master
For a company, the material master record represents the central source for data on
materials, and is used by various SAP logistics applications. The material can be a
finished product (product or article), a semi-finished product (subassembly), or a
raw material (purchased part).
The material master can be valid for many different areas within the business.
All data is maintained in several centralized tables, based on relevance to the
particular part of the organizational structure. The material master is used by
all SAP R/3 logistics applications. It controls whether a material is purchased,
produced, or sold.
Every area of responsibility can have a material master view. Because different
user departments in a company work with the same material, and each of these
departments wants to store different information on the material, you can
subdivide material master data according to the department to which it belongs.
Each department then has its own material master record view and is responsible
for the data being correct.
The data that you maintain in the following views is used by production planning
(PP) functions:
•
•
•
•
64
The basic data view includes general data, such as the material number,
material description, base unit of measure, and technical data.
The classification view contains user-defined class assignments for a
material.
The materials planning view contains plant-specific data used in
procurement planning.
The scheduling view contains plant-specific data used for scheduling
materials for production.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Material Master
Figure 20: Organizational Levels of the Material Master
Some material data is valid on all organizational levels and other data is only
valid for specific levels. So that the material data can be managed centrally in the
company without clogging up your data with redundant information, the material
master is structured hierarchically, reflecting a company’s structure. In SAP ERP,
the only elements that directly impact production planning are client, plant, and
storage location.
General material data that applies to the whole company is stored on client level.
This includes material descriptions, base units of measure, and conversion factors
for alternative units of measure. This data is contained in the table MARA.
All data that applies to a plant and its assigned storage locations is stored on plant
level. Examples of this kind of data are MRP and forecasting data. This data is
contained in the table MARC.
All data that applies to a specific storage location is stored on storage location level.
This is mainly storage location stock. This data is contained in the table MARD.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
65
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
The material master is a linkage of several tables, defined by their relationship to
the organizational structure. Several of the main material master tables are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MARA - Client
MARC - Plant
MARD - Storage Location
EINA/EINE - Purch. Info Record Data
MAKT - Material Descriptions
MVKE - Sales Data
MLGN - Warehouse Mgmt
MBEW - Material Valuation
Demonstration: Organizational Levels of the Material
Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow menu path:Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Change → Immediately
66
2.
Enter P-100, and select only the Basic Data 1 View. Point out to participants
no Org data was requested since it is at the client level.
3.
Select the MRP 1 Screen and enter plant 1000. Point out to participants that
the system is asking for Org Data.
4.
Select the Plant data/stor. 1 tab and point out the request for storage
location. Enter 0002
5.
Select the Sales: Sales org .1 tab, and enter sales org. 1000, press enter and
then select the drop down for the distribution channel value, select 10
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
51
2010
Lesson: Overview of the Material Master
Organizational Levels of the Material Master
1.
Enter P-100, and select only the Basic Data 1 view.
2.
Select the MRP 1 screen and enter plant 1000.
3.
Select the Plant data/stor. 1 tab and enter 0002.
4.
Select the Sales: Sales org .1 tab, enter sales organization 1000, press
ENTER, and then select the drop-down for the distribution channel value.
Select 10.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
67
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
68
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Material Master
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the material master
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
69
Unit 4: Material Masters
Lesson:
53
TSCM40_I
Creating a Material Master
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about the prerequisites for creating a material master,
as well as the various methods of creating a material master.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
List the prerequisites to creating material masters
Use various methods to create material masters
Describe the request process with interactive forms and explain how it might
benefit your business
This lessons is supposed to introduce participants in how to create material
masters. You will need to show them how to create them efficiently and the
different tips and tricks that are available.
Business Example
As an engineer at Precision Pumps, you are responsible for the creation of material
masters in SAP ERP. In doing so, you must learn the various methods of creating
a material master. This will include creating a material from scratch, creating a
material from an existing material master, and creating a material using profiles
and other shortcuts.
Prerequisites for Creating Material Masters
Prior to creating a material master, several pieces of information must be known in
order to properly create a material master record in SAP ERP.
The person who creates the first view of each material master record must define:
•
•
•
•
•
70
The material number
The industry sector
The material type
The unit of measure
The description
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Figure 21: Material Types in SAP ERP
When you create a material master record, you must define material type for the
material. The material type determines which business processes (such as sales,
production, or purchasing) and functions (use of material in BOM or routing) are
allowed for a material. The selection of the material type should not be taken
lightly, as a wrong choice can have serious impacts.
The material type is a configurable item and is usually controlled by costing
or Inventory Management due to the large impact is has on those areas of an
implementation.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
71
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Figure 22: Material Type Configuration
To be able to manage different materials according to the company’s standard
requirements, materials with the same characteristics are divided into groups
and assigned to a material type. Examples of material types are raw materials,
semi-finished products, and finished products.
When you create a material master record, the material type determines:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Which departments can maintain the material master record
Whether the material number is assigned internally or externally
Which number range interval the material number comes from
Which screens appear and in which sequence
Which department-specific data you have to enter
Whether quantity changes in the material master record are updated
Whether value changes to financial accounting stock accounts are updated
Additionally, the material type determines the procurement type of a material, for
example, whether the material is produced in-house, procured externally, or both.
Moreover, the material type determines which accounts are posted to when a
material enters or leaves the warehouse.
72
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Figure 23: Industry Sector
The industry sector determines which data fields and screens are available for
input during material master maintenance. Industry sector is one of several
influencing factors. In the configuration of the material master, industry sector can
act as one key in specifying whether a field is required, changeable, display only,
or hidden. In addition, industry sector is used in configuration to determine what
views and what sequence a user can display the material master.
Note: From within any of the Create, Change, or Display transactions,
users can access the Defaults → Industry Sector menu. This transaction is
user-specific, and can control the default industry sector as well as hide
the industry sector once a default is set.
Figure 24: Material Numbering
Each material has a unique material identification number. You can assign a
number externally or internally. If you assign a number externally, you enter the
required character string when you create a material master record. If you assign
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
73
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
a number internally, you do not enter any material number when you create a
material master record. Until you save the material master record, the system sets
the internal material number in the appropriate field. When you save, the system
automatically assigns the next available number.
The type of number assignment that is allowed depends on the material type and is
defined in Customizing. First, you have to maintain the number range groups. You
then assign the material types to the groups.
Note: Material numbering is defined at the client level.
You can assign an interval to only one group. You can also change the current
number of an interval manually.
Figure 25: Storing and Displaying the Material Number
During configuration, your company can decide how to view material masters.
The material master field has a maximum of 18 characters. You can configuration
a template to provide breaks in the material number, for example, 123-456-789.
In addition, if you do not intend to use all 18 characters from the beginning, you
can specify whether leading zeros are to be displayed.
The data you enter for material number conversion determines the way material
numbers are displayed in dialog functions and printouts only. This means that the
information is stored in the database unconverted.
Caution: The display format for the material number is effective for all
clients.
74
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
For every material master, a base unit of measure must be assigned. This is
referred to as the stock keeping unit or the smallest unit of measure a material
has consumed. This field is used client-wide and will impact all plants of any
company code that uses this material master.
Figure 26: Units of Measure
In addition to the base unit of measure that the system uses for stock keeping and to
execute all its calculations, other departments can use their own units of measure.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
75
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
All units of measure in the SAP system that are additional to the base unit of
measure are grouped together under the title “alternative units of measure.” The
following alternative units of measure are supported:
•
•
•
•
•
Base unit of measure (Basic Data 1): Stock keeping unit. All other units
of measure you use are converted to the base unit of measure. If there is no
standard formula to convert an alternative unit of measure to the base unit of
measure, you must enter the conversion factor for the units of measure in
material master maintenance.
Order unit (Purchasing): Unit of measure used for ordering the material.
This is the default unit for purchasing functions.
Sales unit (Sales: sales org 1): Unit of measure used for selling the material.
This is the default unit displayed in the sales order. You can also change
this unit in the sales order.
Production unit (Work Scheduling): Unit of measure to be used in the
receipt of production. When you create a production order for a material, and
a production unit has been entered in both the material master record and in
the routing, the system checks whether the quantity entered in the production
order falls within the lot size range in the routing.
Unit of issue (Work Scheduling/Whse Mgmt 1): Unit of measure for
issuing the material from stock. Use this unit for goods issue and stock
movement transactions. You can also use this unit for the BOM item quantity.
Note: The design engineering department uses the base unit of measure
as a rule.
SAP ERP comes supplied with the ISO (International Organization for
Standardization) unit of measure tables. Simple put, SAP ERP already has the
conversions from kilograms to pounds. Conversion of other non-dimensional
units of measure must be defined. This would include the conversion from pieces
to pallets, for example. This is often material-specific and would have to be
maintained in the material master tables.
76
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Figure 27: Unit of Measure Groups
For materials that have similar weight and dimension characteristics, you can
group together several units of measure in a unit of measure group and assign
the group to a material. For each unit of measure in the group, you can enter
the conversion factor to the base unit of measure. You maintain unit of measure
groups in Customizing for the material master (Logistics - General).
Caution: The base unit of measure must not be entered in the unit of
measure group.
Demonstration: Prerequisite for Creating Material
Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow Menu Path: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
77
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
2.
Point out the need for the Material Number, Industry Sector, and Material
type.
3.
Enter material number T-F##, Industry Sector Mechanical Engineering,
and material Type Finished Product
4.
Press Enter, and select the Basic Data 1 Screen, and select
5.
Point out the Base unit of measure is a “Required ” Field. Enter PC and a
description of Pump GR##
6.
Select Additional Data, and select the Units of measure tab.
7.
Enter a conversion for 1 PAL equals 15 PC
8.
Select
Continue
Save
Creating New Materials
When a company needs to create a new material master record, they have to match
the process to the SAP ERP transactions. Listed below are several options for
creating new material masters
Create Material Master Record: Transactions
•
•
•
•
MM01 - Create (general) immediately
MM11 - Create (general) planned for the future
MM#1 - Create with special material type immediately
(# = R, B, F, I, H, U, N, V, L, S, K, P, W and G)
CEWB - Engineering workbench
Hint: The engineering workbench (EWB) enables material master
records to be created for new BOM items. The material is usually created
immediately. It is generally the case that BOM maintenance cannot work
with material master records that are only planned.
Note: As soon as a material master record is created with MRP data and
a valid MRP type, this material is then automatically included in the
planning file, which is extremely important for MRP. When loading the
data from a legacy system, the transaction does not create planning file
entries.
You can define defaults for certain views, organizational levels, and industry
sectors. You can take the dialog boxes for selecting views and organizational
levels out of the standard screen sequence. You can hide the industry sector.
78
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Figure 28: Creating Materials with Default Values
If you copy from another material, values from the material master are copied to
the new material master record that you are creating, where you can overwrite
them.
Hint: As of SAP R/3 4.6X, you can select the Create Views Selected
checkbox to automatically create all views that exist in the reference
material (departments). Previously, each view (department) had to be
viewed individually. This is no longer necessary.
Material Master Record Defaults
To access material master data efficiently, you can:
•
•
•
Predefine the industry sector
Predefine the selection of views
Predefine the selection of organization levels
To enable more efficient and accurate entry of MRP/forecast data, you can
predefine several MRP/forecast profiles:
•
•
2010
Default values for MRP/forecast data fields
Rules for MRP/forecast data field input
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
79
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
In certain companies, not all views of the material master are created immediately.
This may require having new views of existing material masters created. This can
be accomplished with the following transactions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
MM01 - Create (general) immediately
MM11 - Create (general) planned for the future
MM#1 - Create with special material type immediately
(# = R, B, F, I, H, U, N, V, L, S, K, P, W and G)
CEWB - Engineering workbench
MM17 - Create new data records (views) immediately in mass maintenance
MM50 - Create new views for extendable materials
Hint: The above comments on the engineering workbenchalso apply
here. Ensure that when using MM#1 transactions, the material type of the
existing material master record is appropriate for the transaction. This is
not important for transactions MM01 and MM11, as the system reads
the material type from the material master and, in doing so, overwrites
any data entries.
Demonstration: Setting Up Defaults
Purpose
Setup Defaults for Creating Material Masters
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow Menu Path: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01)
80
2.
From the system menu select Defaults → Industry Sector
3.
Enter Mechanical Engineering, and select Hide Industry Sector on Initial
Screen, and select
Continue
4.
From the system menu select Defaults →View
5.
Select Basic Data 1, MRP 1 - 4, Work Scheduling, Accounting 1, and
Continue
Costing, and select Create views selected , and choose
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
6.
From the system menu select Defaults →Organizational levels
7.
Enter in the following data and select
Continue
Org Levels
Copy To:
Copy From Value
Plant
1000
1000
Sales Org
1000
1000
Distribution Channel
10
10
Demonstration: Creating a Material from Scratch
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow Menu Path: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01)
2010
2.
Point out the need for the Material Number, Industry Sector, and Material
type.
3.
Enter material number T-B##, Industry Sector Mechanical Engineering,
and material Type Finished Product
4.
Press Enter, and select the Basic Data 1 Screen, and select
5.
Point out the Base unit of measure is a “Required ” Field. Enter PC and a
description of Pump GR##
6.
Select Additional Data, and select the Units of measure tab.
7.
Enter a conversion for 1 PAL equals 15 PC
8.
Select
Continue
Save
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
81
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Creating a Material Using MRP Profiles and MRP
Groups
The MRP profile allows users to set default values for MRP data fields and to
determine whether the values can be changed during material master maintenance.
If a change is made to a default value in an MRP profile and the field cannot be
changed using material master maintenance, the system automatically changes
the field value in all material masters linked to that specific MRP profile.
The forecast profile allows users to set default values for forecast data fields and to
determine whether the values can be changed during material master maintenance.
If a change is made to a default value in a forecast profile and the field cannot be
changed using material master maintenance, the system automatically changes
the field value in all material masters linked to that specific forecast profile.
In addition to the MRP profile, users creating MRP views can use and assign MRP
group to the material in the material master (MRP 1 view). The MRP group is
defined in configuration under the MRP section. It is used to apply field values to
a large number of materials.
Caution: When using MRP groups, be aware that the field values do not
appear in the material master. This is different from the MRP profile.
Demonstration: Setting Up MRP Profiles
Purpose
Use MRP Profiles to set default values
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow Menu Path: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master →Profile → MRP Profile → Create (MMD1)
2.
Enter MRP Profile FP## ,and press Enter
3.
Enter a description Finished Product ## profile then set the following
Parameters:
Field
82
Fixed Value
Default Value
MRP Type
X
MRP Controller
XSched
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Field
Fixed Value
Scheduling Marg key
for Floats
X
Default Value
Lot Size
X
Planning Time Fence
X
Method for Selecting
Alt.
4.
Upon setting all indicators select Data Screen 1
5.
Enter the following Data:
6.
Field
Default Value
MRP Type
PD
MRP Controller
1000/0##
Scheduling Marg key for Floats
1000/001
Planning Time Fence
10
Lot Size
EX
Select Data Screen 2 and enter the following data:
Method for Selecting Alt.
7.
2010
X
Select
2 - By
Production
Version
Save
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
83
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Creating Material Masters Using Request Processes
with Interactive Forms
This next section is based on new functionality in 5.0. It will require the SAP
Netweaver solution and is XML Based. Keep it high level at this time. This
requires some technical expertise, so we will not include more than just an
overview of the new functionality. Fore more detailed information see the
help.sap.com. Use the simulation to show students how the finished product will
work.
In most organizations, one of the major obstacles is defining and managing a
process for creating master data. A huge range of forms are used on a daily basis
in all types of business, especially for processing requests and approvals. Using
paper forms for such processes is singularly inefficient. Delivery and submission
is very time-intensive, and usually requires direct contact with an employee.
Under such conditions it is difficult for the managers responsible to follow the
progress of a process.
As of SAP ERP ECC (2004), a new function called Interactive Forms is available
for Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) . This new functionality enables you to
complete the processing of products and materials considerably more efficiently,
as well as to implement company-specific standards for quality throughout the
course of the process.
Figure 29: Creating Master Data with Interactive Forms
84
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
With the help of Interactive Forms, you can compile required product and material
data offline, and then enter it into the SAP system when the manager provides their
approval. You can process the following interactive forms:
•
•
Request: New Product (physical form)
Request: Product Change (physical form)
The electronic forms contain data on the person who makes the request and the
reason for it. Additional process-specific data is added by experts, for example:
important product or material data in the New Product request form, or whether
stock data should be considered in the change process in the Product Change
request form. The data is presented clearly, tailored to the area of responsibility of
the employee, and supplemented with notes explaining the process.
You process the forms in standardized processes that are defined in the process
template. The temporal and logical sequence of the processing steps is linked to the
evaluation of conditions. For example, the data required for a particular step must
be complete and correct before the subsequent step can be started. The employees
responsible, such as the person who makes the request, experts, and managers,
are automatically integrated in the separate process steps. Although the employee
processes the form offline, information is available from the SAP system.
For example, the employee can use the input help for entering system data, and
the entries are checked for validity. The manager is notified that the request form
needs approval through the Control Center of the Guided Procedures component
in the materials management service directory. This is where the manager
either approves the data for entry in the SAP system, or rejects it and initiates a
notification to the person who made the request.
The design of the forms, as well as the processes, have been modeled with the
functions of the Guided Procedures component (Web Application Server (WAS) →
Composite Application Framework (CAF) ® → Guided Procedures (CAF-GP)).
The following overview includes information about where you can find the
documentation for the Guided Procedures (CAF-GP) component.
•
Documentation for the application, with information on software
requirements:
SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/: SAP NetWeaver → Composite
Application Framework (CAF)→ Guided Procedures (CAF-GP).
•
Installation guide: SAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/instguides: Installation and Upgrade Guides → SAP xEPM 1.0 Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Simulation: ’New Product Request (from RTK-ERP)
View the following simulation to learn more about this lesson:
File Name: NewProductRqst_IAF.sim
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
85
Unit 4: Material Masters
86
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
67
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Exercise 1: Creating Material Masters
Exercise Duration: 40 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create defaults to be used with material master functions
•
Create a material master without any template data
•
Create a material master using Copy From functionality
•
Create an MRP Profile and use it to create a material master
•
Create a material master using a
•
Create a material master using the PLM Web UI
Business Example
As the product development engineer, you are responsible for controlling the
management of the material master in your company. To start this process, you
need to understand the different ways that a material master can be created. You
want to find out which method matches with your business process.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
8xx
PLM114 - ##
Task 1: Navigation
All of the exercises in this course are written to use the full SAP Menus except for
the ones using the PLM WEB UI and they specifically state to use the User Menu
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER. This first task shows students how to navigate
between the user and full SAP menus.
Currently when you logon to the ECC system you are in a User Menu with shorten
menu paths specifically for PLM. Most of the exercises in this class are written
with menu paths from the full SAP menu. Navigate between the two menus.
1.
Most of the exercises in this course are written using the full SAP Menu
paths. Navigate to the SAP Menu using the button on the tool bar.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
87
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
2.
Some specific exercises using the PLM WEB UI are written using the User
menu SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER. Navigate to this User Menu using the
button on the tool bar.
3.
If the exercise does not specifically state which menu to use, you can assume
that the solutions are written to use the full SAP Menu but can be done using
either menu or just transaction codes. Switch back to the full SAP menus
and continue with this first exercise.
Task 2: User Defaults
In the role of an engineer, you are tasked with creating large quantities of material
masters. To make the process run more efficiently, you will use default values and
MRP profiles to expedite the creation of material masters. Set your organizational
level, industry sector, and view defaults as instructed below. Once completed, set
up an MRP profile to populate many of the required fields in the MRP 1 - 4 views.
1.
Your company has decided not to use the industry sector functionality.
Therefore, set your user’s default for the industry sector to Mechanical
Engineering, and only display industry sector on request.
2.
Your recent position will only have you creating materials for a certain
section of the company. Therefore, set your user’s default for the
organizational values Plant 1000, Sales Organization 1000 and Distribution
Channel 10, and only display organizational levels on request.
3.
Your recent position will only have you creating materials for a certain
business areas within the company. Therefore, set your user’s default for the
material master views for which you are responsible for creating. Set Basic
Data 1, MRP 1 - 4, Work Scheduling, Accounting 1, and Costing 1, to always
be selected and select Create views selected so if you use any materials as
templates, you will not have to look at all views to create the material.
4.
Create an MRP profile for rapid and secure maintenance of MRP data from
the material record.
Create an MRP profile, SF##, with the description Semi Finished Group
## for use in creating material masters with the material type Semi-Finished
Product. Use the parameters in the following table for this exercise.
Note: Solution steps will appear after the table in the Solutions
section.
Continued on next page
88
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Data of MRP profile SF##
Field Name
Maintenance
Strategy
MRP Type
Fixed
value
MRP controller
Default
ABC Indicator
Fixed
value
In-house production
time
Default
5 days
Scheduling margin
key
Default
002
Lot Size (Materials
Planning)
Fixed
value
Purchasing group
Default
000
Planning time fence
Default
10 days
Component scrap in
%
Default
1 %
Indicator: Backflush Fixed
value
Default Value
PD
0##
A = important material
EX = exact
2 = work center decides
Task 3: Creating Material Masters
As a design engineer, you will be required to create material masters every day.
You will use the defaults created in the previous task to speed up the process. In
this section, you will be required to create five material masters. This will include
two finished products and three semi-finished products.
1.
Your supervisor has given you the specs on a new pump that has just come
out of research and development. She has asked you to enter the material
master into the system so that one of your colleagues can begin building the
bill of material. No material currently has the same attributes, so you will
create the new material with no template data. Use the following data to
support the creation of the new finished production: T-F## (Rotary Pump
GR##) at plant 1000.
Note: Solution steps will appear after table in the Solutions section.
Entry Screen
Data
Material Number
T-F##
Material Type
Finished Product
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
89
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Basic Data 1
Material Description
Rotary Pump GR ##
Base Unit of measure
PC - piece
MRP 1
MRP Type
PD
MRP controller
0##
Lot Size
EX - Lot for Lot
MRP 2
In house Production
1
Scheduling margin key
001
MRP 3
Strategy Group
10
Accounting 1
90
Valuation Class
7920 - finished product
Price Control
S-Standard Price
2.
Research and development has just made an significant improvement to the
T-B1## pump casing. The changes are significant enough to require a new
material master versus an engineering revision. Create the following material
master record by copying from reference material: A Semi-Finished
Product with material number T-B## (## = group number) in plant 1000,
copied from material T-B1## using your default views. Change the
description to GR## Casing.
3.
How can you be sure that all selected views are created?
4.
Research and development has just made another significant improvement to
the 102–100 pump casing. The changes are significant enough to require a
new material master versus engineering revisions. This new casing will be
used in several products as a substitute part. Create the following material
Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
master record by copying from reference material: A Semi-Finished
Product with material number T-Z## (## = group number) in plant 1000,
copied from material 102–100 using your default views. Change the
description to GR## Alt Casing. In addition, to speed up maintenance, use
the MRP profile (SF##) that you created in a previous exercise step.
5.
You have just been notified by purchasing that they have come to an
agreement with your rubber supplier. This agreement is to sell back the scrap
rubber that is made during the stamping of gaskets for your pumps. Create a
Semi-Finished Product with material number T-G## (## = group number)
in plant 1000, copied from material 100-120 using your default views.
Change the description to GR## Scrap Rubber. In addition, this will be a
co-production, so set the co-product indicator on the MRP 2 view, and you
will have to change the valuation class to 7900 - Semi Finished products.
Task 4:
Your Engineering Department usually creates the initial views of the material
masters and assigns the material number as well as the material type. They use the
new PLM WEB UI to do their work. Logon to the Web UI as one of the Engineers
and create the Basic Data views of the material master.
1.
2.
As an engineer in the Engineering Department responsible for creating
material masters, logon to the Web UI using the following data:
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
initial
Language
EN (or your choice)
The specs on a new centrifugal pump that has just come out of research and
development are found below. Enter the basic data information of the new
pump. The balance of the views will be entered at a later date. No material
currently has the same attributes, so you will create the new material with
no template data. Use the following data to support the creation of the new
finished product: T-F77## (Centrifugal Pump GR##) at plant 1000.
Note: Solution steps will appear after table in the Solutions section.
Entry Screen
Data
Material Number
T-F77##
Industry Sector
Mechanical Engineering
Material Type
Finished Product
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
91
Unit 4: Material Masters
92
TSCM40_I
Basic Data 1
Data
Material Description
Centrifugal Pump GR ##
Base Unit of measure
PC - piece
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Solution 1: Creating Material Masters
Task 1: Navigation
All of the exercises in this course are written to use the full SAP Menus except for
the ones using the PLM WEB UI and they specifically state to use the User Menu
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER. This first task shows students how to navigate
between the user and full SAP menus.
Currently when you logon to the ECC system you are in a User Menu with shorten
menu paths specifically for PLM. Most of the exercises in this class are written
with menu paths from the full SAP menu. Navigate between the two menus.
1.
Most of the exercises in this course are written using the full SAP Menu
paths. Navigate to the SAP Menu using the button on the tool bar.
a)
2.
Some specific exercises using the PLM WEB UI are written using the User
menu SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER. Navigate to this User Menu using the
button on the tool bar.
a)
3.
Click on the second from the left button on the tool bar and the
menus will change to the full SAP menu.
Since your logon was already assigned to use this User Menu, click
the left most button on the tool bar and the menus will change to
the role-based user menu..
If the exercise does not specifically state which menu to use, you can assume
that the solutions are written to use the full SAP Menu but can be done using
either menu or just transaction codes. Switch back to the full SAP menus
and continue with this first exercise.
a)
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
93
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Task 2: User Defaults
In the role of an engineer, you are tasked with creating large quantities of material
masters. To make the process run more efficiently, you will use default values and
MRP profiles to expedite the creation of material masters. Set your organizational
level, industry sector, and view defaults as instructed below. Once completed, set
up an MRP profile to populate many of the required fields in the MRP 1 - 4 views.
1.
2.
Your company has decided not to use the industry sector functionality.
Therefore, set your user’s default for the industry sector to Mechanical
Engineering, and only display industry sector on request.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter Mechanical Engineering as Industry Sector and Finished Goods
as Material Type
c)
From the menu, choose Defaults → Industry Sector.
d)
Enter Mechanical Engineering, and select Hide Industry Sector
on Initial Screen.
e)
Choose Continue
Your recent position will only have you creating materials for a certain
section of the company. Therefore, set your user’s default for the
organizational values Plant 1000, Sales Organization 1000 and Distribution
Channel 10, and only display organizational levels on request.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
From the system menu, select Defaults →Organizational levels.
c)
Enter the following data:
d)
3.
.
Org Levels
Copy To:
Copy From:
Plant
1000
1000
Sales Org
1000
1000
Distribution
Channel
10
10
Select Org Level profiles only on Request, then choose Continue
.
Your recent position will only have you creating materials for a certain
business areas within the company. Therefore, set your user’s default for the
material master views for which you are responsible for creating. Set Basic
Continued on next page
94
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Data 1, MRP 1 - 4, Work Scheduling, Accounting 1, and Costing 1, to always
be selected and select Create views selected so if you use any materials as
templates, you will not have to look at all views to create the material.
4.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
From the system menu, choose Defaults →View.
c)
Select Basic Data 1, MRP 1 - 4, Work Scheduling, Accounting 1, and
Costing 1 and select Create views selected .
d)
Choose Continue
.
Create an MRP profile for rapid and secure maintenance of MRP data from
the material record.
Create an MRP profile, SF##, with the description Semi Finished Group
## for use in creating material masters with the material type Semi-Finished
Product. Use the parameters in the following table for this exercise.
Note: Solution steps will appear after the table in the Solutions
section.
Data of MRP profile SF##
Field Name
Maintenance
Strategy
Default Value
MRP Type
Fixed
value
MRP controller
Default
ABC Indicator
Fixed
value
In-house production
time
Default
5 days
Scheduling margin
key
Default
002
Lot Size (Materials
Planning)
Fixed
value
Purchasing group
Default
PD
0##
A = important material
EX = exact
000
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
95
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Field Name
Maintenance
Strategy
Default Value
Planning time fence
Default
10 days
Component scrap in
%
Default
1 %
Indicator: Backflush Fixed
value
2 = work center decides
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Profile -> MRP Profile → Create (MMD1).
b)
First select the fields using the Selection Screen button, then select the
default values using Screens 1 and 2.
c)
When complete, select Save
.
Task 3: Creating Material Masters
As a design engineer, you will be required to create material masters every day.
You will use the defaults created in the previous task to speed up the process. In
this section, you will be required to create five material masters. This will include
two finished products and three semi-finished products.
1.
Your supervisor has given you the specs on a new pump that has just come
out of research and development. She has asked you to enter the material
master into the system so that one of your colleagues can begin building the
bill of material. No material currently has the same attributes, so you will
create the new material with no template data. Use the following data to
support the creation of the new finished production: T-F## (Rotary Pump
GR##) at plant 1000.
Note: Solution steps will appear after table in the Solutions section.
Entry Screen
Data
Material Number
T-F##
Material Type
Finished Product
Basic Data 1
Material Description
Rotary Pump GR ##
Base Unit of measure
PC - piece
Continued on next page
96
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
MRP 1
MRP Type
PD
MRP controller
0##
Lot Size
EX - Lot for Lot
MRP 2
In house Production
1
Scheduling margin key
001
MRP 3
Strategy Group
10
Accounting 1
2.
Valuation Class
7920 - finished product
Price Control
S-Standard Price
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter the information as described in the table above. Use the ENTER
key to move to the next tab.
c)
At the Costing 1 view, select Save
save your data.
or answer Yes to the question to
Research and development has just made an significant improvement to the
T-B1## pump casing. The changes are significant enough to require a new
material master versus an engineering revision. Create the following material
master record by copying from reference material: A Semi-Finished
Product with material number T-B## (## = group number) in plant 1000,
copied from material T-B1## using your default views. Change the
description to GR## Casing.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter the material number T-B## and material type for Semi-Finished
goods. Enter T-B1## as the copy from material.
c)
In the Basic Data 1 view, change the description to GR## Casing.
d)
Choose Save
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
97
Unit 4: Material Masters
3.
TSCM40_I
How can you be sure that all selected views are created?
Answer: Take a look at all the selected views or choose Defaults –> Views .
Select Create Views Selected.
4.
5.
Research and development has just made another significant improvement to
the 102–100 pump casing. The changes are significant enough to require a
new material master versus engineering revisions. This new casing will be
used in several products as a substitute part. Create the following material
master record by copying from reference material: A Semi-Finished
Product with material number T-Z## (## = group number) in plant 1000,
copied from material 102–100 using your default views. Change the
description to GR## Alt Casing. In addition, to speed up maintenance, use
the MRP profile (SF##) that you created in a previous exercise step.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter the material number T-Z## using reference material 102–100.
c)
Select Organizational levels, and enter your MRP Profile SF## Choose
Continue .
d)
A warning will appear that the profile was copied from reference
material. Be sure to click the New Entry button and enter your profile
SF## once again before continuing.
e)
In the Basic Data 1 view, change the description to GR## ALT
Casing.
f)
Before saving, review your MRP 1- 4 views to see if your profile has
had any affect.
g)
Choose Save
.
You have just been notified by purchasing that they have come to an
agreement with your rubber supplier. This agreement is to sell back the scrap
rubber that is made during the stamping of gaskets for your pumps. Create a
Semi-Finished Product with material number T-G## (## = group number)
in plant 1000, copied from material 100-120 using your default views.
Continued on next page
98
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Change the description to GR## Scrap Rubber. In addition, this will be a
co-production, so set the co-product indicator on the MRP 2 view, and you
will have to change the valuation class to 7900 - Semi Finished products.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter the material number T-G## and material type “Semi Finished
”using reference material 100-120.
c)
In the Basic Data 1 view, change the description to GR## Scrap
Rubber.
d)
Use the ENTER key to move through the views.
e)
On the MRP 2 view, set the Co-product indicator, and continue pressing
the ENTER key.
f)
On the Accounting 1 view, change the valuation class to 7900 Semi Finished products.
g)
Choose Save
.
Task 4:
Your Engineering Department usually creates the initial views of the material
masters and assigns the material number as well as the material type. They use the
new PLM WEB UI to do their work. Logon to the Web UI as one of the Engineers
and create the Basic Data views of the material master.
1.
As an engineer in the Engineering Department responsible for creating
material masters, logon to the Web UI using the following data:
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
initial
Language
EN (or your choice)
a)
Us the following menu path in the role based menu
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER PLMWebUI → Internet NWBC. If you
get the web page that this website has a problem with its security
certificate, choose the option Continue to this website anyway (not
recommended).
b)
Enter the above information from the table and click logon.
c)
When asked to change your password, change it to the same password
as your PLM114-## logon so you will only have to remember one
password.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
99
Unit 4: Material Masters
2.
TSCM40_I
The specs on a new centrifugal pump that has just come out of research and
development are found below. Enter the basic data information of the new
pump. The balance of the views will be entered at a later date. No material
currently has the same attributes, so you will create the new material with
no template data. Use the following data to support the creation of the new
finished product: T-F77## (Centrifugal Pump GR##) at plant 1000.
Note: Solution steps will appear after table in the Solutions section.
100
Entry Screen
Data
Material Number
T-F77##
Industry Sector
Mechanical Engineering
Material Type
Finished Product
Basic Data 1
Data
Material Description
Centrifugal Pump GR ##
Base Unit of measure
PC - piece
a)
Click on Create Material in the left panel.
b)
Enter your material number, Industry Sector, and material type and
select Start.
c)
Enter the Material description, the Base unit of measure, and choose
Save and Close.
d)
Back on the Work Overview screen you can click Log Off in the upper
right to return to the ECC system.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Material Master
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
List the prerequisites to creating material masters
•
Use various methods to create material masters
•
Describe the request process with interactive forms and explain how it might
benefit your business
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
101
Unit 4: Material Masters
Lesson:
81
TSCM40_I
Classification of the Material Master
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how classification can be applied to the material
master in order to addition additional custom fields for detailing the material, as
well as adding more information to lots of inventory.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Describe how the material master can use classification to include
company-specific fields
Describe how classification can be used for batch management of inventory
Describe how classification can be used for variant configuration
This lesson is a simple introduction to classification. You not expected to teach
them classification but simply identify how the functionality can be used to expand
the material master without modifying tables or the SAP code.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing material master files, you have several
requirements regarding how to add custom fields to the material master. In this
lesson you will learn the basic concept of how classification can be used to support
material classification, Batch/Lot management, and variant configuration (features
and options).
Use of Material Classification
During the evaluation of your product data management process, your company
may realize that it needs custom fields to provide the organization with more
information on master data or transactional data. Without having to modify the
delivered SAP tables, companies can use the classification system to add fields
to the material master for information purposes, or to provide more information
about existing inventory.
102
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Figure 30: Classification of Master Data
Functions of the classification are:
•
•
•
To find an appropriate object
To find similar objects
To establish that no appropriate object exists
To fulfill these objectives, you need to organize your data efficiently.
The SAP classification system is a tool for organizing your data that goes far
beyond match codes and systematically-structured number assignment.
Demonstration: Updating the Material Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Change the Material Master for your Product T-F##. Logistics → Production
→ Master Data → Material → Create → Immediately (MM01)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
103
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
2.
Select the classification tab
3.
From the classification Tab select menu path Extras → Change class type.
Show users how to change class types
4.
Enter Class type 001 - Material Class, and press Enter.
5.
Enter the following Parameters:
6.
Characteristics
Value
Pump Lift
10 m
Pump Capacity
20 m3
Turning Speed
1000
Material
Cast Iron
Usage
Industry Technology
Select Save.
Setup of Classification
SAP ERP classification consists of the following components:
•
•
•
•
•
Characteristic maintenance
Class types
Class maintenance
Classification (assignments)
Object search
Note: Course PLM130 contains more information on the SAP
classification system.
104
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Figure 31: Classification Functions
Classification can be used to describe or group objects together that have some
likeness, but also differences. An object is a classifiable unit (such as a material,
vendor, or work center).
A characteristic describes specifications of an object, such as length, width,
weight, color. Essentially, they are user-defined fields, which are defined as master
data. Each characteristics must have a data type (numeric, characteristic, date, and
so on). Companies define the length of the field, a template, and limits or ranges
to what values can be used. The same characteristic can be used many different
times for different purposes.
A class type describes a group of objects that have common or similar
specifications. When creating a class, a user must specify a class type. Class types
control how the classification can be used for various objects. The following
classes can be used in conjunction with the material master:
•
•
•
•
001 - Material Class
023 - Batch Management
200 - Material (configurable)
300 - Material (variant configuration)
Note: In earlier release of SAP ERP batch class 022 (material/plant/client
level) existed. In Release 4.7 it was removed and customers should
migrate to class 023 (material/client) material. Class types are customized
in the IMG: Cross-Application Components → Classification System →
Classes → Maintain Object types and Class Types.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
105
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
A class can contain one or more characteristics. Within the class, companies
can further restrict the characteristic values. A class will then be attached to the
material master to specify the custom fields that were needed.
A characteristic value represents the specification of a particular attribute, for
example, 10 cm, DIN 931, cast iron.
Follow these steps to maintain classes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Define characteristics and allowed characteristic values.
Maintain the class, including assigning characteristics.
Maintain the objects (for example, materials), including assigning them to
one or more classes and assigning values to them.
Search for objects.
Figure 32: Characteristic Value Assignment
You can use characteristic values in various ways when using classification to
determine a material number.
For instance you can:
•
•
•
Link several entries in one line using OR.
Link entries in several lines using AND.
Use F4 help to display possible entries for selection criteria.
Demonstration: Demonstrate Set up of Classification
Purpose
106
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Display the Class 100. Cross Application Components → Classification
System → Master Data → Class (CL02)
2.
Enter Class 100, class type 001 and select
3.
Select the Char. Tab.
4.
Select characteristic C001 and then select Overwrite Values
5.
Select the values tab and enter 50m in the next line available and select SAVE.
6.
Review the definition of the characteristics C001. Cross Application
Components → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
(CT04)
7.
Enter Characteristic C001, and select
8.
Review the parameters and the values.
Display
Display.
Searching Using Classification
The classification system makes it easy to find objects (for example, materials).
Figure 33: Finding a Material
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
107
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
After you have set up classification, you can use it to find a material number and
copy the number to your application.
Demonstration:
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Search for All Pumps that have a lift of 10 m, a height of 20 m3 and a turning
speed of 1000 RPM. Cross Application Components → Classification System
→ Find → Find Objects in Class (CL30N)
2.
Enter Class 100 and class type 001
3.
Enter the following characteristics values 10 m, a height of 20 m3 and a
turning speed of 1000 RPM and select Find in Initial Class
Use of Batch Classification
Some industry sectors, in particular in the process industries, need to work with the
homogeneous subsets of a material or a product, which means, batches along their
entire supply chain. Batch management is integrated with all the applications of
the SAP ERP and supports the management and processing of the batches and lots
in all the business processes of a company.
In particular, batch management is used in Supply Chain Management. A batch
can be followed through the whole supply chain, from the entry of the raw
materials through the production of the finished product, and all the way to the
sales and delivery to the customer.
To assign a batch to a material at the various points in the supply chain, you create
a batch master record. For example, if the subset of a material that is subject to
batch management requirement leaves a production process (process order) with
certain specifications, it is posted to the stock with a batch number and can then be
clearly identified.
A batch master record is identified by an alphanumeric batch number. You can
select the level at which you want the batch number to be unique in accordance
with the structure of your plant, company, and operational requirements.
108
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
This material number is unique at the client level. The uniqueness of the batch
number can be defined at the following levels:
•
•
•
In combination with a plant and material.
In combination with a material number
At the client level
Figure 34: Materials and Batches
In SAP ERP, batch master records depend on the corresponding material master
records. Batches are created for a material. The batch object contains the key
fields: Material, Batch, and Plant. The Plant field is relevant only if the plant
level is used as the batch level.
Normally, the data of a material master record is valid for all the batches assigned
to it. In contrast, a batch master record contains the data that uniquely identifies
a batch and characterizes it as a non-reproducible unit. You can further describe
batch properties by classifying them in a class of the class type, 023 Batch.
If a material is to be produced in batches and is subject to inventory management,
you must set the Batch Management indicator in the material master views
Purchasing, Work Scheduling, or Warehouse Management.
When you define the specifications for the batch master records, the higher-level
material master records are assigned to the classes belonging to the class type,
Batch. In these classes, all the material and batch properties are stored as
characteristics.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
109
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
The class type, Batch, specifies a hierarchical relationship between the object
types, Material and Batch: When you create a batch for a material, the batch is
automatically assigned to the same class of the class type, Batch, that was used to
classify the material. This ensures that the same characteristics are used for the
material and the batch. In the SAP R/3 Enterprise, this is called characteristic
inheritance.
You can define the value ranges or the fixed values for a characteristic of a class.
These factors specify a maximum value range that applies to all the objects
assigned to this class, in this case materials and batches.
In the material master record, you can further restrict the values preset by the
characteristics. The restrictions are inherited by the batch of the material. You
can then only assign values to the characteristics of the batch that lie within the
range specified for the material.
Demonstration: Demonstrate Batch classification of
the material Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Review the classification data for he finished product, T-RI200 (Corn Syrup)
at plant 1100.
In addition Check whether the Batch management indicator is set on the
General plant data/storage 1 view.
2.
It has been assigned a class type 023, and batch class T-CL200. Characteristic
T-CH400 Dextrose Equivalent, and has a value range of 50% - 80%.
Note: The characteristic by definition has a range of 30% to 99.99%,
however it has been restricted further in the Material Master Record.
110
3.
Enter inventory for the T-RI200 at plant 1100, storage location 0001, using
transaction MB1C, Movement type 501
4.
Enter 5,000 kg, and assign batch number DEMO-1, with a dextrose
Equivalent of 75%, Select
and SAVE
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
5.
OPTIONAL
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Information
Cockpit (BMBC)
6.
Enter material T-RI200, Plant 1100, on the classification tab enter a selection
class T-CL200, and select Create Values
7.
Select
8.
Select Maximize Navigation Area
9.
Drill down and review the details of the batch(s). Double click to see the
batch master
Execute
10. Select Display selection result for stock to see Inventory management
numbers.
Use of Variant Configuration in the Material Master
In some industries, it makes sense to allow customers to request a product with
many options that suit their exact needs. However, if the number of options is
large, and no two products are likely to be exactly the same, companies could
end up with more master data than is feasible to manage. A personal computer
(PC), for example, may have different hard drive options, processors, or graphics
and sound options. This PC, therefore, has a large number of variants. Like the
PC scenario, your company may have a situation in which it manufactures or
sells products of which some exist in many variations. In order to reduce your
workload and storage costs, and to enable you to maintain every possible end
product variant, you choose to use the SAP ERP solution for variant configuration.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
111
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Figure 35: Configurable Personal Computer
Many steps are necessary to build up the master data for a configurable material.
First, you must use the SAP classification system to describe the product
characteristics. You allocate the characteristics to a class used for variant
configuration. You then maintain object dependencies for characteristics and
characteristic values so that only allowed values can be chosen. These object
dependencies are rules which define which components are compatible with others.
You must also maintain the necessary settings for the configurable material in the
material master. You create a configuration profile by specifying the configuration
parameters and allocating the material to the class with the characteristics that
describe it. The components and operations for a material are specified in a super
BOM and a super task list.
You maintain object dependencies for the BOM components and task list
operations that can only be selected for particular variants. Before you use variant
configuration productively, you should simulate the configuration. This allows
you to check whether all the data has been correctly maintained.
Products with variants often have dependencies between the individual
characteristics in which, not all combinations of characteristics are allowed. In the
case of the pump, for example, a rotary pump with manual and electric drive may
be available, but a piston pump may only be available with an electric drive. The
term configurable product is used to denote a product that can be manufactured in
several variants. It comprises all the possible characteristics of the product, and
is therefore not representative of any single product.
112
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
In the case of products that exist in many variants, the Super BOM contains all the
parts that might be required to manufacture the configurable material. The parts
actually required can be determined from the object dependencies.
Likewise, the Super Routing contains all the operations that could be needed to
manufacture the configurable material. The operations and production tools and
resources that are actually needed for manufacture can be determined from the
object dependencies.
A special product structure is dynamically generated for a configurable material
during sales order processing.
Demonstration: Demonstrate variant configuration of
the material master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Display the material master for product T-VPC99. Select views: Basic
Data 2, and Classification.
2.
At the bottom of the Basic Data 2 view, note the configurable material
indicator
3.
Display the Classification view, and if necessary Extras → Class type ,
switch to class type 300 - Variants
4.
Demonstrate the super BOM (CS02) for T-VPC99 at plant 1200
Note: Point out the duplicate item numbers and the object
dependency indicators. By double clicking on the object dependency
indicator you can see the rules
5.
Demonstrate the Super Routing (CA02) for T-VPC99 at plant 1200. Point
out the object dependency indicators in some of the routing steps.
6.
OPTIONAL
Create a sales order with the following data:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
113
Unit 4: Material Masters
7.
TSCM40_I
Field
Value
Order Type
OR
Sales Org
1000
Dist. Chnl
10
Division
00
Sold-to
1000
Ship-to
1000
P.O.
Demo1
Material
T-VPC99
Qty
1
When the configurable screen appears, create your computer.
Note: The hard disk has object dependencies. Look at the options
first, then enter a CPU value of the PC of Standard, then review the
hard drive options again.
114
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
89
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Exercise 2: Material Classification
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Add custom fields to your materials using standard SAP functions
Business Example
As a product design engineer, you are responsible for ensuring that material
masters have all the necessary information for the user community to process
daily business transactions. As your business begins to grow you find that you are
creating new part numbers every day and the user community is finding it difficult
to search and find the necessary material numbers. In order to make their jobs
more efficient you have decided to begin classifying your material masters.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
8XX
PLM114 - ##
CATT:
Set up instructions:
1.
Not CATT necessary
Must have created material masters in Lesson “Creating a material Master”
Task 1: Review Classification Data
As a product engineer, your companies business been to growing steadily over
the past year. You find yourself creating new part numbers every day and the user
community is finding it difficult to search and find the necessary material numbers.
In order to make their jobs more efficient you have decided to begin classifying
your material masters. Review existing classification data to see if it will work
with your new pumps
1.
In a previous lesson you created a new pump T-F## at plant 1000. You
want to classify this new pump using existing characteristics in the system.
Review the details of the material class 100 - Pumps. Use class 100 and
class type 001.
2.
List the characteristics that belong to class 100 by choosing the
Characteristics tab.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
115
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Characteristic
3.
Description
What values, if any, have be assigned to C001 - Pump lift?
Hint: Select the characteristic and select Display Values
Values
Task 2: Classifying Material Masters
In a previous task, you reviewed existing classification data to support adding
custom fields to the material master. Classify your new pump and see if you can
find it and others like it using the Find function in classification.
1.
Update your material master for pumpT-F## by adding the classification
view and by assigning it to material class 100 - Pumps. Give it the following
data:
Note: If you have not already done so, you will have to create the
classification view.
2.
Characteristics
Value
Pump Lift
10 m
Pump Capacity
20 m3
Turning Speed
1000
Material
cast iron
Usage
Industry Technology
Search for all materials that have the following characteristic values:
Continued on next page
116
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
2010
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Characteristics
Value
Pump Lift
10 m
Pump Capacity
20 m3
Turning Speed
1000
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
117
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Solution 2: Material Classification
Task 1: Review Classification Data
As a product engineer, your companies business been to growing steadily over
the past year. You find yourself creating new part numbers every day and the user
community is finding it difficult to search and find the necessary material numbers.
In order to make their jobs more efficient you have decided to begin classifying
your material masters. Review existing classification data to see if it will work
with your new pumps
1.
2.
3.
In a previous lesson you created a new pump T-F## at plant 1000. You
want to classify this new pump using existing characteristics in the system.
Review the details of the material class 100 - Pumps. Use class 100 and
class type 001.
a)
Use the menu path Cross Application Components → Classification
System → Master Data → Classes (CL02).
b)
Enter class 100 and class type 001 and choose Display
.
List the characteristics that belong to class 100 by choosing the
Characteristics tab.
Characteristic
Description
C001
Pump Lift
C002
Pump Capacity
C003
Turning Speed
C004
Material
C005
Usage
What values, if any, have be assigned to C001 - Pump lift?
Hint: Select the characteristic and select Display Values
Values
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
Your instructor may have added another characteristic during a class
demonstration via the material master. Use the green back arrow to return to
the main menu.
Continued on next page
118
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Task 2: Classifying Material Masters
In a previous task, you reviewed existing classification data to support adding
custom fields to the material master. Classify your new pump and see if you can
find it and others like it using the Find function in classification.
1.
Update your material master for pumpT-F## by adding the classification
view and by assigning it to material class 100 - Pumps. Give it the following
data:
Note: If you have not already done so, you will have to create the
classification view.
Characteristics
Value
Pump Lift
10 m
Pump Capacity
20 m3
Turning Speed
1000
Material
cast iron
Usage
Industry Technology
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter material T-F## and select Views. Select Classification and
choose Continue .
c)
Enter class 100 and press Enter.
Note: If a class type other than 001 appears in your material
master, choose Extras → Change class type and enter class
type 001.
d)
2.
Enter the data from the above table; make sure to choose after
selecting a value and choose Save and use the green back arrow to
return to the main menu.
Search for all materials that have the following characteristic values:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
119
Unit 4: Material Masters
120
TSCM40_I
Characteristics
Value
Pump Lift
10 m
Pump Capacity
20 m3
Turning Speed
1000
a)
Choose Cross Application → Classification System → Find → Find
Objects in Class (CL30N).
b)
Enter class 100 and class type 001, and press Enter.
c)
Enter your pump lift, pump capacity and turning speed, and choose
Find in Initial Class.
d)
Make sure your pump appears on the list and use the green back arrow
to return to the main menu.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Classification of the Material Master
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe how the material master can use classification to include
company-specific fields
•
Describe how classification can be used for batch management of inventory
•
Describe how classification can be used for variant configuration
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
121
Unit 4: Material Masters
Lesson:
95
TSCM40_I
Managing the Material Master
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn how to manage changes to existing material masters
using various functions in SAP ERP
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Describe different ways to update or change the material master
Demonstrate the mass maintenance features of the material master
Describe how the material master can be updated using the request processes
with interactive forms for materials management
Describe the archiving and deletion process for the material master
In this lesson, you will teach participants how to manage the lifecycle of a material
master after created. This will include, manual changes, mass changes, deletion
and archiving a material.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing material master files, you are responsible
for the process to manage changes to the material master. You must begin to
develop some standard business processes to work with updating and maintaining
material masters.
Overview of Updating the Material Master
Over the course of time, attributes of the material master will change. Therefore
you must be aware of the different change functions of the material master in order
to better incorporate your business processes with those of SAP ERP.
122
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Listed below are the different maintenance features that your company may
choose to use in managing the changes in the material master:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creating new screens for existing materials
Changing the material type
Making simple field changes
Managing changes through statuses
Performing mass maintenance of several materials
Maintaining materials through interactive forms
Archiving and deleting materials at end of life cycle
Extending the Material Master
When material masters are created, all of the information may not have been
available. This may result in some views not getting created.
Figure 36: Extending the Material Master
By using the transaction Extend Material View(s), you can extend the material
master record by adding more views. This transaction can be found under
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Other → Extend
Material View(s) (MM50).
The following questions should be answered:
•
•
Which departments have to extend a material master record?
Which material master records does a single department have to extend?
Important maintenance statuses are listed in the following table. Others are
available.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
123
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Department
Maintenance status
Work scheduling
A
Accounting
B
Classification
C
MRP
D
Purchasing
E
Production resources/tools
F
Costing
G
Basic data
K
See maintenance status in transaction MM50, Extend Material View(s).
Hint: If additional views are added to the existing master record, you can
also use the Create material function.
Demonstration: Extending the Material Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Extend material T-F77## by adding the MRP1 -14 view.
124
2.
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master → Other →
Extend Material View(s) (MM50)
3.
Set the Maintenance status to : D - MRP and enter Material T-F77##
4.
Select
5.
Select your Material T-F77## and select Maintain Materials
6.
In the Pop up window, continue through the error, but enter Plant 1000 and
MRP Profile SF01.
7.
From the MRP 1 view Select
Execute
Save
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Changing the Material Type
After a material master is created, there may be a need for changing the material
type. This may be a problem if transactions have already been posted.
•
•
•
Because the material type influences internal processing, the system checks
which changes are allowed.
You can change the material type without restriction if no stocks,
reservations, or purchasing documents exist.
If stock, reservations, or purchasing documents exist, the material type can
be changed if:
–
–
The same G/L account is used.
The same quantities and values are updated.
Demonstration: Changing the Material Type
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Change Material Type (MMAM)
2.
Enter Material P-100, and new material type Semi-finished production, and
select execute
3.
Review the report.
Material Master Updates
After a material is created, business situations will require periodic updates to the
material master. Based on the type of change, your business will have to match the
process with the transaction:
•
•
•
•
2010
MM02 - Change existing views immediately
MM12 - Change existing views planned for the future
CC04 - Immediate changes using the product structure browser
MM17 - Immediate changes in mass maintenance
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
125
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
These transactions do not limit you to which or how many fields you can maintain
at one time.
Demonstration: Change Material Master MM02
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Change → Immediately (MM02)
2.
Change the Planning time fence on the T-Z## casing to 10 days and save.
Material Status
Throughout the lifecycle of a product, changes will be both major and minor
in nature. When major changes occur, a business will need ways of warning
or preventing certain business activities from occurring. By configuration and
using the material status, companies can restrict or warn other business areas of
changes that will be impacting their areas.
126
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Figure 37: Material Status
The material status allows you to control where a material can be used in business
applications. You define the material status in the material master record in
accordance with the material, client, and plant. You can limit the use of a material
in different ways:
•
•
You can flag the material for deletion
You can use the material status to lock the material for certain business
processes in materials management and production planning,
You can check whether a material is subject to restrictions and what these are
using the status information function. You can start this function when creating,
displaying, or changing a material master record. Proceed as follows:
•
Choose Extras → Status information in any screen.
The material status in created in customizing. Users can set warnings or errors in
the following business areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010
Purchasing
PP Master Data
Demand Management
Production Execution
Quality Management
Plant Maintenance
Inventory Management
Costing
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
127
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
You can define the material status for all plants (basic data view) or separately for
each plant (plant view).
Hint: The more restrictive status has priority (regardless of whether it is
the cross-plant status or the plant-specific status).
Demonstration:
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Demonstration for material status 5 minutes
1.
2.
3.
Maintain a material status ME that produces a warning message when
maintaining the BOM header and an error when maintaining the BOM
item.
Assign the status to material T-F99 at client level and create a BOM.
Explain the warning message.
Use material T-F99 as an item in an existing BOM and explain the
error message.
Updating Material Masters with Mass Maintenance
As of Release 4.5x, a mass maintenance tool is available to update the material
master. The mass maintenance feature will reach a majority of the fields in the
material master
128
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Figure 38: Mass Maintenance of Material Master
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
129
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Mass maintenance enables many objects to be changed at the same time. Only
users with the relevant experience should therefore use this tool. To perform
mass maintenance, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the transaction for mass maintenance, MM17. If you have already
defined a variant, you can enter this here.
Select the tables for which you would like to see the data.
Select the fields you want to change on the relevant tab page, and click
Execute.
Enter the desired selection criteria. You can select other fields by clicking
Select Fields.
The system selects the data records. Depending on how many data records
you have selected, the system may ask whether you would like to continue
working in the dialog or whether you would like to perform the changes in
the background. If you choose the second option, a workflow will inform you
later that the changes you made were carried out. If you continue working in
the dialog, the system will display the data records you have selected.
5.
6.
Enter the new value in the corresponding column, select the column header
(for example, short text) and the data records you wish to change and choose
Change Field Values. You have the following options:
•
Change only those fields that have a definite current value
•
Display previous value
•
Test changes
Save the data.
The system will perform a consistency check for the data you changed.
Changes that lead to data discrepancies are not executed and a note is entered
in the log.
Demonstration: Demonstrate Updating Material
Masters with Mass Maintenance
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Follow menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Mass Maintenance (MM17)
130
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
2.
Select Plant Data for Material (MARC), and select the Fields tab.
3.
Select
Find, and enter MRP Type
4.
Select
Execute
5.
At the bottom of the screen select
6.
Scroll through the list on the right and find MRP Controller and select
Choose
7.
Enter MRP Controller 0## and Plant 1000, and select
8.
In the section marked new values change the MRP type to P1.
9.
Select the MRP type column, and then select several Material Master and
select
Carry out a Mass Change
10. Select
Choose selection fields
Execute
Save
11. Follow menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Display → Immediately (MM03)
12. Review the MRP types for one of the materials you updated via mass
processing
Archiving the Material Master
As a material approaches the end of its life cycle it should be removed from the
data base. You can flag materials for deletion by setting the deletion flag in the
material master record. Materials to be deleted are determined by the system by
using a proposal list. The deletion flag can be scheduled for the future and must
then be activated at the relevant point in time.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
131
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Figure 39: Deleting a Material
Deleting a material
Explain the steps required to delete a material record:
1. Set deletion flag +
2. Reorganize.
Explain that deletion flag can be “with proposal list” or “planned”. Planning must
be activated. A material master record can only be deleted if it meets certain
criteria (see documentation archiving of materials -> Deletion criteria).
Archiving a material
A material can be archived before being deleted. Explain the steps required for
archiving:
generate sequential archiving file
2. Set deletion flag
3. Start deletion program
Reorganization runs can also be incorporated for each job. Note: Archived data
can be displayed, but not retrieved.
All records flagged for deletion are deleted during a reorganization run provided
they are no longer being used, for example, as a BOM header.
132
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Deletion is carried out in these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Material master is flagged for deletion.
Material master is selected for a reorganization run.
Reorganization run is executed.
Hint: During the reorganization run, the system checks whether material
may be deleted and whether material may be archived.
Figure 40: Archiving a Material
You can also archive material master records. The data is stored in a sequential file
(archive file). Archived data can be deleted from the database using the deletion
program or reorganization. Archived material master records can be displayed,
but they cannot be retrieved.
Using transaction MM71, Archive/Delete, you can see which other objects need to
be deleted prior to a material master. By clicking the Network Graphic icon ,
you can see which objects needed to be deleted prior to deleting and archiving
the material master.
Archiving and reorganization are handled in greater detail in the administration
courses.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
133
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Demonstration: Demonstrate Archiving the Material
Master
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Create Material Pump-##, by copying T-F1## at plant 1000, use your
defaults, and SAVE
2.
Set the deletion flag for your Pump-##
Menu Path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Flag for Deletion → Immediately (MM06)
3.
Enter the material and Plant and press Enter
4.
Select the plant indictor and select SAVE
5.
Try to change the MRP 1 view for Pump-## at plant 1000
Note: Note you will get a warning deletion flag is set, but material
can still be used.
6.
Archive plant 1000 for your Pump-##
Menu Path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Other → Archiving→ Material → Archive/Delete (MM71)
7.
Enter Variant PUMP-##, and select Maintain Variant.
8.
Select Maintain for all selection screens
9.
Enter your material PUMP-##, and select the Production Mode radio
button, and select Detailed Log
10. Select Attributes, and enter a archive test and SAVE
11. Return to the entry screen and select Start date
12. Select Immediate, and select SAVE
13. Select Spool Parameters and select Continue
134
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Control Using Material Type
Only the most important topics of configuration will be covered here. Additional
topics can be found in the appendix.
You specify a material type for each material. The material type is part of the
general data of a material.
By specifying which views can be used for a material type, you determine which
user departments can maintain a material with this material type.
Figure 41: Control Using Material Type
You can control the type of inventory management (quantity and/or value) for a
material type depending on the plant.
Price control can be defined as a default value or as a fixed value.
Material stock accounts and consumption accounts are assigned by using valuation
classes.
You can determine inconsistencies in valuation areas using the Customizing for
the material type.
The material type is an influencing factor for the field selection and the customized
material master.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
135
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
You can control access protection in more detail by using the authorization group.
Hint: Material types that are maintained by customers can also be
assigned to the transaction codes delivered by SAP. For example, go to
transaction code MMR1 Material → Create specifically → Raw material
in Customizing step Assign material types to special create transactions
and replace material type ROH with customer-defined material ZROH.
The advantage of this is that the material type does not have to be entered
when the material is created.
Set Material Types
Show the possible settings for material types in Customizing (OMS2). Here,
focus on the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Field selection, screen sequence, and authorization group
Control of the procurement type (internal or external purchase orders
allowed)
Views for material maintenance
Type of inventory management
Assignment of account category references
Create a new material type MM## with the required settings and test this by
creating a new material: T-A##.
136
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Demonstration for the Material Type
1.
2.
Show the material type “FERT” and explain the individual setting options
and their meaning.
Create a new material type MA## with the template “FERT” and set the
control using a new material type as follows:
•
•
•
•
3.
External and internal purchase orders are allowed.
No external check against a number range
Product costing with quantity structure is allowed
Maintenance of the following views is permitted: Work scheduling,
classification, MRP, costing, basic data, warehouse, plant and storage
location stock.
•
Quantities and values are to be updated in all plants
•
Material valuation should use the moving average price
•
Account assignment should be made with account category reference
0009
Show that the same number assignment applies to the new material type
as to material type “FERT”.
Hint: The new material type is used in the following demonstrations, in
that a new field reference and screen sequence is added and tested by
creating a material.
Material Status
The material status allows you to control the use of a material for business
purposes.
The material status is defined depending on material, client, and plant.
You can limit the usability of a material in different ways:
•
•
2010
The material can be flagged for deletion.
The material can be locked for certain business transactions by the material
status for material management/production planning and control
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
137
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Figure 42: Material Status
You can display whether a material is subject to restrictions, and what these
restrictions are with the status information function. You can call this function
when you create, display, or change a material master record. Proceed as follows:
Choose Extras - Status information from any screen.
You can define the material status for all plants (basic data view), or separately for
each plant (plant view).
Hint: The more restrictive status always wins out (independent of storage
location or plant).
Material Status
Show the possible settings in Customizing for material status (OMS4): Logistics General → Material master → Settings for central fields.
Demonstration for the Material Status
Create a new material status ZZ, which does not allow processing of these
materials in BOM items. Test these settings by creating a bill of material for the
newly created material T-A##.
Hint: Course participants should use their group number + 10 as the key
for the material status.
138
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
105
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Exercise 3: Managing Material Masters
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Update material masters using the Extend function
•
Update material masters interactively
•
Update material masters with mass processing
•
Delete and archive materials
Business Example
As the process design engineer manager, you are responsible for entire material
master management process. To do your job efficiently, you must better
understand how the different transactions work in updating the material master in
order for you to develop a business process. Therefore you will execute several
updates to existing material masters in order to better understand the functionality
in SAP ERP.
Task 1: Updating the Material Master
As the business process owner for the material master life cycle, you are
reviewing the different methods to maintain the material master. The different
methods will include manual changes, extending the material master, and mass
changes. Execute the following task and determine how you will incorporate the
transactions into your business process.
1.
Your new pump T-F77## has slightly different dimensions from the other
pumps you work on. This will cause the alternative units of measure to differ
from the other pumps. Change the alternative units of measure so that 4
pumps go into a carton, and 8 cartons per pallet. This was the material master
that you created using the PLM WEB UI but you can maintain it using the
normal transactions. Technically, this information would be maintained by
Engineering using the PLM WEB UI but we will use the normal transaction
here.
2.
As the business process owner for the material master life cycle, you
are experimenting with the idea of creating the material master in parts.
With this concept, engineering would develop the client views (Basic
data/Classification) and then the functional departments would be responsible
for upkeeping their own views.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
139
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Extend the finished product T-F77## to plant 1000 and create the MRP 1 - 4
views (D) and Work Scheduling view (A), using the Extend Material View(s)
transaction. Include the following data:
Note: Maintain work scheduling first, save your entries, and then
maintain the MRP views. Press Enter through any necessary
messages.
3.
Field Name
User Entry
Production Supervisor
0##
Prod. Sched. Profile
000001
MRP Type
PD
MRP Controller
0##
Lot Size
EX
In House Production
2 days
Sched. Margin Key
001
Strategy Group
40
Selection Method
2 - Selection by
Production Version
Although you are considering having each department maintain their
own views, you are still in charge of maintaining the entire material
master. The Production manager for you pumps has just asked that you
update the material master with the correct production scheduler. Using
mass maintenance update all your pumps T-F*## in plant 1000, with the
production scheduler 0##.
Task 2: Deleting Material Masters (if enough time)
Your research and development department is creating new materials to replace
existing materials every day. To make sure that a material is truly obsolete, you
must update the material master to make this so. You will create a new material
master to use the material/plant status and the deletion flag to obsolete a material.
1.
Your business creates new replacement parts every day. To minimize risk,
your company wants to be more expeditious in obsoleting materials. To
test this process, you create a material through which you can simulate the
process of obsoleting the material. Create the following material master
record by copying from a reference material:
Create a finished product with material number T-D## (## = group number)
in plant 1000, copied from material T-F1## using your default views.
Change the description to GR## Pump Obsolete.
Continued on next page
140
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
2.
Planning has informed you that the material T-D## at plant 1000 is obsolete.
Your company’s procedures prevent you from immediately deleting a
material master. Archiving will take place several months from now but for
time being you must set the deletion flag for the material. Flag material
master record T-D## for deletion.
3.
To make sure the deletion flag works, try to perform a goods issue using
transaction code MB1C for your material T-D## at plant 1000, storage
location 0002 using movement type 501.
Caution: Do not save your entries.
4.
To prevent such issues from happening, you want to use a material status to
prevent the material from being used at all. Change your material T-D## by
inserting an X-plant/materials status that identifies the material as obsolete.
Material/plant status OB - Obsolete Materials has been created to prevent
any logistics activities from happening until the material can be archived.
5.
After applying the obsolete material status, try to receive another goods
receipt to see if this will prevent possible mishaps with obsolete materials.
Use transaction code MB1C for your material T-D## at plant 1000, storage
location 0002 using movement type 501.
Caution: Do not save your entries.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
141
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
Solution 3: Managing Material Masters
Task 1: Updating the Material Master
As the business process owner for the material master life cycle, you are
reviewing the different methods to maintain the material master. The different
methods will include manual changes, extending the material master, and mass
changes. Execute the following task and determine how you will incorporate the
transactions into your business process.
1.
Your new pump T-F77## has slightly different dimensions from the other
pumps you work on. This will cause the alternative units of measure to differ
from the other pumps. Change the alternative units of measure so that 4
pumps go into a carton, and 8 cartons per pallet. This was the material master
that you created using the PLM WEB UI but you can maintain it using the
normal transactions. Technically, this information would be maintained by
Engineering using the PLM WEB UI but we will use the normal transaction
here.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Change → Immediately (MM02)
b)
Enter your material, select Organization Levels and choose Basic Data
1.
c)
From the Basic Data 1 screen, choose Go to Additional Data, and select
the Units of Measure view.
d)
Add the data mentioned above:
1 carton = 4 pc
1 pallet = 32 pc
Note: All units of measure are converted from the base unit
of measure.
e)
2.
Save
As the business process owner for the material master life cycle, you
are experimenting with the idea of creating the material master in parts.
With this concept, engineering would develop the client views (Basic
data/Classification) and then the functional departments would be responsible
for upkeeping their own views.
Continued on next page
142
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Extend the finished product T-F77## to plant 1000 and create the MRP 1 - 4
views (D) and Work Scheduling view (A), using the Extend Material View(s)
transaction. Include the following data:
Note: Maintain work scheduling first, save your entries, and then
maintain the MRP views. Press Enter through any necessary
messages.
3.
Field Name
User Entry
Production Supervisor
0##
Prod. Sched. Profile
000001
MRP Type
PD
MRP Controller
0##
Lot Size
EX
In House Production
2 days
Sched. Margin Key
001
Strategy Group
40
Selection Method
2 - Selection by
Production Version
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Other → Extend Material View(s) (MM50).
b)
In maintenance status field select the multiple selection icon
and
enter D - MRP and A - Work scheduling, one on each line and click
.
c)
In the Material field enter your material T-F77## and choose Execute
.
d)
Select the line for A - Work scheduling and choose Maintain
Materials.
e)
Press Enter through the error message and enter plant 1000.
f)
Enter the data (first two rows) in the above chart and choose Save
when finished.
g)
Repeat these steps to maintain the D - MRP views.
Although you are considering having each department maintain their
own views, you are still in charge of maintaining the entire material
master. The Production manager for you pumps has just asked that you
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
143
Unit 4: Material Masters
TSCM40_I
update the material master with the correct production scheduler. Using
mass maintenance update all your pumps T-F*## in plant 1000, with the
production scheduler 0##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master
→ Material → Mass Maintenance (MM17).
b)
In the Tables tab, select the Plant Data for Material table.
c)
In the Fields tab, choose Find
, enter Prod, and choose Continue
. Continue searching using the Find Next function until the Prodn
Superv. line appears.
d)
Select the line containing Prodn Superv.: MARC-FEVOR and choose
Execute
.
e)
Enter your material T-F*## and plant 1000, and choose Execute
f)
In the new view, enter 0## in the New Values field.
g)
Choose Carry out Mass Change
h)
Choose Save , and Continue through any warnings. Use the green
back arrow repeatedly to return to the main menu.
.
.
Task 2: Deleting Material Masters (if enough time)
Your research and development department is creating new materials to replace
existing materials every day. To make sure that a material is truly obsolete, you
must update the material master to make this so. You will create a new material
master to use the material/plant status and the deletion flag to obsolete a material.
1.
Your business creates new replacement parts every day. To minimize risk,
your company wants to be more expeditious in obsoleting materials. To
test this process, you create a material through which you can simulate the
process of obsoleting the material. Create the following material master
record by copying from a reference material:
Create a finished product with material number T-D## (## = group number)
in plant 1000, copied from material T-F1## using your default views.
Change the description to GR## Pump Obsolete.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter material number T-D## and use reference material T-F1##.
c)
In the Basic Data 1 view, change the description to GR## Pump
Obsolete.
d)
Choose Save
.
Continued on next page
144
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
2.
3.
Planning has informed you that the material T-D## at plant 1000 is obsolete.
Your company’s procedures prevent you from immediately deleting a
material master. Archiving will take place several months from now but for
time being you must set the deletion flag for the material. Flag material
master record T-D## for deletion.
a)
Use menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material
Master → Material → Flag for Deletion → Immediately or transaction
code MM06.
b)
On the selection screen, enter material T-D## and choose Enter
c)
Select the above material.
d)
Choose Save
.
.
To make sure the deletion flag works, try to perform a goods issue using
transaction code MB1C for your material T-D## at plant 1000, storage
location 0002 using movement type 501.
Caution: Do not save your entries.
a)
Enter transaction code MB1C or choose Logistics → Materials
Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods
Receipt → Other.
b)
Enter movement type 501, plant 1000, storage location 0002 and
press Enter.
c)
Enter your material T-D## and a quantity of 1 pc, and press Enter.
Note: This should result in a warning that the deletion indicator
is set.
d)
4.
Do not save your entries.
To prevent such issues from happening, you want to use a material status to
prevent the material from being used at all. Change your material T-D## by
inserting an X-plant/materials status that identifies the material as obsolete.
Material/plant status OB - Obsolete Materials has been created to prevent
any logistics activities from happening until the material can be archived.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Change→ Immediately (MM02).
b)
Select the Basic Data 1 view.
c)
In View: Basic data 1 under General Data, in the field X-plant matl
status, enter OB - Obsolete Materials.
d)
Choose Save
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
145
Unit 4: Material Masters
5.
TSCM40_I
After applying the obsolete material status, try to receive another goods
receipt to see if this will prevent possible mishaps with obsolete materials.
Use transaction code MB1C for your material T-D## at plant 1000, storage
location 0002 using movement type 501.
Caution: Do not save your entries.
a)
Enter transaction code MB1C or choose Logistics → Materials
Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods
Receipt → Other.
b)
Enter movement type 501, plant 1000, storage location 0002 and
press Enter
c)
Enter your material T-D## and a quantity of 1 pc, and press Enter
Note: This should result in an error message that states that
the material has a status of “Obsolete Materials in plant 1000.”
d)
146
Do not save your entries.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing the Material Master
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe different ways to update or change the material master
•
Demonstrate the mass maintenance features of the material master
•
Describe how the material master can be updated using the request processes
with interactive forms for materials management
•
Describe the archiving and deletion process for the material master
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
147
Unit Summary
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the material master
•
List the prerequisites to creating material masters
•
Use various methods to create material masters
•
Describe the request process with interactive forms and explain how it might
benefit your business
•
Describe how the material master can use classification to include
company-specific fields
•
Describe how classification can be used for batch management of inventory
•
Describe how classification can be used for variant configuration
•
Describe different ways to update or change the material master
•
Demonstrate the mass maintenance features of the material master
•
Describe how the material master can be updated using the request processes
with interactive forms for materials management
•
Describe the archiving and deletion process for the material master
148
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
115
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
The classification system, all classes, characteristics, and characteristic
values are predefined by SAP and delivered with the system and cannot
be changed by users.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2.
True
False
Only material master records can be classified using the classification system.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
3.
True
False
A batch is a unique homogeneous subset of a material, which is not
reproducible.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
4.
True
False
Variant configuration uses classification to select specific items on the bill
of material and the corresponding operation on the routing for products that
have many different options.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
149
Test Your Knowledge
116
TSCM40_I
Answers
1.
The classification system, all classes, characteristics, and characteristic
values are predefined by SAP and delivered with the system and cannot
be changed by users.
Answer: False
The classification system is a user-defined way for companies to create their
own classes, characteristics, and characteristic values.
2.
Only material master records can be classified using the classification system.
Answer: False
In addition to material master records, the classification system can be used
to classify routings, work centers, PRTs, and documents.
3.
A batch is a unique homogeneous subset of a material, which is not
reproducible.
Answer: True
Because each batch has unique characteristic values, it is a unique subset of a
material that cannot be reproduced.
4.
Variant configuration uses classification to select specific items on the bill
of material and the corresponding operation on the routing for products that
have many different options.
Answer: True
Variant configuration uses class type 300 and object dependencies in the
BOM and routing to select specific items on the bill of material and the
corresponding operation on the routing for products that have many different
options.
150
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 5
Bills of Material
117
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants the different phases of a bill of
material’s life cycle. This will include, creation, updates, and deletion. In this unit
you will create several bills of material that will be used in the routing lessons.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces the basic concepts of the SAP ERP bill of material. You will
be instructed on the creation, maintenance, reporting, and configuration of the bill
of material. You will also execute various transactions to manage the process
surrounding its life cycle. Several advanced topics will be covered in another unit.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the organizational layout of the bill of material
Demonstrate the validity process and changing an active bill of material
Describe the process of archiving and deleting a bill of material
Demonstrate the various bill of material reports that are available to
individuals
Demonstrate the comparative reporting tools for bills of material
Unit Contents
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material .....................................152
Exercise 4: BOM Basics...................................................161
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material ...........................................167
Exercise 5: Changing Bills of Material ...................................181
Lesson: BOM Reporting .......................................................195
Exercise 6: Multilevel BOM Reporting ...................................201
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
151
Unit 5: Bills of Material
Lesson:
118
TSCM40_I
Overview of the Bill of Material
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson introduces the bill of material.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the bill of material
The purpose of this unit is to introduce participants to the BOM. Navigation and
definitions are essential here. Specifically the various BOM status(s), BOM
header and BOM items.
If you use the BOM units without the Material Master units then you must run
the CATT ZT_PLM114BOM and ZT_PLM114RTG. This CATT will do the
required exercises in the Material Master units and create the material master
records which are required to complete the BOM exercises. Please use transaction
START_ACADEMYCATTS to execute the CATT needed. THIS CATT IS
ONLY REQUIRED IF THE MATERIAL MASTER UNIT IS NOT USED! IT
IS NOT NECESSARY TO USE THIS CATT IF THE ENTIRE COURSE IS
BEING TAUGHT.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing bills of material, you must be aware of the
structural design of the object in SAP ECC. In doing so, you will learn how the bill
of material is structured to integrate with several business areas in your company.
Your company has requirements to use bills of material for costing, engineering
and production. In addition your planners want to know what features they can
use to model the use of certain materials in specific manufacturing processes.
BOM Overview and Usage
BOMs contain important master data for integrated materials management and
shop floor control. In the engineering design department, new products are
designed to be suitable for production, as well as for their intended function.
The result of this product phase is drawings and a list of all the required parts,
the bill of material (BOM).
152
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Figure 43: Bill of Material Definition
BOMs can be found in various forms wherever finished products or semifinished
products are produced from several component parts or materials.
Depending on the industry sector, they may be called:
•
•
Recipe
List of ingredients
Figure 44: Terminology
Assembly
An assembly is a set of components for a product that belong together for
production purposes. The assembly may itself be used as a component in
another assembly.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
153
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Single-level BOM
A single-level BOM is a set of all the components that represent one or more
assemblies.
Component, part, and item are all synonyms.
Figure 45: BOM Integration
Data that is saved in BOMs forms a significant basis for various areas within
production planning.
Engineering design creates BOMs. You can create BOMs in ECC using a
computer-aided drawing (CAD) program and a CAD interface.
Material requirements planning (MRP) explodes BOMs in order to determine
economical order quantities at a particular point in time.
•
•
In work scheduling, BOMs form the basis for the planning of operations
and shop floor control.
Production order management uses BOMs to plan the provision of parts.
The BOM is also used:
•
•
•
In the sales order as an aid to entering data
In reservation and goods issue as an aid to entering data
In product costing to calculate the material usage costs for a product
The simultaneous use of BOM data in several areas of a company shows the great
advantage of integrated modules that are linked in such a way that they facilitate
a flow of data between various work areas and allow all the users to access the
current values at any time.
154
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Figure 46: BOM Categories
BOM categories define the connection to an object.
Material BOMs are used in SCM to represent the structure of products that are
manufactured.
Order BOMs are used to produce a product for a specific sales order.
A document structure can consist of several documents, for example, a program,
technical drawings, paper documents, and photographs. You need document info
records for these.
Equipment BOMs are used in plant maintenance to describe the structure of
a piece of equipment and to assign spare parts to the piece of equipment for
maintenance purposes.
Functional location BOMs are used in plant maintenance to link equipment to
specific locations.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
155
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 47: BOM Usage
The bill of material usage allows you to create separate BOMs for the various
areas within the company, for example, engineering or production.
•
•
The engineering BOM combines all components of the product from the
engineering point of view and contains all technical data.
The production BOM is set up from the manufacturing points of view. For
example, process data is required for assembly.
The costing BOM is the basis for the automatic calculation of the material usage
costs of a product.
Of course, you can also work with just one BOM for all areas by using the item
status to cover all possible differences.
When creating BOMs with different usages for one material, the system saves
each BOM with a separate internal number for each usage.
156
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Figure 48: BOM Status
The BOM status controls BOM processing in different application areas. When
you configure your system in Customizing under Bill of Material → Define BOM
status, you define the statuses for different indicators that allow or disallow BOM
processing.
Examples:
BOM A
A BOM with status 1 can be exploded in MRP and released for a planned
order.
BOM B
A BOM with status 2 cannot be exploded in MRP or released for a planned
order.
When you configure your system in Customizing under Bill of Material, each
company defines which item statuses are allowed or disallowed for each BOM
where-used list.
You can define item status fields as required, optional, or disallowed for a specific
application area in your company.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
157
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
BOM Prerequisites
Before you create a BOM, you should answer these questions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Does a material master exist for the BOM header?
What is the BOM going to be used for?
Is this material type allowed in BOMs?
In which plant is the BOM required?
When does the BOM need to become effective?
Are change documents necessary?
Does the material belong to a BOM group?
What status does the BOM have?
Are there default values?
Bill of Material: Structure
Figure 49: BOM Structure
The large amount of data required in a bill of material is managed in structured
form:
•
•
•
158
You enter and maintain data that applies to the entire BOM in the BOM
header.
You enter and maintain data that applies to an individual component in
an item.
Items can be divided into subitems if partial quantities have different
installation points. Subitems have no control functions.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Figure 50: Units of Measure
Hint: The system proposes the base unit of measure from the material
master record as a default unit. However, if the alternative unit of measure
unit of issue is maintained in the Work Scheduling view, this can be used.
This uses the conversion factor between base unit of measure and unit of
issue, however, which must be entered when you maintain units of issue.
Structure: Pump
Show the structure of the IDES pump structure. Explain the low-level code and
when it is assigned.
BOM structure
Explain the SAP BOM structure.
1. Header data
2. Item data
BOM status, Item status
Explain how you can use the BOM status to control BOM processing.
Explain the connection between BOM usage and item status. It is important to
point out that when only one BOM is used for all business areas, then the item
status represents the fine-tuned control.
Demonstration for the topic 25 minutes
Perform the exercise for this topic with header material T-F00. Explain the various
screens in the course of the demo.
Head
Total
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
159
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Quantities/Long Text
Additional data
Administrative data
Item
Overview Material
General Data
Status/Long Text
Administrative data
Show the area of validity and validity period.
Create a plant assignment for plant 1000. See corresponding exercise.
Create a material BOM for T-B00 in Plant 1000. See corresponding exercise.
Figure 51: Low-Level Coding
When you create a BOM, a low-level code is automatically assigned to each
material which is used in MRP and costing.
You can display the administrative data in the material master record.
Low-level codes are used in material requirements planning (MRP) to determine
the sequence in which materials are planned and by product costing to determine
how costs are rolled up. Low-level coding takes account of the fact that a material
may be used in multiple products and on multiple production levels of one product.
The low-level code is the lowest explosion level on which a material occurs in all
product structures. Low-level coding collects the total requirements for a material
on the lowest explosion level where it is used.
160
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
127
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Exercise 4: BOM Basics
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Display a standard bill of material
•
Navigate the BOM structure
Business Example
As a planner, you must be able to display the material BOM. This will provide
insight to the components required in the manufacturing process.
Task 1:
Navigate the bill of material for pump T-F1## to become familiar with the SAP
ECC structure.
1.
Go to the bill of material menu.
2.
You should see the bill of material categories that the system allows. What
are they?
3.
Display the material BOM for pump T-F1## in plant 1000. The BOM usage
is 1(Production).
4.
What is the component number of item 0010?
5.
What are the component quantity and unit of measure?
6.
Is this component a stock item?
7.
Is this component in the BOM valid on January 1, 2006?
8.
Does a BOM exist for this component?
9.
Display the material BOM for component T-B3##.
10. What is the valid-to date of this bill of material?
11. What are the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material?
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
161
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
The Engineering Department will be responsible to create the initial Engineering
BOM. That BOM will then become the basis for the production BOM. Your
Engineering Department uses the PLM Web UI to do their work. Logon to the
PLM Web UI and create an Engineering BOM for your material.
1.
162
As an engineer in the Engineering Department responsible for creating
BOMs, logon to the Web UI using the following data:
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
(the password you changed it to in
Exercise 1)
Language
EN (or your choice)
2.
First, setup the PLM WEB UI for use in your Engineering Department by
creating an Access Control Context called GROUP##. Assign it to the
PLM_ROOT_CONTEXT as the Parent Context.
3.
Using the PLM Web UI, create an Engineering BOM for T-F## with no plant
designation and the following components.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Sort string
10
L
100-100
1
A5
20
L
100-200
2
A1
30
L
100-300
1
A3
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
Solution 4: BOM Basics
Task 1:
Navigate the bill of material for pump T-F1## to become familiar with the SAP
ECC structure.
1.
Go to the bill of material menu.
a)
2.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material
→ Bill of Material.
You should see the bill of material categories that the system allows. What
are they?
a)
The bill of material categories are:
Material BOM
Document BOM
Equipment BOM
Functional location BOM
Order BOM
WBS BOM
3.
Display the material BOM for pump T-F1## in plant 1000. The BOM usage
is 1(Production).
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Display or transaction code CS03.
Field
Value
Material
T-F1##
Plant
1000
BOM Usage
1
Enter data from the above table and choose
4.
What is the component number of item 0010?
a)
5.
What are the component quantity and unit of measure?
a)
6.
T-B1##
1 PC
Is this component a stock item?
a)
Yes (item category = L)
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
163
Unit 5: Bills of Material
7.
TSCM40_I
Is this component in the BOM valid on January 1, 2006?
a)
8.
Does a BOM exist for this component?
a)
9.
Yes (effective until 31.12.9999)
Yes (assembly indicator is set)
Display the material BOM for component T-B3##.
a)
You can display it in the same way as the previous task or, in the
General Item overview screen for material T-F1##, double-click on the
assembly indicator in the A column for T-B3# and choose Continue.
10. What is the valid-to date of this bill of material?
a)
Select header
b)
The valid-to date is 31.12.9999.
then Adm. Data tab.
11. What are the base quantity and unit of measure of this bill of material?
a)
Select the Quants/Long txt tab.
b)
1 Pc
Task 2:
The Engineering Department will be responsible to create the initial Engineering
BOM. That BOM will then become the basis for the production BOM. Your
Engineering Department uses the PLM Web UI to do their work. Logon to the
PLM Web UI and create an Engineering BOM for your material.
1.
As an engineer in the Engineering Department responsible for creating
BOMs, logon to the Web UI using the following data:
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
(the password you changed it to in
Exercise 1)
Language
EN (or your choice)
a)
Use the following menu path in the role based menu
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER PLMWebUI → Internet NWBC.
b)
Enter the above information from the table and click logon.
Continued on next page
164
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Bill of Material
2.
3.
2010
First, setup the PLM WEB UI for use in your Engineering Department by
creating an Access Control Context called GROUP##. Assign it to the
PLM_ROOT_CONTEXT as the Parent Context.
a)
In the left panel, scroll down and choose Create Access Control
Context.
b)
Enter GROUP## as the new Context name and accept the default
Context Type Standard context.
c)
Enter PLM_ROOT_CONTEXT as the parent context and click Start.
d)
Enter the description GR## Context, click Activate context, Save, and
Close to return to the Work Overview screen.
Using the PLM Web UI, create an Engineering BOM for T-F## with no plant
designation and the following components.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Sort string
10
L
100-100
1
A5
20
L
100-200
2
A1
30
L
100-300
1
A3
a)
From the Work Overview screen click Create material BOM in the
left panel.
b)
Enter material number T-F##, BOM Usage Engineering/design, and
choose Start.
c)
Enter the component data in the above table and click Save.
d)
Click Additional Functions → Add to favorites and click Close to
return to the Work Overview screen.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
165
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the bill of material
166
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
133
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Managing Bills of Material
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
Bills of material must be maintained as accurately as possible. This lesson
discusses the methods for creating and changing BOMs. Other topics include
validity and engineering change management.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Demonstrate the validity process and changing an active bill of material
Describe the process of archiving and deleting a bill of material
Managing BOMs unit introduces BOM validity, Group BOM and the various item
status. Discuss the group BOM and items thoroughly. There is also some slides
introducing engineering change management. This should be discussed at a high
level. Avoid detailed ECM discussions as they should be covered in PLM150.
Business Example
As an engineer/planner who is responsible for maintaining bills of material,
you must be aware of the options surrounding updating the bills of material.
The products you are responsible for are constantly undergoing changes and
improvements. Your company has decided to use the same material number,
therefore you must reflect the changes in the bills of material.
Validity of the Bill of Material
To define the precise conditions under which a bill of material must be used by
different areas in a company, you define an area of validity and a validity period.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
167
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 52: Validity: Area (1)
The area of validity defines which plants can use a bill of material.
You can extend the area of validity by assigning the same bill of material (with the
same internal BOM number) to a material in different plants. If you do this, note
that still only one BOM exists, so any changes you may make will affect all plants.
There must be a plant view for the BOM header and all the item materials in
each plant that the BOM is assigned to.
168
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Figure 53: Validity: Area (2)
Material BOMs can be effective on different organizational levels.
A material BOM can manage data that is directly relevant to production. In this
case, the area of validity is the plant. The plant is a place of work where all the
necessary work scheduling activities are organized, for example:
•
•
Planning of material requirements
Creation of routings
In this case, you create a plant-specific BOM.
You can also create a group BOM. This is a BOM without reference to any one
plant. This is a good idea, for example, when the engineer/designer is maintaining
a BOM in the engineering/design phase. The group BOM can be made effective
for individual plants using the plant assignment function.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
169
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 54: Validity: Area (3)
Plant-specific BOMs are independent of each other and exist separately in the
system (BOM number). This means that if you make changes to a BOM in plant
1000, BOMs in plants 1100, 1500, and 1600 will not be affected.
Figure 55: Validity: Period
The validity period is the time during which the BOM is valid. This period is
defined by the following entries in the BOM header and in the BOM item:
Valid-from date
When creating a BOM, this date specifies the point in time from which the
BOM header or BOM item is effective.
If you create or change a BOM by entering a change number, the system
copies the valid-from date from the change master record.
170
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Valid-to date
This date marks the end of the validity period for the BOM item. The system
calculates this dynamically.
Hint: The system assigns a default valid-to date of December 31,
9999.
If you change a bill of material with a change number that has a valid-from
date, the validity period of the previous state of the object ends at 0.00 hours
on that date.
You can define a valid-from date for an entire BOM and for individual items.
BOM Structure and Sub-Items
Figure 56: BOM Structure
The large amount of data required in a bill of material is managed in structured
form:
•
•
•
2010
You enter and maintain data that applies to the entire BOM in the BOM
header.
You enter and maintain data that applies to an individual component in
an item.
Items can be divided into subitems if partial quantities have different
installation points. Subitems have no control functions.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
171
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 57: Subitems
Subitems represent different installation points for partial quantities of an item.
For every subitem, you can also maintain a short text next to the subitem quantity.
The sum of the subitem quantities replaces the item quantity.
A subitem has no control functions in the BOM.
This means, for example:
•
•
Assignments to operations only at item level
Waste is calculated only at item level
BOM Management - Item Details
Each BOM item must have anitem category assigned to it. The item category
defines the features and functions of an item. The item category identifies whether
special data must be processed, and controls further system activities.
172
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Figure 58: Item Categories
The item category provides answers the following questions, for example:
•
•
•
•
•
Is it necessary to enter a material?
Does the item support quantity-based inventory management?
Are both plus and minus signs supported?
Are subitems supported?
Which screens are selected and how does the screen layout of the item
detail screens look?
Note that you cannot change the item category after you have entered the item.
You can only correct an entry for the item category by deleting the item and then
creating a new one.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
173
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 59: Non-Stock Items / Item Category: N
You can create non-stock items both with and without a material master record.
If you create a non-stock item without entering a material number, you must
enter a descriptive text and purchasing data.
Using the price data (purchasing data) entered, the system calculates the release
strategy. The material group is necessary for creating a purchase requisition.
The component is procured directly for the production order. Purchase requisitions
are created automatically.
Figure 60: Variable-Size Item/Item Category R
Enter this item category to represent parts of a material of different sizes under
one material number.
174
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
On the detail screen: The system calculates the variable-size item quantity from
the sizes specified and the formula specified, if any.
Advantages:
•
•
•
MRP can be executed by exploding the BOM without any additional work
steps.
You do not have to create a separate material master record for each size
you cut.
All calculations use the variable-size item quantity.
Figure 61: Document Item/Item Category D
If you want to document the product or a component, choose item category D.
Prerequisites for documenting a product or component are as follows:
A document info record must exist for the document, and be maintained in
document management.
The document info record contains basic information for integration into the
business process, for example, information about the processing state and the
storage location. Depending on the document type, you can manage various types
of document data (such as technical drawings, photos, or texts). You can use these
documents to describe an object comprehensively.
You can display the document on the screen.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
175
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 62: Class Item/Item Category K
A class item has characteristics and is used in a configurable BOM.
You can use classes that have materials or documents classified in them (with class
types 200, 201, and 300) as class items.
When you configure a BOM, the class node can be replaced by a specific material
or document.
Figure 63: Recursion
Explain the problem of recursion. Demonstrate recursion by including the header
material as an item in a BOM.
Note: Responsibility for the termination criteria lies with the user who created the
recursive BOM. See also SAP note: 161742
176
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Demonstration for Recursion 5 minutes
In the BOM for assembly T-B00, create an item 40 with the part number of the
finished product T-F00. Show that recursion is allowed. Explain that the structure
is not exploded endlessly because the system has been programed with termination
criteria (max. low-level code)
A BOM is recursive if the product contains a component that has the same object
number as the product. Recursion may be an error, but in some cases it may be
intentional.
If the system recognizes the recursion online, you see this message:
Error: BOM is recursive
In exceptional cases, recursion can be recognized only by the update program. The
person who creates the recursive BOM receives a message.
If you want to create a recursive BOM, set the Recursiveness allowed indicator
in the BOM item.
Figure 64: Item Control Indicators
Show the item control indicators on the appropriate views and give a brief
explanation of these.
The various item categories can be combined with various indicators. Thus special
procedures can be controlled.
Screens:
B = Basic data
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
177
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
S = Status/lng text
You can set most control indicators in the material master. Most are not copied
to the BOM.
You can make settings for MRP data on the Basic Data screen for the BOM item
that override the indicators in the material master record.
Do not explode phantom assembly.
Individual requirements indicator
Direct production (special procurement key SOBSL 52)
Long-term planning
Deleting the Bill of Material
Bills of material can be deleted in several ways.
Deleting a Bill of Material
Explain only.
•
You can delete bills of material using:
–
–
The deletion function
Deletion flags
•
You can:
•
–
Delete the entire BOM
–
Delete individual items
BOMs can be deleted:
•
–
Without history
–
With history using engineering change management
Authorization groups control who can delete a bill of material
Using the delete function, the BOM is removed from the system immediately. If
engineering change management is used, the BOM is deleted on the valid-from
date of the change master record.
If you set the deletion indicator in the BOM header, the BOM is deleted during the
next reorganization run.
Deletion at header level removes the entire BOM, whereas deletion at item level
removes only the specified item.
178
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
If you delete a BOM without history (without a change master record) the deletion
is carried out immediately. Once the deletion has been executed, you can create a
new BOM for the same material, plant, and where-used list.
If you delete a BOM with history (and so with a change master record) the system
deletes the bill of material on the valid-from date of the change master record.
Before deleting a BOM, the system checks for:
•
•
Items with object dependencies to check whether the change master supports
maintenance of dependencies for configurable BOMs.
Items with operation assignments. If assignments exist, the system displays
the relevant message.
See the SAP Library for more information.
You can find out more about SAP document management in the PLM120 course.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
179
Unit 5: Bills of Material
180
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
145
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Exercise 5: Changing Bills of Material
Exercise Duration: 40 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a group BOM
•
Assign the BOM to a plant
•
Copy a BOM
•
Change a bill of material
Business Example
Your company’s BOMs are similar across multiple plants. You want to create
a group BOM that can then be copied or assigned to the appropriate plants as
necessary.
Task 1:
Using the BOM with Usage Engineering/design which was created by the
Engineering Department create a group bill of material with Usage Production
that can be assigned to plants or used as a template to create plant BOMs.
What is the internal BOM number?____________
1.
2.
Before you create a production BOM, display the Engineering BOM that was
created by your Engineering Department for material T-F##.
Field
User Entry
Material
T-F##
Plant
leave blank
Usage
2 (Engineering/design)
Alternative
No entry
Valid from
Today’s date
Using the Engineering BOM for T-F## created by the Engineering
Department create a group BOM with usage Production
Note the following when you create a group BOM:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
181
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Field
User Entry
Material
T-F##
Plant
group BOM has no entry for plant
Usage
1 (Production)
Alternative
No entry
Valid from
Today’s date
3.
Which system message do you get, and why?
4.
Enter the copy from material number T-F##, leave plant blank, enter Usage
2 Engineering/design, and click
, Continue.
Save the BOM and display the header using the transaction Change
material BOM.
Go to the BOM header and make a note of the internal BOM number:
_______________
Task 2:
Create and change plant validity.
1.
Assign the group BOM to plants 1000 and 1100.
2.
Why can you not assign it to plant 1100?
3.
Go to the BOM header for plant 1000.
What is the internal BOM number? _______________
Why? _______________
4.
Delete the plant assignment (plant 1000).
5.
Create a plant -specific BOM for T-F## in plant 1000. Use the group BOM
as a template. Make the following plant-specific changes:
Change the quantity of item 20 from 2 to 1.
Maintain item 20 with spare part indicator “A”
Sort the BOM according to the sort string.
Continued on next page
182
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Task 3:
Extend your plant-specific BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
1.
Change BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
2.
You are not sure if the fly wheel component of your pump is the right
material. Display the material master record to check the material group.
Do not exit the current transaction and do not create another session.
What is the name of the material group? _________
3.
Add component 100-600.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
40
L
100-600
2
The two support bases are mounted on the pump.
The two support bases should be assembled at the front and the back of
the pump.
Create subitems for this.
4.
5.
Add a non-stock item by entering the data below.
Item no.
Item cat.
50
N
Component
Quantity
1
Item text
One non-stock item
Purchasing org.
1000
Price
10 EUR
Purchasing group
000
Cost element
415000
Material group
Metal processing
Add a variable sized item, 100-700, with the dimensions below.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
60
R
100-700
1 piece
Size 1
200 mm
Size 2
300 mm
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
183
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Note the calculated variable-size item quantity.
Change variable size from 300 to 400mm.
Get the system to recalculate the variable-size item quantity.
6.
7.
8.
Add bulk material component 100-130.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
70
L
100-130
10
Add drawing document T-F1## to the BOM and save.
Item no. Item
cat.
Document
Type
DPt
Vs
Quantity
80
T-F1##
DRW
000
00
1
D
Display your BOM, T-F##, with 15 as the required quantity.
Who created the BOM? _________________
On what date? ________________
184
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Solution 5: Changing Bills of Material
Task 1:
Using the BOM with Usage Engineering/design which was created by the
Engineering Department create a group bill of material with Usage Production
that can be assigned to plants or used as a template to create plant BOMs.
What is the internal BOM number?____________
1.
2.
Before you create a production BOM, display the Engineering BOM that was
created by your Engineering Department for material T-F##.
Field
User Entry
Material
T-F##
Plant
leave blank
Usage
2 (Engineering/design)
Alternative
No entry
Valid from
Today’s date
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Bills of material →
Bill of material → Material BOM → Display or transaction code CS03.
b)
Choose Enter
c)
Go to the BOM header and make a note of the internal BOM number:
_______________
.
Using the Engineering BOM for T-F## created by the Engineering
Department create a group BOM with usage Production
Note the following when you create a group BOM:
Field
User Entry
Material
T-F##
Plant
group BOM has no entry for plant
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
185
Unit 5: Bills of Material
3.
TSCM40_I
Field
User Entry
Usage
1 (Production)
Alternative
No entry
Valid from
Today’s date
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Bills of material →
Bill of material → Material BOM → Create or transaction code CS01.
b)
Enter the data from the table above.
c)
Choose the Copy from... icon
the warning.
from the tool bar and enter through
Which system message do you get, and why?
a)
W: Group BOM
The warning message regarding group BOMs can be deactivated from
SAP R/3 4.7 onwards.
b)
4.
Choose Enter
to work through the warning and continue. Ensure
no error messages appear.
Enter the copy from material number T-F##, leave plant blank, enter Usage
2 Engineering/design, and click
, Continue.
Save the BOM and display the header using the transaction Change
material BOM.
Go to the BOM header and make a note of the internal BOM number:
_______________
a)
Enter the copy from material number T-F##, leave plant blank, enter
Usage 2 Engineering/design, and click
, Continue.
b)
Select all the components in the Engineering/design BOM for T-F##
and click copy
again:
c)
Save your BOM by choosing
d)
From the Create material BOM: Initial screen, choose Material BOM
→ Change.
Select Enter
e)
.
twice to access your BOM in change mode.
Select the Header icon . The BOM number is displayed in the BOM
field under the material number.
BOM Number: ___________________
Continued on next page
186
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Task 2:
Create and change plant validity.
1.
Assign the group BOM to plants 1000 and 1100.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Plant assignment → Create or
use transaction code CS07.
b)
Enter the material number and BOM usage = 1. Do not enter the plant
in the top portion of the screen.
Enter the plant 1000 in the Assign to section and press Enter
c)
2.
.
Select the checkbox next to the plant and choose Save.
Why can you not assign it to plant 1100?
Answer: If you try to assign to plant 1100, you will receive a message:
Material T-F## is not maintained in plant 1100.
3.
Go to the BOM header for plant 1000.
What is the internal BOM number? _______________
Why? _______________
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Bills of material
→ Bill of material → Material BOM → Display. or use transaction
code CS03.
Choose Header
b)
.
The internal BOM number in plant 1000 is the same as the number you
recorded earlier for the group BOM of usage production. A reference
has been created. The BOM structure is saved under one number in
the system.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
187
Unit 5: Bills of Material
4.
TSCM40_I
Delete the plant assignment (plant 1000).
a)
Change the plant assignment: Logistics → Production → Master data
→ Bills of material → Bill of material → Material BOM → Plant
assignment → Change or use transaction code CS08.
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Value
Material
T-F##
Plant
<leave blank>
Usage
1
Choose Enter.
c)
Display all assignments by choosing the All Assignments to BOM icon.
Select and delete the assignment to plant 1000 by choosing the Delete
assignment button.
d)
5.
Go back to the Current Assignments and choose Save
.
Create a plant -specific BOM for T-F## in plant 1000. Use the group BOM
as a template. Make the following plant-specific changes:
Change the quantity of item 20 from 2 to 1.
Maintain item 20 with spare part indicator “A”
Continued on next page
188
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Sort the BOM according to the sort string.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material
→ Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create or use transaction
code CS01.
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Value
Material
T-F##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
Select the copy from icon
or press F7.
In the Copy From.. dialog box, enter the material T-F## and BOM
Usage 1 and choose Enter
.
Hint: Do not enter the plant in the copy from box.
Select all of the components to copy and press the Copy
b)
icon again.
Make the following changes:
Change the quantity of item 20 from 2 to 1.
Maintain item 20 with spare part indicator “A”. Double-click in the
item number to access the item details. Select the Status/Lng Text tab.
Enter A in the spare part indicator field.
c)
Sort the BOM according to the sort string. Choose Back
to return
the General item Overview screen. Choose Edit → Sort → Sort by
Sort string.
d)
Save the BOM by choosing Save
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
189
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Extend your plant-specific BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
1.
Change BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material
→ Bill of Material → Material BOM → Change or use transaction
code CS01.
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
c)
2.
Field
Value
Material
T-F##
Plant
1000
BOM Usage
1
Choose Enter
.
You are not sure if the fly wheel component of your pump is the right
material. Display the material master record to check the material group.
Do not exit the current transaction and do not create another session.
What is the name of the material group? _________
3.
a)
Double click on the material number 100-200 in the component table
for Item 20.
b)
This takes you to the material master for that component.
c)
You can see that the material group is 001 (Metal processing) on the
Basic Data 1 tab.
d)
Click the green back arrow to return to the BOM.
Add component 100-600.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
40
L
100-600
2
The two support bases are mounted on the pump.
The two support bases should be assembled at the front and the back of
the pump.
Continued on next page
190
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
Create subitems for this.
a)
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
40
L
100-600
2
Select item 40 and choose the Sub-items button.
SubI
Installation point
Sub-item qty Sub-item text
0001
Front of pump
2
0002
Back of pump
1
Note: The item quantity is changed from 2 PCS to 3 PCS and a
message is displayed.
Green arrow back
or press F3.
Note: Quantity is 3 and grayed out.
4.
Add a non-stock item by entering the data below.
Item no.
Item cat.
50
N
Component
Quantity
1
Item text
One non-stock item
Purchasing org.
1000
Price
10 EUR
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
191
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Item text
One non-stock item
Purchasing group
000
Cost element
415000
Material group
Metal processing
a)
Enter the item data from the table above.
Choose Enter
b)
.
A detailed screen will appear. Enter Copper Plated Pressure
.
Plate in the Item text: Line 1 field. Choose Enter
c)
A detailed purchasing screen in now displayed. Enter item text data as
specified in the table above.
Press Enter
5.
.
Add a variable sized item, 100-700, with the dimensions below.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
60
R
100-700
1 piece
Size 1
200 mm
Size 2
300 mm
Note the calculated variable-size item quantity.
Change variable size from 300 to 400mm.
Get the system to recalculate the variable-size item quantity.
a)
Enter the material data from the table above in the General Item
Overview and press Enter.
The screen variable-size item data is displayed. Enter the sizes from
the table above:
Choose Enter. The Qty Var-sz Item is calculated to 0.06 M2.
b)
Change Size 2from 300 to 400 mm and press ENTER.
Note the message and that the variable quantity has not been
recalculated. To recalculate the variable quantity, delete the existing
value (0.06) and press ENTER. The variable quantity is recalculated
to 0.08 M2.
6.
Add bulk material component 100-130.
Continued on next page
192
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Managing Bills of Material
7.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
70
L
100-130
10
a)
Enter the data from the table above:
b)
Select item and choose Item
c)
Select the Status/lng text tab page.
d)
Select the Bulk material indicator (bottom right).
e)
Remove the CostingRelevancy indicator.
f)
Arrow back or press F3.
or double-click on Item. 70.
Add drawing document T-F1## to the BOM and save.
Item no. Item
cat.
Document
Type
DPt
Vs
Quantity
80
T-F1##
DRW
000
00
1
a)
D
Select the Document tab page.
Enter data below:
b)
8.
Choose Save
.
Display your BOM, T-F##, with 15 as the required quantity.
Who created the BOM? _________________
On what date? ________________
a)
Display material BOM by choosing Logistics → Production → Master
Data → Bills of Material → Bill of material → Material BOM →
Display or use transaction code CS03.
Field
Value
Material
T-F##
Required quantity
15
(bottom line)
From the Header, choose the Administrative data tab page.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
193
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate the validity process and changing an active bill of material
•
Describe the process of archiving and deleting a bill of material
194
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
159
Lesson: BOM Reporting
BOM Reporting
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson covers BOM explosion, where-used list and BOM comparison.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Demonstrate the various bill of material reports that are available to
individuals
Demonstrate the comparative reporting tools for bills of material
For reports, you can carry out the relevant exercise steps from the exercises
for this lesson. Alternatively you can analyze the BOM T-F00, plant 1000,
Where-used list 1 with application PP01. You carry out the BOM comparison for
structure P-100 .
Note: An application always has to be entered.
Show the where-used list using the hexagon head screw 100-130 with different
required quantities or resulting quantities.
Explain the options under View-Settings for all reports.
Note: For the application, you can define a user parameter (SET/GET-Parameter):
Parameter CSA.
BOM explosion
Explain and demonstrate the 3 options for top-down explosion:
1. BOM level by level,
2. Structure level by level,
3. Summarized BOM
Where-Used Lists
Material Where-Used Lists
Explain the single-level and/or multilevel material where-used list.
BOM comparison
Explain the function and show the possible comparison statuses using for one
example:
1. Same material and quantity
2. Similar material, different quantity
3. Different or not assigned. No similarities
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
195
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Business Example
As an engineer/planner who is responsible for maintaining bills of material, you
constantly review and compare bills of material. To support others in this role,
you must be aware of the reports available to review and compare individual bills
of materials, as well as multilevel bills of material.
Detailed BOM Reporting
The BOM explosion answers the question, what a product consists of.
Figure 65: BOM Explosion
This question arises in various situations, such as when:
•
•
•
•
You need to determine the requirements for a product.
The engineering design department needs to look at the overall structure
of a product.
You need an overview of all the necessary parts and materials.
You need to calculate costs or effects of cost changes.
The BOM application defines the following criteria for the search procedure:
•
•
•
•
Priority of BOM where-used list
Priority of a specific alternative for a particular multiple BOM
Production versions in the material master
Checks for particular status indicators
In your user master record, you can enter a default value for the BOM application
field. This value is the SET- / GET-parameter CSA.
196
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: BOM Reporting
Figure 66: Where-Used Lists
You can create where-used lists for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Work centers
Capacities
Production resources/tools
Reference operation sets
Materials
Documents
You can use the object overview to select the list you require.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
197
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Figure 67: Single-Level and Multilevel Material Where-Used Lists
The where-used list provides an answer to this question: Where is a material used
and in what quantity? This question arises especially where there are a lot of
multiple-use parts and materials.
Examples of situations where this information is required:
•
•
•
•
To calculate the requirements for a particular material
To find the products that are affected by a change to an individual part
To find the assemblies that will be produced late because, for example,
delivery of a raw material is delayed
To calculate the cost effects on a product if raw materials costs change
Comparing Bills of Material
The BOM comparison is useful if:
•
•
•
198
Several BOMs exist for a material.
BOMs have different uses.
BOMs have different change statuses.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: BOM Reporting
Figure 68: BOM Comparison
The comparison can be single-level or multilevel.
You can select which fields you want to compare.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
199
Unit 5: Bills of Material
200
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
163
Lesson: BOM Reporting
Exercise 6: Multilevel BOM Reporting
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Evaluate BOM explosion reports
•
Execute a where-used report for a component item
•
Compare two bills of material
Business Example
You are responsible for managing BOMs. As part of the process, evaluations are
required to understand where components are used and compare bills of material
for similar products.
Task 1:
Execute and navigate various BOM reports.
1.
Execute a level-by-level BOM report for material T-F##.
2.
Which items in multilevel BOM T-F## (plant 1000) have spare part
indicator A?
3.
Which items are non-stock items?
4.
Which item is handled as bulk material?
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
201
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
5.
How many hexagon head screws M10 (100-130) are required for 10 pumps
(T-F##) ? Which report are you using for this?
6.
In which materials and in what quantities is the hexagon head screw 100-130
used?
Task 2:
BOM Comparison.
1.
202
Compare your BOM T-F## in plant 1000 with the group BOM for T-F##
single-level and summarized.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: BOM Reporting
Solution 6: Multilevel BOM Reporting
Task 1:
Execute and navigate various BOM reports.
1.
Execute a level-by-level BOM report for material T-F##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material
→ Reporting → BOM Explosion → Material BOM → BOM Level by
Level or use transaction code CS11.
b)
Enter the Material: T-F##(Default)
Plant: 1000 (Default)
Application: PP01 (Production – general)
c)
2.
Access the report via Execute
or press F8.
Which items in multilevel BOM T-F## (plant 1000) have spare part
indicator A?
Answer: Green arrow
by Level: Initial screen.
back (or press F3) to the Explode BOM: Level
Select Edit → View (F5).
.
Enter A (Spare part customer A) in the Spare Part ID. field.
(To see ALL spare parts, enter X in the Spare part sel. field.)
Choose Execute
.
Fly wheel: 100-200
3.
Which items are non-stock items?
Answer: Green arrow
back (or press F3) to the Explode BOM: Level
by Level: View screen.
Delete the spare part entry.
Enter Item category N (non-stock item).
Choose Execute
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
203
Unit 5: Bills of Material
4.
TSCM40_I
Which item is handled as bulk material?
Answer: Green arrow
back (or press F3) to the Explode BOM: Level
by Level: View screen.
Delete the non-stock entry.
Select the box next to Bulk Material.
Choose Execute
.
Hexagon head screw M10: 100-130.
5.
How many hexagon head screws M10 (100-130) are required for 10 pumps
(T-F##) ? Which report are you using for this?
Answer: Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of
Material → Reporting → BOM Explosion → Material BOM → Summarized
BOM or use transaction CS13.
Enter the following:
Material: T-F##
Plant: 1000
Application: PP01
Required quantity: 10
Choose Execute
.
The answer may vary: approximately 180, including totals indicator.
6.
In which materials and in what quantities is the hexagon head screw 100-130
used?
Answer: Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of
Material → Reporting → Where-Used List → Material or use transaction
code CS15.
Enter the following:
Material: 100-130
Type of where-used list: Direct
Select next screen
.
Enter Required qty: 1 and Plant: 1000.
Choose Execute.
Continued on next page
204
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: BOM Reporting
Task 2:
BOM Comparison.
1.
Compare your BOM T-F## in plant 1000 with the group BOM for T-F##
single-level and summarized.
a)
ChooseLogistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Reporting → BOM Comparison or use transaction code CS14.
b)
Enter the following in the Primary BOM area:
Material: T-F##
Plant: <Blank>
Usage: 1
Change Number: <Blank>
c)
Enter the following in the Secondary BOM area:
Material: T-F##
Plant: 1000
Usage: 1
Change Number: <Blank>
d)
Choose Summarized Comparison icon.
e)
1.
2.
3.
icon.
Components with equal quantities are represented by the
Same component but with different quantities are represented by
the
icon.
Components that are required on one BOM but not the other
display the
2010
icon.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
205
Unit 5: Bills of Material
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate the various bill of material reports that are available to
individuals
•
Demonstrate the comparative reporting tools for bills of material
206
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the organizational layout of the bill of material
•
Demonstrate the validity process and changing an active bill of material
•
Describe the process of archiving and deleting a bill of material
•
Demonstrate the various bill of material reports that are available to
individuals
•
Demonstrate the comparative reporting tools for bills of material
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
207
Unit Summary
208
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
171
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
A bill of material is a complete, formally structured list of components that
make up a product or assembly.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2.
True
False
All of the components are stored in a multilevel bill of material for the
finished goods.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
3.
True
False
A material BOM is the only BOM category that can be created in the SAP
ECC system.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
4.
True
False
A material BOM can have many different usages for specific departments
within a company.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
5.
True
False
Each material BOM is material and plant unique and each material plant
combination BOM has a separate internal number assigned to it.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
6.
True
False
At minimum a basic data view of a material master record must exist before
you can create a BOM for that material.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
209
Test Your Knowledge
7.
TSCM40_I
The base unit of measure defaults into the BOM item but can be overridden
with the issue unit of measure from the work scheduling view if it is
populated.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
8.
True
False
Each time a BOM is saved the system calculates the low level code which
is used for planning.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
9.
True
False
Which report would you use to determine which BOMs will be affected by a
component change?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
A
B
C
D
BOM comparison
Level by level BOM explosion
Multilevel BOM explosion
Material where-used list
10. Which report would you use to see an overview of all the necessary parts
and materials?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
A
B
C
D
BOM comparison
Level by level BOM explosion
Multilevel BOM explosion
Material where-used list
11. Which report would you use to see the differences between two BOMs with
different change statuses?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
210
A
B
C
D
BOM comparison
Level by level BOM explosion
Multilevel BOM explosion
Material where-used list
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
173
Test Your Knowledge
Answers
1.
A bill of material is a complete, formally structured list of components that
make up a product or assembly.
Answer: True
A bill of material is a complete, formally structured list of components that
make up a product or assembly.
2.
All of the components are stored in a multilevel bill of material for the
finished goods.
Answer: False
All bills of material are stored as single-level BOMs in the system. So the
BOM for the finished goods consists of its direct components, each of which
may have its own single-level BOM in the system. This linkage creates a
multilevel BOM and can be viewed by using BOM reporting.
3.
A material BOM is the only BOM category that can be created in the SAP
ECC system.
Answer: False
The BOM categories that can be created in the SAP ECC system are material,
order, document, equipment, and functional location BOMs.
4.
A material BOM can have many different usages for specific departments
within a company.
Answer: True
A material BOM can have production, engineering, costing, sales, plant
maintenance usages
5.
Each material BOM is material and plant unique and each material plant
combination BOM has a separate internal number assigned to it.
Answer: False
Each material BOM is unique for the material, plant, usage combination and
each of those combinations had a unique internal group number.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
211
Test Your Knowledge
6.
TSCM40_I
At minimum a basic data view of a material master record must exist before
you can create a BOM for that material.
Answer: True
At minimum a basic data view of the material master must exist before you
can create a BOM for that material. If only the basic data view exists, only a
group BOM can be created and cannot be allocated to a plant until a plant
specific view exists.
7.
The base unit of measure defaults into the BOM item but can be overridden
with the issue unit of measure from the work scheduling view if it is
populated.
Answer: True
The system proposes the base unit of measure from the material master
record as the default unit. However, if the alternative unit of measure unit of
issue is maintained in the Work Scheduling view, this can be used.
8.
Each time a BOM is saved the system calculates the low level code which
is used for planning.
Answer: True
When you create a BOM a low level code is automatically assigned to each
material used in MRP and costing.
9.
Which report would you use to determine which BOMs will be affected by a
component change?
Answer: D
The where-used list provides an answer to the questions, where a material is
used and in what quantity. It can be used to find the products that are affected
by a change to an individual part.
10. Which report would you use to see an overview of all the necessary parts
and materials?
Answer: C
The BOM explosion answers the questions, what a product consists of. To
get an overview of the entire structure of all necessary parts and materials
a multilevel BOM explosion report is available.
212
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Test Your Knowledge
11. Which report would you use to see the differences between two BOMs with
different change statuses?
Answer: A
The BOM comparison is useful if two BOMs have different change statuses.
The comparison can be either single-level or multilevel.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
213
Unit 5: Bills of Material
214
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 6
Modeling the Manufacturing Process
177
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants the purpose of a work center
in modeling a manufacturing environment. This will include, creation, updates,
and deletion. In this unit you will create work centers that will be used in the
routing lessons.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces the concept of the SAP ERP work center and how it is used in
the task list. You will be instructed on the creation, maintenance, and configuration
of the work center. You will also execute various transactions to manage the
process surrounding its life cycle.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the purpose and integration points of the task list (routing)
Describe the structure and purpose of the work center
Describe the purpose of the standard value key and standard values
Describe the purpose of defaults in the work center
Create standard texts to describe a process step
Describe capacities and demonstrate their maintenance
Describe the function of a pooled work center
Describe a reference work center
Use reference and pooled capacities
Describe the how the work center integrates with costing
Demonstrate how the work center and the task list interact with the cost center
Unit Contents
Lesson: Modeling Manufacturing .............................................217
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults .............................224
Demonstration: Creating a Work Center ................................226
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
215
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Demonstration: Options for Work Center Maintenance ...............234
Exercise 7: Create a Work Center .......................................237
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center ......................................245
Exercise 8: Capacities in the Work Center..............................249
Lesson: Integrating Costing with the Work Center .........................257
216
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
178
Lesson: Modeling Manufacturing
Modeling Manufacturing
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson provides a basic definition and introduction to SAP ERP work centers
and task lists (routings).
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Describe the purpose and integration points of the task list (routing)
Describe the structure and purpose of the work center
Lesson should be kept at a high level. Purpose is to describe and define work
centers and routings. Forming the basis for beginning to model the manufacturing
process.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing manufacturing resources, you must be aware
of the structural design of the work center object in SAP ERP. You need to learn
how the task list and work center are structured to integrate with several business
areas in your company. Your company has requirements to use task list and work
centers for costing, engineering, and production.
Introduction to Modeling Manufacturing
In manufacturing, everything revolves around master data, which determines the
relationships between the materials used in production and the production process.
Material masters must exist before a bill of material and its components can be
created.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
217
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 69: Data: Modeling Manufacturing
Bills of materials indicate what materials are used to produce a product. The
components in a BOM can be assigned to specific operations where they are
required.
Work centers must be defined before they can be used in an operation.
Routings are more complex and pull the other pieces of master data together.
Routings define the operational steps required to produce the item, along with
the time required, work center where the work is done, and other manufacturing
control data.
Production resources and tools identify the tools needed to do the work. They
can be assigned to operations.
Documents created in document management can be assigned as components in
BOMs, or as a production resource tool (PRT) to routing operations.
Standard SAP R/3 texts can be created and assigned to PP basic data objects. The
SAP R/3 classification system can be used to group PP basic data according to
user-defined attributes.
For the material you want to produce, you must set the procurement type to
in-house production (X,E). You must maintain at least one plant-specific view
(MRP and/or work scheduling) in the accounting and costing views for the
material.
218
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Manufacturing
Figure 70: Work Center
A work center is a location that defines where production activities take place
according to order requirements. In different companies, work centers are also
called machine centers or capacity centers.
Work centers can be defined as individual or multiple machines, people, tools, and
so on. Work centers are used in routings (routings, standard networks, inspection
plans, maintenance task lists, and rough-cut planning profiles) and in orders. Work
centers can also be used to collect capacity for statistical evaluations.
Figure 71: Work Center Integration
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
219
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Work centers are integrated with and support a number of areas, most commonly
scheduling, capacity planning, and costing.
Figure 72: Routing
A routing shows operations in a sequence and acts as a template for production
orders. The planned time for each operation is stored in the routing as standard
values. These standard values are the basis for:
•
•
•
•
220
Where the work is to be done
How long the work should take
What materials are needed for each operation
What tools and fixtures are required
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Manufacturing
Figure 73: Routing Usage
Routings are critical to a number of functional activities within SAP ERP. These
form the basis for:
•
•
•
2010
Lead time scheduling
Product costing
Capacity planning
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
221
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
222
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Manufacturing
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose and integration points of the task list (routing)
•
Describe the structure and purpose of the work center
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
223
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
Lesson:
184
TSCM40_I
Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn which data is contained in a work center, what is
required, and how the data is used. You will also learn how to create a new
work center.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Describe the purpose of the standard value key and standard values
Describe the purpose of defaults in the work center
Create standard texts to describe a process step
Describe capacities and demonstrate their maintenance
In this lesson discuss which data is contained in a work center, what is required,
and how the data is used. Stress the objectives.
Business Example
As the engineer/planner responsible for maintaining work centers, you must be
aware of the structural design of the objects in SAP ERP. Work centers will only
be created periodically after the initial go live of your implementation. In doing
so, you need learn how the basic data and defaults will affect the modeling of your
manufacturing process in the task list. You will also have to maintain the capacity
and scheduling related data for work centers to integrate them properly.
Work Center Data
Similar to the material master, the work center is made up of several subscreens.
Work centers are plant-specific and can be used in routings. However, for
production orders, it is mandatory to assign cost centers and activity types.
224
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Figure 74: Work Center
Work centers determine the place where the operation is to be executed. They
contain:
•
•
•
Default values that are copied or referenced in operations when you create
routings
Costing data that enables the costing of operations
Scheduling and capacity data required for lead time scheduling and capacity
planning
Figure 75: Work Center Data
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
225
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
A work center contains several groups of data that you can enter on various
screens (tab pages).
Default values are copied to the routing. You use the reference indicator to specify
whether a default value can be changed in the routing.
Demonstration: Creating a Work Center
Purpose
Use work center 2050 to explain the most important fields for maintaining
operations. For work center 111 with work center category 0001, create only
the basic data screen. Explain the rules for maintenance for the standard values.
Save the work center.
System Data
System:
F34
Client:
8##
User ID:
PLM111-##
Password:
init
Set up instructions:
1. Show the most important fields for maintaining operations.
2.
Create the basic data screen for work center 111 with work center category
0001.
3.
Explain the rules for maintenance for the standard values.
4.
Save the work center.
Standard Value Key
Standard values represent the times to be measured when the work center is used
on a task list, for example, machine time, labor time, and setup time.
226
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Figure 76: Standard Value Key
These times are grouped together using a standard value key. This key determines
which standard values are displayed for the work center.
The standard value key is entered on the work center Basic data tab. The key can
be set to required or optional within the work center.
Default Values
The work center contains default values that are copied when you create an
operation and that can be changed in the operation, if necessary. However, if the
default values are marked as a reference in the work center, then you cannot make
a change in the operation. The default values for work center maintenance are
stored in Customizing per plant for the order type.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
227
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 77: Default Values in Work Centers
Note: When setting up an SAP R/3 PP system, you should make sure that
as much data as possible is defined in work center maintenance.
The default values are copied to routings or production orders. This data is saved
partly in various screens in the work center. Activity types are proposed from the
cost center assignment screen.
Figure 78: Standard Text for Operation Description
Standard texts for operation descriptions can be predefined in SAP R/3. To
maintain standard texts, choose Routings → Extras → Standard text.
228
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
A standard text key identifies the standard text. You can specify this key in the
work center. When you use the work center in a routing, the standard text is copied
or referenced in the operation.
Work Center Capacity
A major function of work centers is to support capacity planning and scheduling.
In order to plan these functions, the available capacity must be maintained in
the work center.
Figure 79: Capacity Categories for a Work Center in SAP ERP
Capacity refers to the ability of a work center to perform a specific task. You
distinguish between various capacities in a work center, such as labor or machines,
by using the capacity category. To plan capacities in more detail, you can define
individual capacities for each capacity, for instance in the capacity category
Person 3 employees or in the capacity category machine 5 lathes. Capacities can
be entered and changed in work centers, but can also be maintained independently.
The system distinguishes between:
•
•
•
•
2010
Work center capacities
Pooled capacities
Reference capacities
Default capacities
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
229
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 80: Capacity Header
Each work center can have one or more capacity headers to describe any limit to
the work it can perform in regards to time. For capacity headers to function, they
must be assigned as time to a work center. The capacity header will contain all the
necessary information to identify the available capacity for a constraint.
•
Scheduling: Operating times and formulas are entered in the work center, so
that the duration of an operation can be calculated.
•
Capacity planning: The available capacity and formulas for calculating
capacity requirements are entered in the work center.
Work Center Scheduling Parameters
Shift sequences and shift definitions can be used for detailed maintenance of the
available capacity for each capacity category only if you use intervals.
Shift sequences and shift definitions can be created and selected for special areas
in Customizing with the help of the grouping key.
230
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Figure 81: Available Capacity Maintenance Using Central Shift Sequences
You define the work start, work finish, and break times for all work centers in a
shift definition. In shift sequences, you maintain the sequence of individual shift
definitions for all shift sequences.
The scheduling basis and formulas to be used are stored in the scheduling view of
the work center.
In addition, you also have to define location groups for the calculation of move
times between the work centers using a move time matrix.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
231
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 82: Scheduling Data at a Work Center
The move time can be maintained separately. You can maintain a minimum move
time and a normal move time in the Interoperation times section of the Operation
detail screen. If reduction measures are necessary, the system uses the minimum
move time for scheduling.
Note: The system uses the move time matrix to determine move times
only if you have not entered any move times in the Interoperation times
section of the Operation detail screen.
As a rule, however, the transport time should be determined by means of the
location groups from the sequential work centers and the move time matrix in
Customizing.
You can group work centers that are close together in a location group. You
maintain location groups in Customizing. In the scheduling data screen for the
work center, you assign the work center to a location group.
In the move time matrix, you can maintain the planned move times within a
location group or between two location groups and several plants.
You can maintain the queue time in the work center and in the routing operation.
However, the system uses the queue time from the work center for scheduling
only if you have not maintained a queue time in the operation. If reduction
measures are necessary, the value is reduced from the normal queue time to the
minimum queue time.
232
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Work Center Configuration: Default Work Center
Only select topics of work center configuration are covered here. Additional topics
may be found in the appendix.
You can create a default work center for each plant and work center category.
Figure 83: Configuring Work Centers: Default Work Center
If you create a work center without a template, and a default work center exists,
the default work center is used. All screens are blank if no default work center has
been created for the work center category and plant.
If you create a work center with a copy template, the default work center is
irrelevant.
Configuring Work Centers – Default Work Center 1 and 2
Use the slides to explain the most important points:
•
•
•
For each plant and work center
optional
Only works without a copy template
Demonstration for Creating a Default Work Center
As in the exercise:
Default work center in plant 1000 for work center category PL99.
Basic Data:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
233
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Task list usage
001 = Standard routing only
Standard Value Key
SAP1 = Normal production
Default Values:
Control key
A control key starting with PP: PP01
= Scheduling, capacity planning,
and costing, print time tickets and
confirmation
Units of measure for standard values
Minute
Capacities:
Machine
001
Formulas
SAP005 , SAP006 (0=formula-related)
Scheduling:
Machine
001
Formulas
SAP001, SAP002
Location group
0001
Wait time
5 h, 1 h
no Costing
Test:
CR02: Work center TEST99 => No effect
CR01: New work center of category PL99 => It works (exit without saving)
Demonstration: Options for Work Center Maintenance
Purpose
Add a work center.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
234
F34
8##
PLM111-##
init
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
1.
Point out that default values have been defined for the use of work center
category 0001.
2.
Begin to show the creation of a work center with work center category
0002 and 0003.
3.
Change your work center 111 and select Work center → Check to complete
the default values.
Note: With this menu function, you can also enter the capacity data
for the standard available capacity and the scheduling data using
the default values.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
235
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
236
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
193
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Exercise 7: Create a Work Center
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create and change a work center
Business Example
Two new machines have been purchased to support the assembly process for
the new pump. You are responsible for the definition of a new work center that
represents the two new machines.
Task 1:
Create work center CENTER## in plant 1000. The work center is intended for
two identical new machines with the work center category 0003.
1.
Create work center CENTER## in plant 1000.
Hint: To maintain the individual tab pages (screen sequences),
select Next screen.
2.
Enter the following on the Basic data tab page:
Field
Entry
Description
Pump assembly ##
Person
responsible
0##
Usage
009 (All task list types)
Standard value
key
SAP1 (Normal production)
Rules for
maintenance
Setup time - should be entered
Machine time - must be entered
Labor time - is not checked
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
237
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
3.
TSCM40_I
Field
Entry
Performance
efficiency rate
key
Machine - 090 %
On the Default values tab page, choose the control key (between PP01 and
PP99) and minutes as the unit of measure. Set the reference indicator for
the control key.
Note: Choose a control key from the PP series (PP01 to PP99). It
must allow scheduling, capacity planning, and costing. It must also
print time tickets and allow confirmations.
Task 2:
Answer the following questions about the work center that you have just saved.
1.
Can you define operations using this work center without entering a setup
time?
2.
Can you use a work center in which only the Basic data and Default Values
tab pages have been defined in routing operations?
Task 3:
Add data for capacity, scheduling, and costing to the work center CENTER##.
To do so, use the change transaction.
1.
Enter the capacity category 001, Setup Formula SAP005, Processing
Formula SAP006. On theChange Work Center Capacity: Header screen,
adjust the capacity data using the following capacity data:
Continued on next page
238
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Field
Entry
Capacity planner group
0##
Grouping
51
Factory Calendar ID
01
Active Version
1
Base unit of measure
Hour
Start/finish time
08:00 / 17:00
Length of breaks
1 hour
Capacity utilization
80 %
Number of individual capacities 2 machines
2.
3.
Maintain the Scheduling tab page with the following data:
Field
Entry
Scheduling basis: Capacity category
001
Setup formula
SAP001
Processing formula
SAP002
Location group
0002
Standard queue time
2 (H)hours
Maintain the following data on the Costing tab page:
Field
Entry
Cost center
4230
Activity type
Setup time -1422
Machine time -1420
Formula keys
Setup - SAP005
Machine - SAP006
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
239
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Solution 7: Create a Work Center
Task 1:
Create work center CENTER## in plant 1000. The work center is intended for
two identical new machines with the work center category 0003.
1.
Create work center CENTER## in plant 1000.
Hint: To maintain the individual tab pages (screen sequences),
select Next screen.
2.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers →
Work Center → Create or use transaction code CR01.
b)
Enter plant 1000, work center number CENTER##, and work center
category 0003.
c)
Choose Enter
.
Enter the following on the Basic data tab page:
Field
Entry
Description
Pump assembly ##
Person
responsible
0##
Usage
009 (All task list types)
Standard value
key
SAP1 (Normal production)
Rules for
maintenance
Setup time - should be entered
Machine time - must be entered
Labor time - is not checked
Performance
efficiency rate
key
Machine - 090 %
Continued on next page
240
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
a)
Maintain data from the above table. Confirm entries with Enter.
Hint: After the work center number, enter the work center
description, Pump assembly ##. Use the input help to
enter the person responsible, usage, and standard value key.
Caution: Do not save or exit the work center at this time.
3.
On the Default values tab page, choose the control key (between PP01 and
PP99) and minutes as the unit of measure. Set the reference indicator for
the control key.
Note: Choose a control key from the PP series (PP01 to PP99). It
must allow scheduling, capacity planning, and costing. It must also
print time tickets and allow confirmations.
a)
Select Next screen
b)
Maintain the following data on the Default values tab page:
c)
or choose the Default Values tab.
Field
Entry
Control key
PP01 to PP99
Unit of measure for
standard values
Minute
Reference indicator
Set for the control key
Save the work center by choosing
.
Task 2:
Answer the following questions about the work center that you have just saved.
1.
Can you define operations using this work center without entering a setup
time?
Answer: Yes, but a warning message appears that prompts you to enter a
setup time.
2.
Can you use a work center in which only the Basic data and Default Values
tab pages have been defined in routing operations?
Answer: In the routing, yes. In the production order, no.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
241
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Add data for capacity, scheduling, and costing to the work center CENTER##.
To do so, use the change transaction.
1.
Enter the capacity category 001, Setup Formula SAP005, Processing
Formula SAP006. On theChange Work Center Capacity: Header screen,
adjust the capacity data using the following capacity data:
Field
Entry
Capacity planner group
0##
Grouping
51
Factory Calendar ID
01
Active Version
1
Base unit of measure
Hour
Start/finish time
08:00 / 17:00
Length of breaks
1 hour
Capacity utilization
80 %
Number of individual capacities 2 machines
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers →
Work Center → Changeor use transaction code CR02.
Choose Enter
2.
and select the Capacities tab.
b)
Enter Capacity category 001 , Setup Formula SAP005, and
Processing Formula SAP006.
c)
To access the capacity header data, double-click the number of the
capacity category or choose the Capacity header data button.
d)
Enter data from the above table and choose Enter
e)
Arrow back
screen.
.
to the Change work center: Capacity Overview
Maintain the Scheduling tab page with the following data:
Field
Entry
Scheduling basis: Capacity category
001
Setup formula
SAP001
Continued on next page
242
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Basic Work Center Data and Defaults
Field
Entry
Processing formula
SAP002
Location group
0002
Standard queue time
2 (H)hours
a)
3.
Enter data from the above table and confirm with Enter
.
Maintain the following data on the Costing tab page:
Field
Entry
Cost center
4230
Activity type
Setup time -1422
Machine time -1420
Formula keys
Setup - SAP005
Machine - SAP006
2010
a)
Select the Costing tab.
b)
Make the required entries from the table above.
c)
Save your work center by choosing
.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
243
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose of the standard value key and standard values
•
Describe the purpose of defaults in the work center
•
Create standard texts to describe a process step
•
Describe capacities and demonstrate their maintenance
244
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
201
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
Capacities in the Work Center
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, we will discuss pooled and reference capacities.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Describe the function of a pooled work center
Describe a reference work center
Use reference and pooled capacities
The work center plays an important role in the scheduling process. Through the
default value key, it provides the values needed for the calculation using the
formulas in the scheduling data screen of the work center.
Because a scheduling basis from capacity data is needed for scheduling, you should
use these slides to quickly go through standard available capacity and factory
calendars. Available capacities that are different from the standard available
capacity are covered in course SCM360 and should only be discussed briefly with
the slide Available Capacity Maintenance Using Central Shift Sequences.
Business Example
As the production planner, you are responsible for maintaining capacity and
scheduling-related data for the modeling of the manufacturing process. There
is currently a labor pool that is shared among many work centers. This will be
modeled as a pooled capacity.
Many work centers also operate the same hours. To make maintaining these
working hours more efficient, you want to use a reference capacity.
Pooled Capacities
Capacity refers to the ability of a work center to perform a specific task.
Capacities are differentiated according to capacity category. They are arranged
hierarchically under a work center. Capacity can be specific to a given work
center, it can represent a group of people or machines, or it can be used as master
data for many work centers.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
245
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 84: Pooled Capacities
In SAP R/3, capacity data can be a stand-alone piece of master data called a
capacity header. Each work center can have one or more capacity headers to
describe any limit to the work it can perform in regards to time. For capacity
headers to function, they must be assigned at some time to a work center. In SAP
R/3, capacities are created without reference to a work center when modeling a
reference capacity or a pooled capacity.
A pooled capacity is used to model manufacturing resources that will be shared
by many work centers. For modeling purposes, this only makes sense if the pool
of resources is actually a capacity constraint. Example, you have five production
lines that each require an operator for the entire duration that machine runs.
However, you only have four operators in you resource pool. Therefore, only
four machines can run at any one time.
In SAP R/3, capacity headers can be modeled independently of work centers to
support a shared/pooled resource. In the definition of the work center, the pooled
capacity will be referenced by the work center to act as a planning constraint
during capacity planning.
Reference Capacities
Often times in repetitive, high-speed, manufacturing environments, companies
divide similar manufacturing activities into manufacturing areas, or departments.
Often times, these departments operate at the same starting and finishing times.
To properly schedule any logistics activities, users must create and maintain
the necessary capacity data. However, if the data that is used to model certain
resources is identical, than methods to ease data maintenance should be used.
246
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
Figure 85: Reference Capacity
To ensure proper scheduling, each work center in SAP R/3 is typically maintained
with its available capacity so that you know when the work center is open and
closed for business. By creating reference capacities, users can maintain one
set of capacities that applies to several work centers independently by linking
the capacity data to each relevant work center. When it is necessary to update
the capacity, the planner only needs to maintain the reference resource. The
information is relevant for all resources that have been linked by the reference
function.
The first step in creating a reference resource is to create the capacity header.
The capacity header for the reference capacity is no different then a work center
capacity header. Unlike the pooled capacity, there is no field to indicate that it
has a special function.
Once a capacity header has been created, users must reference it to the same
capacity category in the work centers. In the details of the capacity header, choose
Extras → Reference avail. cap. This must be performed on every work center
that will use the capacity header as reference data.
Once the work center capacity category has been referenced, it can no longer be
maintained. The capacity data can only be maintained by editing the reference
capacity header.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
247
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
248
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
205
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
Exercise 8: Capacities in the Work Center
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create pooled capacities
•
Create a reference capacity
•
Assign the pool and reference to a work center
Business Example
As a general rule, all assembly areas will work the same hours: 7:30 am to 3:30
PM. To eliminate redundant data maintenance, you want to use a reference
capacity to model this.
The assembly machines are run by a pool of six people who move from machine
to machine to assure things are running smoothly.
Task 1: Create Reference Resource
Your assembly lines run from 7:30am to 3:30pm. Each line is available 95% of the
time, due to preventive maintenance. Create a reference capacity to model this.
1.
Create a machine capacity, REF - ##, Assembly Lines, that will reflect the
master data above, and model you high-speed filling line master data.
Task 2: Pooled Capacity in mySAP SCM
You are staffed with six operators to run the assembly lines. Model these as a
pooled capacity.
1.
Create a pooled capacity, Pool - ##, that will represent the labor force that
is responsible for running the assembly lines in plant 1000, based on the
figures above.
Task 3: Create a Work Center
Create work center Assy-## in plant 1000. The work center will use the reference
capacity REF-## and pooled capacity Pool-##.
1.
Create work center Assy-## in plant 1000.
2.
Enter the following data on the Basic data tab page:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
249
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Field
Entry
Description
Assembly line ##
Person responsible
0##
Usage
009 (All task list types)
Standard value key
SAP1 (Normal production)
Rules for maintenance
Setup time - no checking
Machine time - no checking
Labor time - no checking
Performance efficiency <blank>
rate key
3.
On the Default values tab page, choose the control key and minutes as the
unit of measure.
4.
Add the reference capacity REF-##. Enter the capacity category 001, Setup
Formula SAP005, and Processing Formula SAP006.
5.
Maintain the Scheduling tab page with the following data:
6.
Field
Entry
Scheduling basis: Capacity category
001
Setup formula
SAP001
Processing formula
SAP002
Maintain the following data on the Costing tab page:
Field
Entry
Cost center
4230
Activity type
Setup time -1422
Machine time -1420
Formula keys
Setup - SAP005
Machine - SAP006
250
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
Solution 8: Capacities in the Work Center
Task 1: Create Reference Resource
Your assembly lines run from 7:30am to 3:30pm. Each line is available 95% of the
time, due to preventive maintenance. Create a reference capacity to model this.
1.
Create a machine capacity, REF - ##, Assembly Lines, that will reflect the
master data above, and model you high-speed filling line master data.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers →
Capacity → Create or use transaction code CR11.
b)
Enter the following data:
Field
Entry
Plant
1000
Capacity
REF - ##
Capacity Category
001 - Machine
Select Header data (enter)
c)
.
Enter the following data in the capacity header:
Field
Entry
Capacity Description
Assembly Lines
Capacity planner grp
2##
Pooled capacity
deselect
Grouping
99 - APO
Factory calendar ID
US
Active version
01 - Normal Capacity
Base unit of meas.
H - Hours
Start
07:30:00
Finish
15:30:00
Length of breaks
00:00:00
Capacity Utilization
95
No. indiv. cap.
1
Relevant to finite scheduling
Select
Can be used by several operations Deselect
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
251
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
d)
Choose Save
TSCM40_I
.
Task 2: Pooled Capacity in mySAP SCM
You are staffed with six operators to run the assembly lines. Model these as a
pooled capacity.
1.
Create a pooled capacity, Pool - ##, that will represent the labor force that
is responsible for running the assembly lines in plant 1000, based on the
figures above.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers →
Capacity → Create or use transaction code CR11.
b)
Enter the following data:
Field
Entry
Plant
1000
Capacity
Pool - ##
Capacity Category
002 - Labor
Select Header data (enter)
.
Field
Entry
Description
GR ## Operators
Capacity Planner grp
2##
Pooled capacity
Select
Grouping
99 - APO
Factory Calendar ID
US
Active Version
01 - Normal Avail
Capacity
Base unit of meas.
H - Hour
Start
07:30:00
Finish
15:30:00
Length of breaks
01:00:00
Capacity Utilization
100
No. of indiv. cap
6
Relevant to finite sched.
Select
Can be used by several operations Select
Continued on next page
252
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
c)
Choose Save
.
Task 3: Create a Work Center
Create work center Assy-## in plant 1000. The work center will use the reference
capacity REF-## and pooled capacity Pool-##.
1.
2.
Create work center Assy-## in plant 1000.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Work Centers →
Work Center → Create or use transaction code CR01.
b)
Enter plant 1000, work center number Assy-##, and work center
category 0003.
c)
Choose Enter
.
Enter the following data on the Basic data tab page:
Field
Entry
Description
Assembly line ##
Person responsible
0##
Usage
009 (All task list types)
Standard value key
SAP1 (Normal production)
Rules for maintenance
Setup time - no checking
Machine time - no checking
Labor time - no checking
Performance efficiency <blank>
rate key
a)
Confirm entries with Enter.
Hint: After the work center number, enter the work center
description Assembly line ##. Use the input help to enter
the person responsible, usage, and standard value key.
Caution: Do not save or exit the work center at this time.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
253
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
3.
4.
TSCM40_I
On the Default values tab page, choose the control key and minutes as the
unit of measure.
a)
Choose Next screen
b)
Maintain the following data on the Default Values tab page:
or choose the Default Values tab.
Field
Entry
Control key
PP01
Unit of measure for
standard values
Minute
Add the reference capacity REF-##. Enter the capacity category 001, Setup
Formula SAP005, and Processing Formula SAP006.
a)
Select the Capacities tab.
b)
Enter Capacity category 001, Setup Formula SAP005, and Processing
Formula SAP006.
c)
To access the capacity header data, double-click the number of the
capacity category, or choose the Capacity header data button.
d)
Choose: Extras → Reference avail cap.
Enter the following:
Field
Entry
Plant
1000
Capacity
REF-##
Capacity Category
001
Choose Enter
.
Note: Notice that the fields cannot be changed since they are
from the reference capacity.
e)
Arrow back
f)
Choose Create capacity
to the Change work center: Capacity Overview screen.
.
Enter the following and confirm with Enter:
Field
Entry
Continued on next page
254
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Capacities in the Work Center
5.
Entry
Capacity category
002
Pooled capacity
Pool-##
Setup Formula
SAP005
Processing formula
SAP007
Maintain the Scheduling tab page with the following data:
Field
Entry
Scheduling basis: Capacity category
001
Setup formula
SAP001
Processing formula
SAP002
a)
6.
Field
Confirm with Enter
.
Maintain the following data on the Costing tab page:
Field
Entry
Cost center
4230
Activity type
Setup time -1422
Machine time -1420
Formula keys
Setup - SAP005
Machine - SAP006
2010
a)
Select the Costing tab.
b)
Make the required entries from the table above.
c)
Save your work center by choosing Save
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
.
255
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the function of a pooled work center
•
Describe a reference work center
•
Use reference and pooled capacities
256
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
213
Lesson: Integrating Costing with the Work Center
Integrating Costing with the Work Center
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will describe the integration between costing and the work center.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Describe the how the work center integrates with costing
Demonstrate how the work center and the task list interact with the cost center
Business Example
As the engineer/planner responsible for maintaining work centers, you must
be aware of the integration between the work center, the task list, and the cost
center. Work centers will only be created periodically after the initial go live of
your implementation. You need learn how the initial setup parameters will be
continually integrated with the cost accounting module of SAP ERP.
Cost Center Assignment and Integration
For operation costing, it is necessary to assign the work center to a cost center.
Additionally, activity types with cost unit rates are required because multiple work
centers can belong to one cost center.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
257
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Figure 86: Production Costing
You can assign a work center to only one cost center in a time period. A cost
center, however, can contain several work centers.
You must enter the cost center activity types that are relevant to costing in a work
center. There must be an activity type master for the activity types used.
The activity types maintained in the work center are used as default values for the
operation. If no reference indicator has been set for the activity type in the work
center, you can change the activity type in the operation.
258
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Integrating Costing with the Work Center
Facilitated Discussion
Discuss the costing integration and calculation of activities.
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
259
Unit 6: Modeling the Manufacturing Process
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the how the work center integrates with costing
•
Demonstrate how the work center and the task list interact with the cost center
260
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the purpose and integration points of the task list (routing)
•
Describe the structure and purpose of the work center
•
Describe the purpose of the standard value key and standard values
•
Describe the purpose of defaults in the work center
•
Create standard texts to describe a process step
•
Describe capacities and demonstrate their maintenance
•
Describe the function of a pooled work center
•
Describe a reference work center
•
Use reference and pooled capacities
•
Describe the how the work center integrates with costing
•
Demonstrate how the work center and the task list interact with the cost center
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
261
Unit Summary
262
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 7
Task Lists
217
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants the different phases of a
routing’s life cycle. This will include, creation, updates, and deletion. Advanced
modeling will be covered in another unit.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces the basic concept of the SAP ERP task list (routing). You will
be instructed on the creation, maintenance, and configuration of the routing. You
will also execute various transactions to manage the process surrounding its life
cycle. Several advanced functions will be covered in another lesson.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the different types of task lists
Describe the integration points of the task list
Assign manufactured items to routings
Allocate material components to operations
Maintain cutting measures of variable-size items
Describe the functions of suboperations
Retrieve additional fields in operations
Demonstrate how to make changes with history
Demonstrate how to use where-used lists and mass changes
Unit Contents
Lesson: Overview of the Task List ............................................265
Exercise 9: Create a Simple Routing ....................................271
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment .....................280
Exercise 10: Material Assignment and Component Allocation .......285
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields...........................291
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
263
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Exercise 11: Suboperations for Material-Specific Capacity
Constraints ..................................................................297
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes ......................................302
Exercise 12: Task List Changes with ECM..............................309
264
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
218
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
Overview of the Task List
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you will learn about task lists in SAP ERP. We will discuss the
different types of task lists and their integration points with other parts of the
SAP ERP system.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Describe the different types of task lists
Describe the integration points of the task list
If you use the TASK LIST units without the Material Master and BOM units
then you must run the CATT ZT_PLM114RTG. This CATT will do the required
exercises in the Material Master and BOM units and create the material master
records which are required to complete the Task List exercises. Please use
transaction START_ACADEMYCATTS to execute the CATT needed. THIS
CATT IS ONLY REQUIRED IF THE MATERIAL MASTER AND BOM UNITS
ARE NOT USED! IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO USE THIS CATT IF THE
ENTIRE COURSE IS BEING DELIVERED.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing task lists, you must be aware of the structural
design of the task list object in SAP ERP. In doing so, you need to learn how the
task list and work center are structured to integrate with several business areas in
your company. Your company has requirements to use task lists and work centers
for costing, engineering, and production.
Task Lists Types
A task list is a non-order-related process for implementing an activity. Task lists
are used throughout the SAP ERP system to define a sequence of activities to
produce a specific result. Task lists are used in several application areas, including
PP, PP-PI, PS, QM, and PM. The following table shows several different types of
task lists that are used in the SAP ERP system.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
265
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 87: Task List Types
Routings describe material-related production and are used in production planning.
Reference operation sets are not created for a specific material, but can be used as
references within routings or copied into routings. They are usually activities that
are common to many routings and can be created with either internal or external
numbering. Rate routings describe material-related production using production
lines and are used mostly by repetitive manufacturing. Reference rate routings are
non-material specific activities that are common to many rate routings and can be
used as references within rate routings or copied into them to simplify data entry.
Master recipes describe material specific production and are used in production
planning for process industries. Rough-cut capacity profiles are used to view
resource loads in sales and operations planning without BOM explosion. Networks
contain instructions on how to perform tasks in a specific way, in a specific order,
and in a specific time period, and are used in project systems. Inspections plans
describe the inspection process for a material and are used in quality management.
Structure of a Routing
A routing determines the sequence of individual operations that are necessary
to produce a product. It describes the sequence of activities, where the work is
performed, and how much of the work center’s resources will be consumed. A
routing can be created with or without a material number. Routings without
material numbers can be used by many materials that all use the same production
process, production line, or manufacturing steps.
A routing is made up of operations to which work centers are assigned. The details
of the operations contain the standard values or times of production at that work
center. They also contain information about each work center where the work is to
266
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
be performed. The SAP ERP system stores routings in groups that can be either
internally or externally assigned. There can be many routings in a group, each
distinguished by a different group counter.
Other important assignments in the routing include the materials components from
the BOM and any PRTs that are required for production. PRTs are items needed
for production that are not consumed like tools and fixtures.
More than one BOM can have components allocated to the same routing.
Components are assigned to the specific operation where they are needed and
consumed in the production process.
Inspection characteristics can be assigned to the operations in the routing if a
quality inspection is to be performed during an operation. Trigger points can
also be assigned to an operation to trigger functions when a certain event occurs.
Examples of such events might be a change in status or the release of an operation
based on another event happening, such as a confirmation.
Figure 88: Routing Structure
Routing Integration
A routing is independent of an order and is used in the creation of an order. The
operations and information from the routing is copied into the order during order
creation. This includes the planned time for each activity within an operation
(standard value), the work center, and the control key.
The routing information in the order becomes the basis for lead time scheduling,
product costing, and capacity planning.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
267
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 89: Routing Usage
A routing is defined at the plant level. This means that the organizational elements
for company code, valuation area, and plant all need to be defined prior to creating
a routing. A work center is needed to assign to the operation, so a work center
must also exist before the routing can be created. The routing integrates with
material master data, BOM components, work centers, as well as product costing,
capacity planning, production orders, procurement, and planning.
Figure 90: Routing Integration in SAP ERP
268
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
Profiles with Default Values
Only the routing Default Values configuration is covered here. Additional topics
can be found in the Lesson Sub-Operations and User-Defined Fields and the
appendix.
In this step, you define task list profiles. A profile is a collection of default values
for task list headers and operations. You can minimize the maintenance of task
list data as follows:
•
Data from the material master is proposed.
•
•
Data from the work center can be referenced or copied
Data from the profile is proposed.
Figure 91: Default Values Profiles
You can enter a profile in routing maintenance. The values from this profile are
proposed when you create a new routing or routing object, such as a header or an
operation. This data can either be saved or overwritten.
Use the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2010
Determine the default values that can reduce the amount of maintenance
work in your company.
If necessary, define several profiles.
Maintain the default values for routing maintenance.
Maintain the default values for quality assurance.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
269
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
In this step, you can select fields for the following screens:
•
•
•
•
•
Task list header screens
Sequence screens
Operation screens
PRT overview
PRT details
All of the screens where field selection is possible are combined into individual
screen groups. For each screen group, you define the modifiable and influencing
fields. For modifiable fields, you use an indicator to determine how the individual
fields are displayed on the screen:
•
•
•
•
•
Field is ready for input (standard setting)
Field requires an entry (required entry)
Field is display only
Field is hidden
Field is highlighted
If you determine for the list and detail screens for confirmation within the network
that work center is a required entry, you must maintain the work center in all
confirmations. For the influencing fields, you determine how the modifiable field
is displayed on the screen, depending on a value (for example, work center is a
required entry for a certain order type).
The field selection settings you define can be transported and will remain
unchanged when you upgrade to a new release. If a modifiable field becomes a
required entry because of a change to an influencing field, the system does not
check whether this field is filled with objects that already exist. You cannot modify
required fields that are already hard-coded for the application.
270
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
225
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
Exercise 9: Create a Simple Routing
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a simple routing for a material
•
Create a group routing that is not material specific
Business Example
Your business is implementing SAP ERP and you must model the manufacturing
procedure for material manufacturing. You must create a routing for materials
production.
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
CATT:
If the material master units and the BOM units have
not been done prior to this unit, then the CATT ZT_PLM114RTG will need
to be executed to build the master data for this unit. Please use transaction
START_ACADEMYCATTS to execute the CATT needed.
Set up instructions:
1.
Task 1:
Create a simple routing for material production.
1.
Create a routing for the production of material T-B## in plant 1000 that
consists of the four steps in the table below. The routing should be creation
status, valid from today’s date, for production usage, and for lot sizes from
1 to 100,000 Pc. Use the data in the table below to complete the routing
information.
Primary Operation Data
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
271
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-A##
PP01
Lathe casing according to drawing
20
T-B##
PP01
Drill holes
30
T-C##
PP01
Insert Flat gasket
40
T-C##
PP01
Inspect and deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Setup
10 Min
3 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Machine
30 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Labor
30 Min
10 Min
5 Min
10 Min
2.
What are the task list group number and group counter on the header of
your routing?
3.
What is the base quantity and operation unit for operation 10 and how does it
relate to the standard values?
Task 2:
Display your routing and answer the following questions.
1.
Display your routing.
2.
What are the group number and group counter?
3.
When was the routing created and by whom?
4.
What are the validity dates for the routing?
5.
What are the validity dates of operation 20?
Task 3:
Create a non-material-specific group routing to manufacture many different pumps
that all have the same manufacturing process.
1.
Create a non-material specific routing for the production of several different
pumps in plant 1000 thath all use the same five steps in the table below. The
routing should be creation status, valid from today’s date, for production
usage, and for lot sizes from 1 to 100 only. Use the data in the table below to
complete the routing information.
Primary Operation Data
Continued on next page
272
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-M##
PP01
Material Staging
20
T-E##
PP01
Pre-assemble pump
30
T-P##
PP01
In-process inspection
40
T-P##
PP01
Final assembly
50
T-P##
PP99
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times
Activity
Op 10
Op20
Op 30
Op 40
Op 50
Setup
10 Min
30 Min
0 Min
30 Min
0 Min
Machine
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
10 Min
0 Min
Labor
0 Min
10 Min
5 Min
10 Min
10 Min
2.
What are the task list group number and group counter on the header of
your routing?
3.
What is the base quantity and operation unit for operation 10 and how does it
relate to the standard values?
Task 4:
Display your routing and answer the following questions.
2010
1.
Display your routing.
2.
What are the group number and group counter?
3.
When was the routing created and by whom?
4.
What are the validity dates for the routing?
5.
What are the validity dates of operation 20?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
273
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Solution 9: Create a Simple Routing
Task 1:
Create a simple routing for material production.
1.
Create a routing for the production of material T-B## in plant 1000 that
consists of the four steps in the table below. The routing should be creation
status, valid from today’s date, for production usage, and for lot sizes from
1 to 100,000 Pc. Use the data in the table below to complete the routing
information.
Primary Operation Data
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-A##
PP01
Lathe casing according to drawing
20
T-B##
PP01
Drill holes
30
T-C##
PP01
Insert Flat gasket
40
T-C##
PP01
Inspect and deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Setup
10 Min
3 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Machine
30 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Labor
30 Min
10 Min
5 Min
10 Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Create or use transaction code CA01.
b)
Enter the material T-B## and plant 1000 and choose Enter
c)
Enter Usage 1 for Production, Status 1 for Creation Phase,
Planner group 0##, and lot size of 1 to 100,000 Pc.
d)
Select the Operations Overview icon and enter the Primary Operation
Data from the table. Respond to any system messages that appear.
e)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operation from the menu.
Enter the Standard Operation Processing Times from the table and
choose
to navigate to the next operation detail screen. Continue
until all times have been entered and then choose
to return to the
operation overview.
.
Continued on next page
274
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
2.
What are the task list group number and group counter on the header of
your routing?
a)
3.
Choose
to view the header. The group number should be blank
and the group counter is 1.
What is the base quantity and operation unit for operation 10 and how does it
relate to the standard values?
a)
From the operations overview, double-click on the operation number
0010. You should now be in the details of the operation. The base
quantity is 1 PC. The standard values are the setup and labor times
required to produce 1 casing.
b)
Save your routing by choosing Save
.
Task 2:
Display your routing and answer the following questions.
1.
Display your routing.
a)
2.
What are the group number and group counter?
a)
3.
In the header details, scroll to the bottom of the screen. In the
administrative data section, you will find today’s date for the creation
date and your logon as the creator.
What are the validity dates for the routing?
a)
5.
The group number will vary, but should be a number beginning with
50000 and the group counter should still be 1.
When was the routing created and by whom?
a)
4.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03. Enter T-B## and plant 1000 and choose .
The validity dates should be from today to 12/31/9999 as found in the
administrative data section.
What are the validity dates of operation 20?
a)
Select the Operations Overview button and double-click on operation
number 20. Scroll to the bottom of the Operation details screen and
you will see validity dates identical to those on the header: from today’s
date to 12/31/9999.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
275
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Create a non-material-specific group routing to manufacture many different pumps
that all have the same manufacturing process.
1.
Create a non-material specific routing for the production of several different
pumps in plant 1000 thath all use the same five steps in the table below. The
routing should be creation status, valid from today’s date, for production
usage, and for lot sizes from 1 to 100 only. Use the data in the table below to
complete the routing information.
Primary Operation Data
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-M##
PP01
Material Staging
20
T-E##
PP01
Pre-assemble pump
30
T-P##
PP01
In-process inspection
40
T-P##
PP01
Final assembly
50
T-P##
PP99
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times
Continued on next page
276
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
2.
Activity
Op 10
Op20
Op 30
Op 40
Op 50
Setup
10 Min
30 Min
0 Min
30 Min
0 Min
Machine
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
10 Min
0 Min
Labor
0 Min
10 Min
5 Min
10 Min
10 Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Create or use transaction code CA01.
b)
Make sure the Material field is blank, enter plant 1000, enter PUMP##
in the Group field, and choose Enter .
c)
Enter Usage 1 for Production, Status 1 for Creation Phase,
Planner group 0##, and lot size of 1 to 100,000 Pc.
d)
Select the Operations Overview button and enter the Primary Operation
Data from the table. Respond to any system messages that appear.
e)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operations from the menu.
Enter the Standard Operation Processing Times from the table and
choose
to navigate to the next operation detail screen. Continue
until all times have been entered and then choose
to return to the
operation overview.
What are the task list group number and group counter on the header of
your routing?
a)
3.
Choose
to view the header. The group number should be PUMP##
and the group counter is 1.
What is the base quantity and operation unit for operation 10 and how does it
relate to the standard values?
a)
From the operations overview, double-click on the operation number
0010. You should now be in the details of the operation. The base
quantity is 1 PC. The standard values are the setup time required to
produce 1 pump.
b)
Save your routing by choosing Save
.
Task 4:
Display your routing and answer the following questions.
1.
Display your routing.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03. Make sure the material field is blank and enter plant 1000,
group PUMP##, and choose .
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
277
Unit 7: Task Lists
2.
TSCM40_I
What are the group number and group counter?
a)
3.
When was the routing created and by whom?
a)
4.
The validity dates should be from today to 12/31/9999, as found in the
administrative data section.
What are the validity dates of operation 20?
a)
278
In the header details, scroll to the bottom of the screen. In the
administrative data section you will find today’s date for the creation
date and your logon as the creator.
What are the validity dates for the routing?
a)
5.
The group number should still be PUMP## and the group counter
should still be 1.
Select the Operations Overview button and double-click on operation
number 20. Scroll to the bottom of the operation details screen and you
will see validity dates identical to those on the header: from today’s
date to 12/31/9999.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Overview of the Task List
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the different types of task lists
•
Describe the integration points of the task list
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
279
Unit 7: Task Lists
Lesson:
234
TSCM40_I
Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how to assign materials to routings, allocate materials
components to specific operations on the routing, and to specify the dimensions
of variable-size components.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Assign manufactured items to routings
Allocate material components to operations
Maintain cutting measures of variable-size items
Describe the life cycle process and use of the Routing
Business Example
As a production planner you are responsible for the correct staging of material
components for each operation in production. Therefore you have to assign these
components to operations and, if necessary, adjust the BOMs.
Material Assignment
You use this function to determine which material is to be produced with a routing
or rate routing. On the basis of this assignment, the routing can be used for sales
and operations planning, material requirements planning, creating production
orders and product costing for this material.
A material master record must exist in the system for the material that is to be
produced. It must have a material type that is allowed for assignment to a routing
or rate routing.
Materials can be linked to routings for the following scenarios:
280
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Figure 92: Multiple Products - One Routing
The same routing can be used to produce several different materials. Each product
has its own unique bill of material but is manufactured by a common set of
activities with the same standard times. For example, both red and green chairs
can be produced using the same routing.
The material and routing can belong to different plants, for example, the planning
plant and the production plant may not be the same.
The material assignment can be done three different ways. You can create the
routing for a specific material, use the material assignment functionality in the
routing header, or you can use a production version.
If you create a routing for a specific material the material assignment is
automatically done by the system. No further settings are necessary and every
order created finds this routing assignment and uses the appropriate routing to
create the order. This process will be discussed further in the routing configuration
lesson.
If you have created a non-material specific routing or a group routing you can use
the material assignment. In the header of the routing, the material assignment
button will show you a list of all materials that are assigned to use this routing
for their production. It allows you to assign more materials to the list. This is
also effective for using a routing created for one material to produce a different
material. The assignment could be for a material in a different plant, which allows
you to plan production in one plant and produce in another.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
281
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
The third option is to use a production version. A production version specifies
the production technique that can be used to produce a material. It specifies the
BOM and routing used for production with date and lot size validities. In this case
you must also set the selection method field on the MRP4 view of the material
master to select by production version.
Component Allocation
Component allocation determines when materials are to be made available to
production and consumed in your production process. The shop floor papers
will indicate the work center and time to deliver the component to the specific
operation to which it was assigned. As production is completed and confirmations
are recorded this allocation will also control the consumption of the components.
Figure 93: Material Assignment
The following data must already exist in the system:
•
•
•
The operations in the routing.
The master record for the material to be produced.
The bill of material (BOM) for the material to be produced.
You can assign and display material components for separate operations in the
material component overview. For a clearer overview, you can use different
criteria to filter or sort the material component list.
282
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
You can
•
•
•
Assign a new component
Delete and reassign material assignments
Navigate between multiple operations
Material components in a BOM that are not assigned to an operation in the routing
are automatically assigned (default) to the first operation when you create a
production order.
Each item on the BOM can be assigned to only one operation. Items which have
quantities of more than one and need to be assigned to more than one operation
will need to be adjusted in the BOM to allow this type of allocation. For example,
BOM item 10 has 2 pieces one of which is used at operation 20 and the other at
operation 40. This will necessitate splitting BOM item 10 into 2 BOM items each
with quantity of one, say item 10 and item 15. Then item 10 can be allocated to
operation 20 and item 15 can be allocated to operation 40.
According to the item category of the assigned components you can make further
decisions about their processing, for example, backflushing of stock items or
cutting size of variable-size items (discussed in next section).
By repeating this process, you can assign material components from several
BOMs or alternative BOMs to the same routing . In this case, when you create a
production order, you select the BOM and thus which material components are
to be assigned in the production order. The system can do this automatically,
depending on the system settings.
Variable-Size Item Calculations in the Routing
When you maintain the BOM, the final measurements are specified for the
variable-size items.
If you require a large cutting measure for the production of this BOM item,
you can specify this when you assign the operation. Only those involved in
material staging get these measurements. Inventory management books out the
measurements from the BOM.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
283
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 94: Variable Size Items
284
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
239
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Exercise 10: Material Assignment and
Component Allocation
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Assign materials to routings
•
Assign material BOM components to specific operations on the routing
•
Enter dimensions for variable sized components
Business Example
Several different models of pumps use the same manufacturing steps in production
and can use the same routing. You need to assign materials T-F1## and T-F2## to
your PUMP## group routing. To make the manufacturing process more efficient,
you want to assign material components from the BOM to specific operations on
the routing to ensure they are delivered to the correct work center at the correct
time. One of your components is a variable sized item and needs to have the
specific dimensions defined.
Task 1:
Display the material assignment of your T-B## routing.
1.
Display the material assignment for your T-B## routing.
Task 2:
Assign materials to your group routing.
1.
Assign the materials T-F1## and T-F2## to your group routing PUMP##.
Task 3:
Assign material components from the BOM to specific operations on the routing.
1.
First, create a plant-specific BOM for T-B## in plant 1000. Use the BOM
T-B1## as a template.
2.
Assign material components from the BOM of T-B## to specific operations
on the routing. Assign components T-T2## and T-T3## to operation 30.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
285
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 4:
Assign components to specific operations on your group routing.
1.
286
Assign the material components from T-F1## to specific operations on
your group routing PUMP##. Assign components T-B1## and T-T3## to
operation 40, and T-B2##, T-B3##, and T-B4## to operation 20 of your
group routing PUMP##.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Solution 10: Material Assignment and
Component Allocation
Task 1:
Display the material assignment of your T-B## routing.
1.
Display the material assignment for your T-B## routing.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Enter material T-B##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Select the Header icon
d)
Choose the Material Assignment icon.
e)
In the dialog box that appears, you will see your material, T-B##, plant
1000, listed in the table as assigned to use this routing.
.
to go to the header details.
Task 2:
Assign materials to your group routing.
1.
Assign the materials T-F1## and T-F2## to your group routing PUMP##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Leave material blank, enter plant 1000, group PUMP##, and choose
Enter .
c)
Select the Header icon
d)
Choose the Material Assignment icon.
e)
In the dialog box that appears, enter Group counter 1, material
T-F1##, and plant 1000 on the first line in the table.
f)
Enter Group counter 1, material T-F2##, and plant 1000 on the
second line in the table.
g)
Choose Continue
h)
Choose Save
to go to the header details.
and both materials are assigned to use this routing.
to save your routing and exit.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
287
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Assign material components from the BOM to specific operations on the routing.
1.
First, create a plant-specific BOM for T-B## in plant 1000. Use the BOM
T-B1## as a template.
a)
2.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create or use transaction code
CS01 . Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-B##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
b)
Select the Copy from icon
.
c)
In the Copy From.. dialog box, enter the material T-B1##, plant
1000, and BOM Usage 1 and choose Enter .
d)
Select all of the components to copy and choose Copy
e)
Save the BOM by choosing
again.
.
Assign material components from the BOM of T-B## to specific operations
on the routing. Assign components T-T2## and T-T3## to operation 30.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-B##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Select the Component Allocation icon.
d)
Select items T-T2## and T-T3## from the BOM that appears. Choose
the New Assignment icon.
e)
You can enter operation 30 in the activity field or choose Oper./act. list
icon to select the operation from a list.
f)
Choose Continue
g)
Choose Save
.
.
to save your routing and exit.
Continued on next page
288
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Creating a Routing and Material Assignment
Task 4:
Assign components to specific operations on your group routing.
1.
2010
Assign the material components from T-F1## to specific operations on
your group routing PUMP##. Assign components T-B1## and T-T3## to
operation 40, and T-B2##, T-B3##, and T-B4## to operation 20 of your
group routing PUMP##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Leave material blank, enter plant 1000, group PUMP##, and choose
Enter .
c)
Choose the Component Allocation icon.
d)
A dialog box appears showing a list of all materials that are assigned
to that routing. Choose T-F1## by clicking on the line in the table and
choose .
e)
Select items T-B1## and T-T3## from the BOM that appears. Choose
the New Assignment icon.
f)
You can enter operation 40 in the activity field, or choose
Oper./act. list icon to select the operation from a list.
g)
Choose Continue
and repeat steps e through f to assign components
T-B2##, T-B3##, and T-B4## to operation 20.
h)
Choose Save
i)
If you want, you can repeat the above procedure to make component
assignment for the T-F2## BOM to your PUMP## group routing.
to save your routing and exit.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
289
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Assign manufactured items to routings
•
Allocate material components to operations
•
Maintain cutting measures of variable-size items
290
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
245
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Lesson Duration: 25 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how to use suboperations for more detailed planning
and how user-defined fields can be used to add information to the routing and order.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Describe the functions of suboperations
Retrieve additional fields in operations
Introduce the concept of suboperations and how they will be used in business
practice.
Business Example
As a production planner, you are responsible for routing management in the
project team. You would like to model more detailed capacity constraints in
your manufacturing process. You have several materials that require the use of
specific tools during production. You would like to use suboperations to model
these material specific constraints. You also need to use user-defined fields for
transferring data in the operation from other systems.
Suboperations
Suboperations are subordinate to an operation and used for more detailed planning
of the process step that is described in the operation. They are typically used to
carry out more detailed planning for capacity or costing for an operation. For
example, you can use suboperations to assign several people or machines that
are required at the same time, to an operation. A suboperation can be costed,
but can only be scheduled relative to the superior operation. You can cumulate
standard values from suboperations on the corresponding operation. You can
determine whether suboperations belonging to an operation are copied into the
production order.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
291
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 95: Suboperations
Suboperations are hierarchically structured under an operation and are used to
carry out more detailed capacity planning or costing. For example, suboperations
are used in a company at manufacturing centers.
In the figure, operation 20 is responsible for compliance with the production
schedule. suboperations 20/10 to 20/40 are used for exact capacity planning and
costing.
The control key has an important influence on this process. When using
suboperations, it is important that you ensure costs and capacity requirements
are not calculated twice.
Figure 96: Scheduling Suboperations
292
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
The dates of the suboperations are determined using the start or finish reference
for an operation when you specify an offset value.
The reference dates for the start and finish of a suboperation are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start date for setup
Start date for processing
Start date for teardown
Finish date for execution
Start date for wait time
Finish date for wait time
If an operation is divided into suboperations, the standard values for the
suboperations can be cumulated under the main operation. If the suboperations
run in parallel, this kind of cumulation is not possible because the cumulated
values would be too high.
Example: If you set a start reference for a suboperation to start processing with a
time offset of 5- (5 minus) hours, processing in the suboperation will start 5 hours
before it does in the main operation.
An operation that is not to be carried out in the plant in the operation or routing
can be assigned to another plant. The plants only have to belong to the same
controlling area. A suboperation can be assigned to another plant as its superior
operation. The unit of measure in the suboperation can differ from the one in
the operation.
You cannot assign material components, production resources/tools nor inspection
characteristics to suboperations, only to operations.
User Defined fields in the Routing
You can use user-defined fields to assign data fields to an operation or
suboperation. You define the usage and meaning of these data fields yourself.
You can enter business information or values for formula parameters that are
not included in the standard system.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
293
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 97: User-Defined Fields
Depending on the field key, up to twelve data fields with various field formats
are available. These are:
•
•
•
•
•
Up to four general fields for any text You can use them to store information
about people responsible, substitutes or telephone numbers, for example.
Up to two quantity fields You can assign additional formula parameters to
the quantity fields in the field key. With the help of formula parameters you
can use the values of the quantity fields in work center formulas, to calculate
processing times, capacity requirements and costs. In addition, there is also a
field for the unit of each quantity field. Default values and their units which
you have maintained in Customizing for formula parameters are transferred,
but you can change this data. If you have entered data in the quantity fields
and then change the field key, the old values remain unchanged.
Up to two value fields – In addition there is also a field for the unit of each
value field.
Up to two date fields – Here you can enter internal start dates, for instance.
Up to two check boxes – You can use these to indicate whether an operation
is to be included in evaluations in the Info System, for instance.
A field key is defined in Customizing for routings, in which the required
combination of user-defined fields is stored. By assigning a field key to an
operation or suboperation, you determine which user-defined fields are available
in the particular object and also which field names or key words are used for these
fields You can then enter data in these user-defined fields. Note that the system
does not check for data validity.
294
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
User-Defined Fields in Operations
The configuration of user-defined fields has been moved from the appendix to
this lesson where the functionality is discussed. Additional rouitng configuration
topics can be found in the appendix.
User-defined field keys are used to add data entry fields for user data to the
operation detail screen.
These field keys can offer the following fields:
Quantity
Field type
2
Text (20 characters)
2
Text (10 characters)
2
Date
2
Quantity and unit of measure (can also
be used by assignment to a parameter
of origin 4 in formulas)
2
Value and/or currency
2
Checkboxes
Figure 98: User-Defined Fields
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
295
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
In Customizing, the user first creates a field key name, then enters the field name
for each additional field.
The quantity fields can be used as formula parameters in formulas for calculating
execution time and capacity requirements. These fields can also be used in product
costing.
296
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
251
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Exercise 11: Suboperations for
Material-Specific Capacity Constraints
Exercise Duration: 10 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Model detailed capacity planning for an operation using suboperations
•
Create suboperations
•
Accumulate the standard values of the suboperations in the superior operation
Business Example
One of the operations in your production process consists of several steps that need
to be planned in more detail for capacity. You want to use suboperations to do this.
Task 1:
Use suboperations to model more detailed planning of operation steps.
1.
In the production of T-B##, operation 20 has several steps that must be
capacity planned in more detail. Create four suboperations to model the
detail capacity of this operation using the data in the table below.
Subop
Description
Setup Machine
Labor
Ref
Date to
Start
Offset
to start
10
Setup
3
Min
0 Min
0
Min
01
0 Min
20
Mill Pump casing
0
Min
15
Min
15
Min
02
0 Min
30
Turn pump casing 0
Min
10
Min
10
Min
02
15 Min
40
Deburr pump
casing
10
Min
10
Min
02
25 Min
0
Min
Task 2:
Accumulate the standard values of the suboperations in the superior operation.
1.
In your routing for T-B##, first check the standard values in the superior
operation 20.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
297
Unit 7: Task Lists
2.
298
TSCM40_I
In your routing for T-B##, accumulate the standard values of the
sub-operations in the superior operation 20.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Solution 11: Suboperations for
Material-Specific Capacity Constraints
Task 1:
Use suboperations to model more detailed planning of operation steps.
1.
In the production of T-B##, operation 20 has several steps that must be
capacity planned in more detail. Create four suboperations to model the
detail capacity of this operation using the data in the table below.
Subop
Description
Setup Machine
Labor
Ref
Date to
Start
Offset
to start
10
Setup
3
Min
0 Min
0
Min
01
0 Min
20
Mill Pump casing
0
Min
15
Min
15
Min
02
0 Min
30
Turn pump casing 0
Min
10
Min
10
Min
02
15 Min
40
Deburr pump
casing
10
Min
10
Min
02
25 Min
0
Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-B##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Overwrite operation number 0050 with 0020, then enter suboperation
number 10, work center T-B##, and the description from the table
above.
d)
Select the suboperation and choose Details → Operation to enter the
standard values and offset information. You may have to scroll down
in the details to enter the offset.
e)
Repeat this procedure for each suboperation and save your routing.
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
299
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Accumulate the standard values of the suboperations in the superior operation.
1.
2.
300
In your routing for T-B##, first check the standard values in the superior
operation 20.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-B##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
To check the standard values of the superior operation 20, select the
operation and choose Details → Operation. Make note of the values
for Setup, Machine, and Labor.
.
In your routing for T-B##, accumulate the standard values of the
sub-operations in the superior operation 20.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-B##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
In the operation overview, select the superior operation 20.
d)
Choose Extras → Summarize standard values.
e)
Now check the standard values of the superior operation 20 to see if
they have been updated. Select operation 20 and choose Details →
Operation. You will see that the standard values have been updated
from the accumulated totals of the suboperations.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Suboperations and User-Defined Fields
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the functions of suboperations
•
Retrieve additional fields in operations
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
301
Unit 7: Task Lists
Lesson:
255
TSCM40_I
Reporting and Mass Changes
Lesson Duration: 15 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn the reporting options for routings and how mass
changes can be accomplished.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Demonstrate how to make changes with history
Demonstrate how to use where-used lists and mass changes
Business Example
In the project team, you are responsible for the where-used lists and the mass
changes in routing management. Your company must document the changes in its
routings. You are responsible for ensuring changes are documented with history.
Change with a Change Master Record
Changes without history
Changes without history do not have to be documented because they take
place during the development stage of the product, for example.
The status of the object prior to the change is not saved. The system
documents the changes that have taken place but you can only find out
indirectly about the status of the object before the change.
302
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
Changes with history
Changes with history must be documented because they take place during
production.
Both the status before and after the change is saved. The system creates
change documents. For some objects, these change documents differ from
those created for changes without history.
Engineering change management in the SAP system enables you to fully
document changes. Some of these changes may be needed for product
liability purposes, for example.
Figure 99: Engineering Change Management
Engineering change management is a central logistics function that can be used to
change various types of master data and document the changes.
By using a valid-from date for the change master record, the changes become valid
on a predefined date. This aids long-term planning.
You can use engineering change management to store certain SAP objects (for
example, BOMs and routings) more than once. This means that you can store the
objects in all relevant change statuses.
The changes take effect automatically at the predefined time in all areas of the
logistics process chain, for example, sales order, material requirements planning
and shop floor control.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
303
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 100: Why Use Engineering Change Management?
You can use engineering change management to group together changes to
different SAP objects that are affected by one change. You can change all the
objects at the same time or you can define different change dates for individual
objects.
You can use engineering change management to help fulfill your legal obligations
regarding documentation of changes.
You can make object changes (for example: BOM and routing changes) in the
SAP system either with or without history. However, you should be aware that
change documents are created by the system even for changes without history.
As of release 4.0, there are other types of parameter effectivity besides date, for
example, serial number, time interval, customer. These topics are discussed in
more detail in the PLM150 – Engineering Change Management course.
Reporting and Mass Changes
You can use the overview variant to control the information in the list and the
order in which it is listed (for example, sequence, operation, component, PRT).
You can create various displays for routings using object overviews. You can
define your own object overviews in configuration in the IMG.
304
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
Figure 101: Reporting Variants
By generating where-used lists, you can display the routings which use particular
work centers, reference operation sets, reference rate routings, and production
resources/tools (PRTs). You may need this information if you want to delete a
work center or reference operation set but you want to first check if it is being used
in a routing. If you want, you can also display routings which have already been
deleted online but which still exist in the database.
Figure 102: Where-Used Lists
Where-used lists can be generated for work centers, capacities, production
resources/tools, and reference operation sets.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
305
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Figure 103: Mass Change and Reporting
If you want to replace an object in several routings with another object (for
example, an old work center with a new one) you can use the mass replace
function. You do not have to generate a where-used list in order to replace each
work center individually. Instead, you can use the mass replace function to quickly
and completely replace work centers in all routings where they are used.
You can use the Replace function to make mass changes to the following:
•
•
•
Work centers
PRTs
Reference operation sets
The system generates a list of all routings that use the object to be replaced.
When you use the mass replace function without a change number, the new objects
will have the same validity periods as the old objects.
306
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
Figure 104: Mass Replacement of Routing Data
You can use the replace function to make mass changes to work centers, PRTs,
and reference operation sets.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
307
Unit 7: Task Lists
308
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
261
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
Exercise 12: Task List Changes with ECM
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Make changes without history in a task list
•
Make changes with history in a task list
•
Display changes with history in a task list
•
Make mass changes with history in a task list
Business Example
As new work centers are created to update your production equipment, task lists
will also need to be updated. This may require changes to be captured with history
for legal or reporting purposes. These changes also may need to be made in
mass for all routings.
Task 1:
Display a list of all changes without history that have been made to your routing.
1.
Display a list of changes that have been made to your routing, T-B##, thus
far.
Task 2:
Check to see which routings and rate routings are using a specific work center.
1.
Determine to which other task lists work center T-B## has been assigned by
executing a work center where-used list.
Task 3:
Because of a capacity constraint in your production, your company is building a
new work center that will be operational in two months. Replace the final assembly
work center in your routing effective on that day and be sure to track history.
1.
Replace the final assembly work center T-C## on your T-B## routing, with
your new work center CENTER## using your Engineering Change Number
ECN## to track history.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
309
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 4:
Display your routing with different key dates to view the change history.
1.
Display your routing with a key date one day before the change date (today +
2 months - 1 day). Which work center is assigned to operation 40? What are
the validity dates of operation 40?
2.
Display your routing using a key date of one day after the change date (today
+ 2 months + 1 day). Which work center is assigned to operation 40? What
are the validity dates of operation 40?
Task 5:
Since the new work center will replace the old one on all routings, do a mass
replace with history.
1.
310
Your new work center, CENTER## , will replace work center T-F## on
all routings two months from today. Use mass replace and change number
ECN## to track history.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
Solution 12: Task List Changes with ECM
Task 1:
Display a list of all changes without history that have been made to your routing.
1.
Display a list of changes that have been made to your routing, T-B##, thus
far.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Reporting → Task List Changes or use transaction code
CA60.
b)
Enter task list type N, material T-B##, and plant 1000. Accept the
default dates, be sure that all changes in the list are selected, and
choose Execute .
c)
This is the list of changes that have been made to your routing. Look
at the Changed on date and Changed by field.
Task 2:
Check to see which routings and rate routings are using a specific work center.
1.
Determine to which other task lists work center T-B## has been assigned by
executing a work center where-used list.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Reporting → Where-Used List → Work Center or use
transaction code CA80.
b)
Enter the work center T-B## and plant 1000. Accept the default key
date, enter task list type N in the from field, S in the to field to check all
routings and rate routings, and choose Execute .
c)
Choose an overview variant from the list that displays work centers like
L00000000060 and choose Enter. The system displays a list of all
routings and rate routings that have the work center assigned, as well as
the sequence and operation to which it is assigned.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
311
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Because of a capacity constraint in your production, your company is building a
new work center that will be operational in two months. Replace the final assembly
work center in your routing effective on that day and be sure to track history.
1.
Replace the final assembly work center T-C## on your T-B## routing, with
your new work center CENTER## using your Engineering Change Number
ECN## to track history.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings→ Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter the material T-B##, plant 1000, change number ECN##, and
choose Enter .
c)
A warning message appears in the status bar indicating, “The key date
is overwritten with the date from the change number record.” Press
ENTER to work through the warning.
d)
In operation 40, replace work center T-C## with CENTER## and save
your routing.
e)
Why does the system require you to enter Machine Time? When you
created the work center you assigned the rule Must be Entered. Since
the previous work center did not have machine time defined it requires
you to complete the data.
Task 4:
Display your routing with different key dates to view the change history.
1.
Display your routing with a key date one day before the change date (today +
2 months - 1 day). Which work center is assigned to operation 40? What are
the validity dates of operation 40?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings→ Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Enter the material T-B##, plant 1000, key date one day before the
change date (today + 2 months - 1 day), and choose Enter .
c)
The work center assigned to operation 40 is T-C##.
d)
Double-click on the operation number and scroll to the bottom of the
operation details screen to see the validity dates. The Valid To date
should be the change date used in the change number or two months
from today.
Continued on next page
312
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reporting and Mass Changes
2.
Display your routing using a key date of one day after the change date (today
+ 2 months + 1 day). Which work center is assigned to operation 40? What
are the validity dates of operation 40?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings→ Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Enter the material T-B##, plant 1000, key date one day before the
change date (today + 2 months - 1 day), and choose Enter .
c)
The work center assigned to operation 40 is CENTER##.
d)
Double-click on the operation number and scroll to the bottom of the
operation details screen to see the validity dates. The Valid From date
should be the change date used in the change number or two months
from today.
Task 5:
Since the new work center will replace the old one on all routings, do a mass
replace with history.
1.
Your new work center, CENTER## , will replace work center T-F## on
all routings two months from today. Use mass replace and change number
ECN## to track history.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Extras
→ Mass Changes→ Replace Work Center or use transaction code
CA85.
b)
Enter the work center T-F##, plant 1000, new work center
CENTER##, plant 1000, change number ECN##, and choose Execute
.
c)
A warning will appear to warn you that the work centers have different
standard value keys. This can be important for formula calculations
in the work center and affect capacity requirements, scheduling, and
costing.
d)
On the list, select the operations for which you want to replace the
work center and choose Replace work center
.
You will be required to enter machine time for each operation that does
not have it.
e)
2010
Check the routings you just changed to see the change and the validity
date.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
313
Unit 7: Task Lists
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate how to make changes with history
•
Demonstrate how to use where-used lists and mass changes
314
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the different types of task lists
•
Describe the integration points of the task list
•
Assign manufactured items to routings
•
Allocate material components to operations
•
Maintain cutting measures of variable-size items
•
Describe the functions of suboperations
•
Retrieve additional fields in operations
•
Demonstrate how to make changes with history
•
Demonstrate how to use where-used lists and mass changes
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
315
Unit Summary
316
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
269
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
Which of the following is not a way to create routing material assignments
in SAP ERP?
Choose the correct answer(s).
2.
□
□
A
B
□
□
C
D
Create a material specific routing
Copy a materials master record and the BOM and routing are
automatically copied also
In the routing header create a material assignment
Create a production version
Which of the following is not a pre-requisite for component allocation?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
3.
A
B
C
D
Operations in the routing must exist
Production version must exist
BOM for the material to be produced must exist
Backflush indicator must be set
Any materials component that is not assigned to an operation in the routing
will default to the first operation.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
4.
True
False
Each item on the BOM can be assigned to one and only one operation on
the routing.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
5.
True
False
Component allocation to an operation is the only additional information
which can be maintained with regard to components.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
6.
True
False
Suboperations can be used for more detailed capacity planning and costing.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
317
Test Your Knowledge
7.
TSCM40_I
When using suboperations costing is automatically done at the operation
level regardless of the control keys.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
8.
True
False
You can use user-defined fields to assign data fields to an operation or
suboperation for information purposes only.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
9.
True
False
Which of the following are ways to make changes to routings in SAP ERP?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
A
B
C
D
Without record of changes
With change documents
With history using ECM
All of the above
10. A where-used list can show you which task lists will be affected by a change
in work center.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
True
False
11. It is not possible to make mass changes to routings using an ECM number.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
318
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
271
Test Your Knowledge
Answers
1.
Which of the following is not a way to create routing material assignments
in SAP ERP?
Answer: B
There are 3 ways to create material assignments in the routing; create a
material specific routing, create a material assignment in the header of the
routing, create a production version. Material master records that are copied
do not copy the BOM and routing also.
2.
Which of the following is not a pre-requisite for component allocation?
Answer: B, D
Before you can allocate components to specific operations on the routing the
operations must exist in the routing and the BOM must exist for the material
to be produced.
3.
Any materials component that is not assigned to an operation in the routing
will default to the first operation.
Answer: True
Material components in a BOM that are not assigned to an operation in the
routing are automatically assigned (default) to the first operation when you
create a production order.
4.
Each item on the BOM can be assigned to one and only one operation on
the routing.
Answer: True
Each item on the BOM can be assigned to only one operation. Items which
have quantities of more than one and need to be assigned to more than one
operation will need to be adjusted in the BOM to allow this type of allocation.
5.
Component allocation to an operation is the only additional information
which can be maintained with regard to components.
Answer: False
According to the item category of the assigned components you can make
further decisions about their processing, like backflushing of stock items or
cutting size of variable-size items.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
319
Test Your Knowledge
6.
TSCM40_I
Suboperations can be used for more detailed capacity planning and costing.
Answer: True
Suboperations are subordinate to an operation and used for more detailed
planning of the process step that is described in the operation. They are
typically used to carry out more detailed planning for capacity or costing.
7.
When using suboperations costing is automatically done at the operation
level regardless of the control keys.
Answer: False
When using suboperations, it is important that you ensure costs and capacity
requirements are not calculated twice by using the appropriate control keys.
8.
You can use user-defined fields to assign data fields to an operation or
suboperation for information purposes only.
Answer: False
You can use user-defined fields to assign data fields to an operation or
suboperation. You can enter business information or values for formulas
parameters that are not included in the standard system. The values for
formula parameters could be used for calculating capacity requirements,
scheduling, or costing.
9.
Which of the following are ways to make changes to routings in SAP ERP?
Answer: D
Changes to routing can be made without history, with changes documents,
or with history using ECM.
10. A where-used list can show you which task lists will be affected by a change
in work center.
Answer: True
A where-used list can show you which task lists contain a specific work
center and will be affected by a changed in that work center.
11. It is not possible to make mass changes to routings using an ECM number.
Answer: False
You can make changes to routings using mass change and by using an
engineering change number.
320
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 8
Advanced Bill of Material Functions
273
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants advanced functions of the bill
of material. It is important that participants understand that not all funcations
may be used in their implementation.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces several advanced concepts surrounding the bill of material
in SAP ERP. Not all of the following functions will be required to use during the
modeling of your company’s manufacturing process. These functions will include
the user of multiple bills of materials, co-products/by-products, substitute parts
and other miscellaneous functions.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Explain the concept of a phantom BOM and when it should be used
Create a phantom BOM in SAP R/3
Maintain phantom bills of material
Demonstrate model co-products and by-products
Demonstrate and explain the discontinuation process.
Model item substitutions in the bill of material
Discuss the advantages of using multiple and variant BOMs
Create a multiple BOM
Create a variant BOM
Define variant configuration
Update BOMs using mass changes
Navigate the product structure browser
Unit Contents
Lesson: Phantom Assemblies.................................................323
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
321
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Co-Products and By-Products ......................................328
Exercise 13: Co-Products in Production Orders .......................331
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material .....336
Exercise 14: Substitute Items in Production Orders ...................343
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS..........................................352
Exercise 15: Multiple/Alternative Bills of Material ......................361
Exercise 16: Variant BOMs ...............................................371
Lesson: Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser..............376
Exercise 17: Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser....379
322
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
275
Lesson: Phantom Assemblies
Phantom Assemblies
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
During the design or manufacturing of a product, engineering often times creates
“phantom” or “dummy” assemblies. The purpose of these assemblies is to make
maintenance of the item easier as the product evolves and changes.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Explain the concept of a phantom BOM and when it should be used
Create a phantom BOM in SAP R/3
Maintain phantom bills of material
Business Example
As a production planned, you have some parts that are categorized as service parts.
These items are used in production, but are also sold directly to customers as the
items’ wear and tear requires them to be replaced. You would like the item used in
production to be classified as a phantom bill of material.
Phantom Assemblies
A phantom assembly is a logical grouping of materials. A phantom assembly is
usually created within engineering to describe a number of components easily and
manage them as a whole. The components in a phantom assembly are placed
immediately into the superior assembly. As opposed to this, components in an
assembly are first assembled to produce the header material. After this, the header
material is placed into the superior assembly.
For example, the phantom assembly “set of wheels” contains the components
“front wheel” and “rear wheel.” The front and rear wheels are placed immediately
into the “bicycle” assembly. The “light” assembly contains the materials “bulb”
and “reflector.” The light components are first assembled and then the light is
attached to the bicycle.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
323
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 105: Phantom Assemblies
Phantom assemblies are used in SAP R/3 to enable the simple structuring
of BOMs; the items typically do not physically exist. You can see phantom
assemblies as parentheses around a group of components that are often used
in conjunction with each other. This significantly reduces the amount of
administration needed for the master data. For changes to materials (for example,
discontinued material) you only have to carry out the changes on one BOM. The
changes have an effect on all BOMs used by the phantom assemblies.
Phantom assemblies also facilitate component assignment, since the components
of a phantom assembly are assigned to the same operation. The same is true
for the phantom assembly itself if you have not made an assignment for the
components. During the BOM explosion in an SAP R/3 production order, the
BOMs for phantom assemblies are also exploded. The components of the phantom
assemblies become normal reservations, while the phantom assembly itself is
transferred to the order as an unplanned effective reservation. The components of
a phantom assembly are connected in a hierarchy with the superordinate assembly.
324
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Phantom Assemblies
Figure 106: Setting Phantoms in SAP R/3
The settings for phantoms can occur in three different places in SAP R/3. The
highest level to determine a part as a phantom assembly is at the material master.
In the MRP 2 view, users can set an item to be a phantom assembly by setting the
special procurement key. This means that this part at the plant level will not be
manufactured and inventoried in that form.
In addition, there are two settings that can be set in the bill of material for a
component. In the details of the component, under the MRP section, users can
use the explosion type or special procurement. The explosion type can switch the
phantom assembly off for this BOM, and it will create a planned order for the item.
This overrides the material master setting. Setting the special procurement key in
the BOM to phantom assembly means that when this item is used in a the relevant
BOM, it will be treated as a phantom. The settings in the BOM have priority over
the material master since they are specific to a usage or manufacturing process.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
325
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
326
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Phantom Assemblies
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Explain the concept of a phantom BOM and when it should be used
•
Create a phantom BOM in SAP R/3
•
Maintain phantom bills of material
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
327
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Lesson:
279
TSCM40_I
Co-Products and By-Products
Lesson Duration: 15 Minutes
Lesson Overview
To model the manufacturing of multiple co-products, companies must consider the
list of all BOM components that are necessary to effectively manage the yields
and competing resources.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Demonstrate model co-products and by-products
Define and discuss the co-products and by-products. Explain the differences
between them and how to make the appropriate settings.
Business Example
During the machining of the casing for your pump, brass shavings are produced.
These brass shavings are then sold back to the refiner who sold your company
the brass ingot that was used in forging the casing. As a production planner
your costing accounting group has asked you to model the brass shavings as a
co-product in order to get the proper credit to manufacturing for the sale of the
brass shavings. In addition to the brass, oil is used to cool the cutting blades during
the machining process. The oil is collected and inventoried for proper disposal.
This process is regulated by the government and has not value. Model the oil
used for each casing as a by-product.
Co-Products in Manufacturing
A co-product is a material that is manufactured simultaneously with the main
product. In certain cases, the main material cannot be manufactured in isolation,
without also producing the co-product, for a given production process.
328
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Co-Products and By-Products
Figure 107: Manufacture of Co-Products
Use in ECC PP-PI Module: The process industry is full of numerous examples,
where due to the nature of the chemical and biological reactions, there is a
concurrent yield for multiple products. Typically there is one main product being
manufactured. The rest of the products could be categorized as co-products,
by-products, waste products. Co-products and by-products have a non-zero
inventory valuation, as opposed to waste products having a zero unit cost.
Furthermore, since the co-products label is given to products that have a higher
cost visibility, then any other generic by-product in your company, the co-products
are also earmarked for cost settlement at the end of the process order life cycle.
Figure 108: Co-Products in the BOM
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
329
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Main Leading Material and Co-Product - Structure: Co-products, by-products,
and waste products are set up as a negative quantity components in the BOM
of the Master Recipe. Since co-products have further cost settlements, a series
of indicators have to be setup in the product masters and the BOM. All of the
product masters, and the negative quantity components must have the co-product
indicator fields check marked. Also the cost apportionment ratios for all of the
cost components that are involved with the co-products, have to be defined in
their product masters.
To better understand Co-products we first must understand several related terms.
All of these terms are used frequently in the Food, Chemicals, Electronics, and
other process, repetitive and flow manufacturing industries.
Co-product
In ECC a co-product is a material that is manufactured simultaneously with
the main product. The main material cannot be manufactured in isolation,
without also producing the co-product, for a given production process.
Co-products have a non-zero inventory valuation. Co-products are also
earmarked for cost settlement at the end of the process order life cycle, and
appear in the header settlement rule.
By-product
In ECC a by-product is a material that is manufactured simultaneously with
the main product. The main material cannot be manufactured in isolation,
without also producing the by-product, for a given production process.
By-products have a non-zero inventory valuation. By-products are not
earmarked for cost settlement at the end of the process order life cycle, and
do not appear in the header settlement rule.
Waste product
In ECC a waste product is a material that is manufactured simultaneously
with the main product. The main material cannot be manufactured in
isolation, without also producing the waste product, for a given production
process. Waste products have a zero inventory valuation. Waste products are
not earmarked for cost settlement at the end of the process order life cycle,
and just like by-products, do not appear in the header settlement rule.
330
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
283
Lesson: Co-Products and By-Products
Exercise 13: Co-Products in Production
Orders
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Explain how to set up co-products in SAP ERP
Business Example
The stamping and assembly operations of the pump yields two additional gaskets
which are not needed for the pump, but they have value. You need to put them
into inventory.
Task 1: Define co-products on the BOM
Caution: It is important not to skip this demo as it sets up the component
T-DET-CNDST to be used as a co-product on the BOM. If this isn’t done
then the student exercises will not work.
Setup the Material Master for T-DET-CNDST to be used as a co-product. Change
the MRP2 view by flagging the co-product indicator. and answer the following
questions.
Change the MRP2 view of the Material Master T-DET-CNDST, plant 3100, by
flagging the co-product indicator.
Menu Path:Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Material
Master→ Material → Change → Immediately. Enter Material, T-DET-CNDST.
Press Enter.
You will see the Select Views pop-up. Select the MRP2 view
and Press Enter. Enter Plant 3100. Press Enter again.
Select the Co-product indicator, and press the Save icon.
1.
Define material T-G##, plant 1000 as a co-product on the BOM of pump
T-F1##.
Task 2: Optional: Test the co-product setting
1.
2010
Create a production order for T-F1##. View the co-product results in the
stock requirements list.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
331
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 13: Co-Products in Production
Orders
Task 1: Define co-products on the BOM
Caution: It is important not to skip this demo as it sets up the component
T-DET-CNDST to be used as a co-product on the BOM. If this isn’t done
then the student exercises will not work.
Setup the Material Master for T-DET-CNDST to be used as a co-product. Change
the MRP2 view by flagging the co-product indicator. and answer the following
questions.
Change the MRP2 view of the Material Master T-DET-CNDST, plant 3100, by
flagging the co-product indicator.
Menu Path:Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Material
Master→ Material → Change → Immediately. Enter Material, T-DET-CNDST.
Press Enter.
You will see the Select Views pop-up. Select the MRP2 view
and Press Enter. Enter Plant 3100. Press Enter again.
Select the Co-product indicator, and press the Save icon.
1.
Define material T-G##, plant 1000 as a co-product on the BOM of pump
T-F1##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Change.
b)
Enter the following data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-F1##
Plant
1000
BOM Usage
1
c)
Choose Enter
.
d)
Enter the following in the first available component item on the General
Item Overview screen.
Field
Entry
Component
T-G##
Continued on next page
332
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Co-Products and By-Products
Field
Entry
Quantity
2-
e)
Choose Enter
.
f)
Go to the item details by double-clicking the item number or
highlighting the line and selecting the item icon (or pressing F7).
g)
On the Basic Data tab, select the Co-product indicator.
h)
Save the BOM.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
333
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 2: Optional: Test the co-product setting
1.
Create a production order for T-F1##. View the co-product results in the
stock requirements list.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order →
Create → With Material (CO01).
b)
Enter the following data and press ENTER.
c)
Field
Entry
Material
T-F1##
Plant
1000
Order Type
PP01
Enter only the following two items and choose Save.
Field
Entry
Total Qty
10
Finish
Current date + 1 month
Hint: If a message regarding costs is displayed; choose Yes to
continue and save the order.
334
d)
Choose Logistics → Production → MRP → Evaluations →
Stock/Requirements List.
e)
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-G##
MRP Area
<blank>
Plant
1000
f)
Choose Enter
.
g)
A production order has been created for the co-product to be received
into inventory. The quantity has been calculated based on the BOM
quantity.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Co-Products and By-Products
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate model co-products and by-products
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
335
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Lesson:
287
TSCM40_I
Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of
Material
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
BOMs are seldom static. Component materials are replaced by other items.
Certain components may also be substituted if the need arises. In this lesson, we
will introduce discontinuation and alternative items as methods to manage such
situations.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Demonstrate and explain the discontinuation process.
Model item substitutions in the bill of material
Business Example
In the manufacturing of several of your products, you use an extensive amount of
wiring. The wiring is inventoried as several different part numbers, based on the
grade of wire. In the event of an inventory shortage, engineering has authorized
the use of higher grade wire in place of the standard item. As a production
planner, you need to model this to assure that production orders can be completed
when released to the shop floor. You want to model this substitution process in
your bill of material.
336
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
Item Substitution in the Bill of Material
The engineering and design department may specify that a material is to be
replaced by another at a particular point in time. These changes may be necessary
for the following reasons:
•
•
New safety regulations may apply after a certain point in time. As a result,
a certain component may have to be replaced, as it no longer meets the
safety requirements.
A cost-intensive part may be replaced by a less expensive one.
Discontinuation control works in the same way for long-term master production
and requirements planning.
Figure 109: Discontinuation Control (Simple Discontinuation)
Discontinuation Control (Simple Discontinuation)
Discontinuation control (Parallel Discontinuation)
Show only the places relevant for maintenance in material master and BOM.
Explain the effects of the maintenance.
Simple Discontinuation: A component that is to be discontinued is replaced by
a follow-up material as of a certain date, as soon as the stock available for MRP
of the discontinued component is zero. This means that when the stock available
for MRP of the discontinued material is zero, the dependent requirements are
diverted from the discontinued material to the follow-up material. If the follow-up
material is not available for MRP, the follow-up material is then acquired (in place
of the discontinued material). The safety stock of the discontinued material is
not affected by requirements planning.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
337
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
If the stock available for MRP for the discontinued material becomes greater
than zero again, due to a later order for instance, the material is used again. An
exception message for goods deliveries subsequent to the discontinued date is
also produced.
Prerequisites: In the material master record of the discontinued component,
the discontinued indicator is set to 1, a follow-up material is entered, and a
discontinued date is set. For information purposes, the follow-up material can be
maintained in the BOM as a follow-up material.
Figure 110: Discontinuation Control (Parallel Discontinuation)
Parallel discontinuation: One group of materials is replaced by another group
of materials, for instance, where one (main) component is discontinued and
its available stock is zero, and another (dependent) component must also be
discontinued. For example, a certain nut may be discontinued, meaning the
corresponding screw is also discontinued.
Prerequisites:
•
•
338
In the material master record of the main discontinued component, the
discontinued indicator is set to 1 and the follow-up indicator 3 appears in the
material master record of the dependent discontinued component.
In the extras for the BOM item, define a discontinuation group under
follow-up/discontinued dates; this freely definable character string contains
a summary of the associated, discontinued items of a BOM. The main
component to be discontinued and its dependent component are identified
using the same discontinuation group.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
•
You can also define the follow-up component(s) using the follow-up item
indicator. The succeeding group contains a summary of the associated
follow-up items in a BOM; it determines by which follow-up items the
discontinued items are to be replaced. The character string of the succeeding
group must correspond with the character string of the discontinued group.
Figure 111: Alternative Items
Alternative Items
Alternative Item Data Detail Screen
If there is sufficient time, demonstrate this using the relevant optional exercise. It
is unlikely that there will be time for this however.
Alternative Items: Grouping
This serves to summarize alternative items within an item list. All assembly
materials can be entered into the alternative item group. As soon as you create an
alternative item group, you will receive an additional dialog window containing
the ranking order, strategy, and probability of usage. You can maintain alternative
items for the following situations:
•
Alternative items with specified usage probability
These alternative items incorporate a certain usage probability. Create a
usage probability for each alternative item in a group, so that in requirements
planning a dependent requirement is created and this is changed to a
reservation in the production order.
•
2010
Alternative items as information
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
339
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
You can also create an alternative item for information purposes, for instance,
that is only referenced in missing part situations. As neither a dependent
requirement nor a reservation will occur for this item, you do not produce a
usage probability.
Figure 112: Alternative Item Data Detail Screen
•
Backflush according to usage probability
For all items that are to be reserved, maintain the:
•
–
Strategy (value 1 or no entry)
–
Ranking order (only affects the sorting of materials)
–
Usage probability
Backflush at 100% availability
For all items that are to be reserved, maintain the
–
•
Ranking order; if no ranking order is entered, the system checks the
items in the order in which they are transferred for availability check
(value 1 or no entry)
–
Strategy (value 2)
–
Usage probability
Backflush at 100% availability (strategy 2)
With this strategy, the availability check is executed in the specified ranking
order according to ATP logic.
Gross requirements: 100 pieces
340
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
•
•
•
2010
Material
Usage
Probability
Ranking
Planned
Requirement
Amount
ATP
Quantity:
Backflush
quantity
A
20
1
20
30
0
B
30
2
30
150
100
C
50
3
50
180
0
The first material in the ranking order that meets the requirement date 100%
is reserved in the required quantity (material B).
Once a partial backflush has occurred for a production order, no further
check takes place for further partial flushes with this production order. Any
future partial backflushes take place from the alternative item from which
the first backflush occurred.
If, with strategy 2, none of the alternative items meet the requirements 100%,
the availability check confirms each available quantity. A reservation is
then made for the available quantity.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
341
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
342
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
293
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
Exercise 14: Substitute Items in
Production Orders
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Enter alternative items on a BOM
Business Example
Certain materials must be used as a substitute in case the standard material is
not available.
Task 1:
Optional: Components T-B1## and T-Z## are interchangeable parts that can both
be used to produce the finished material T-F1##. In this situation we want to
choose the component that has enough inventory to supply the entire production
order. Create T-B1## and T-Z## as alternative items in the BOM T-F1##.
1.
Use the stock/requirements list to display the current stock available for the
following materials:
T-B1##
T-B2##
T-B3##
T-B4##
T-T3##
T-Z##
Change the stock for the above materials in plant 1000 at storage location
0001 to the following status:
T-B1##
100 pieces (exact)
T-B2##
200 pieces (minimum)
T-B3##
200 pieces (minimum)
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
343
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
T-B4##
200 pieces (minimum)
T-T3##
1800 pieces (minimum)
T-Z##
200 pieces (minimum)
Change the BOM of material T-F1## by adding the new component T-Z##
as an alternative item to T-B1##. For item T-B1##, enter Alt.item group 01,
Priority 1, Strategy 2, and Usage probability 100. For item T-Z##, enter
Alt.item group 01, Priority 2, Strategy 2, and Usage probability 0.
Task 2:
Optional: Using a production order, test the effects of the alternative item(s).
1.
Test the effects of the alternative item group on production planning and
material backflush.
Create a production order for the material T-F1## in plant 1000 for LESS
THAN 100 pieces. Use the order category PP01. Select one month from
today’s date as the order finish date. After confirming the data entries with
ENTER, go to the component overview to find the answers to the following
questions:
ATP Check Status
Before
ATP
After
ATP
How high is the quantity requirement of T-B1##?
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-B1##?
How high is the quantity requirement of T-Z##?
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-Z##?
Caution: Do not save the order yet.
2.
Carry out an availability check for all components and complete the last
column in the above table for the “After ATP Check” results.
When finished, exit and do not save the order.
3.
Repeat the last two steps to test the effect of the alternative item groups in
the case of insufficient stock.
Create a production order for the material T-F1## in plant 1000 for MORE
THAN 100 pieces. Use the order category PP01. Select one month from
today’s date as the order finish date. After confirming your data entries
with ENTER, go to the Component overview to find the answers to the
following questions:
Continued on next page
344
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
Caution: Do not save the order at this point.
ATP Check Status
Before
ATP
After
ATP
How high is the quantity requirement of T-B1##?
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-B1##?
How high is the quantity requirement of T-Z##?
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-Z##?
4.
2010
Carry out an availability check for all components and complete the above
table as you did before.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
345
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 14: Substitute Items in
Production Orders
Task 1:
Optional: Components T-B1## and T-Z## are interchangeable parts that can both
be used to produce the finished material T-F1##. In this situation we want to
choose the component that has enough inventory to supply the entire production
order. Create T-B1## and T-Z## as alternative items in the BOM T-F1##.
1.
Use the stock/requirements list to display the current stock available for the
following materials:
T-B1##
T-B2##
T-B3##
T-B4##
T-T3##
T-Z##
Change the stock for the above materials in plant 1000 at storage location
0001 to the following status:
T-B1##
100 pieces (exact)
T-B2##
200 pieces (minimum)
T-B3##
200 pieces (minimum)
Continued on next page
346
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
T-B4##
200 pieces (minimum)
T-T3##
1800 pieces (minimum)
T-Z##
200 pieces (minimum)
a)
For analysis of current requirements/stock situation, choose Logistics
→ Production → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List
or use transaction MD04.
Stock is displayed in the top line.
b)
For any necessary deliveries of goods, choose Logistics → Materials
Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods
Receipt → Other or use transaction MB1C.
c)
Enter movement type 561, plant 1000, storage location 0001,
today’s date as document and Posting Date, and leave the other
fields empty or enter default differences.
d)
For any necessary issues of goods (in case a material has too much
stock) choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Issue or use transaction
MB1A.
e)
Use the movement category 201 and the cost center 1000.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
347
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
Change the BOM of material T-F1## by adding the new component T-Z##
as an alternative item to T-B1##. For item T-B1##, enter Alt.item group 01,
Priority 1, Strategy 2, and Usage probability 100. For item T-Z##, enter
Alt.item group 01, Priority 2, Strategy 2, and Usage probability 0.
a)
Choose Logistics -> Production -> Master Data -> Bills of Material
-> Bill of Material -> Material BOM -> Change or use transaction
code CS02.
b)
In the first available row, enter item T-Z## with the quantity 1
piece.
c)
To set the items as alternative items, select both components on the
General Item Overview screen and select Details .
d)
In the details for component T-B1##, enter AltItemGroup 01 and
press ENTER.
e)
Enter the following in the Alternative Item Data dialog box.
Field
Entry
Priority
1
Strategy
2
Usage Prob.
100
f)
Press ENTER and choose Next Item
component T-Z##.
to proceed to the details for
g)
In the details for component T-Z##, enter AltItemGroup 01 and press
ENTER.
h)
Enter the following in the Alternative Item Data dialog box.
Field
Entry
Priority
2
Strategy
2
Usage Prob.
0
i)
Press ENTER. Work through any warnings that appear by pressing
ENTER.
j)
Save the BOM.
Continued on next page
348
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
Task 2:
Optional: Using a production order, test the effects of the alternative item(s).
1.
Test the effects of the alternative item group on production planning and
material backflush.
Create a production order for the material T-F1## in plant 1000 for LESS
THAN 100 pieces. Use the order category PP01. Select one month from
today’s date as the order finish date. After confirming the data entries with
ENTER, go to the component overview to find the answers to the following
questions:
ATP Check Status
Before
ATP
After
ATP
How high is the quantity requirement of T-B1##? varies
varies
(ALL)
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-B1##?
0
varies
(ALL)
How high is the quantity requirement of T-Z##?
1
0
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-Z##?
0
0
Caution: Do not save the order yet.
a)
To create a production order, choose Logistics → Production→
Production Control→ Order→ Create→ With Material or use
transaction code CO01.
b)
Enter the material number, plant, and order type on the initial screen
and press ENTER.
c)
On the next screen, enter the total quantity and the order finish date of
today + 1 month and press ENTER.
d)
Go to the Components overview using the
above table.
button. Complete the
Caution: Do not save the order at this point.
2.
Carry out an availability check for all components and complete the last
column in the above table for the “After ATP Check” results.
When finished, exit and do not save the order.
a)
Choose Availability Check for material.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
349
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
3.
TSCM40_I
Repeat the last two steps to test the effect of the alternative item groups in
the case of insufficient stock.
Create a production order for the material T-F1## in plant 1000 for MORE
THAN 100 pieces. Use the order category PP01. Select one month from
today’s date as the order finish date. After confirming your data entries
with ENTER, go to the Component overview to find the answers to the
following questions:
Caution: Do not save the order at this point.
ATP Check Status
Before
ATP
After
ATP
How high is the quantity requirement of T-B1##? varies
0
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-B1##?
0
0
How high is the quantity requirement of T-Z##?
1
varies
(ALL)
How high is the confirmed quantity of T-Z##?
0
varies
(ALL)
a)
4.
Carry out an availability check for all components and complete the above
table as you did before.
a)
350
Exit without saving the order.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Discontinuation and Substitute Parts in the Bill of Material
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate and explain the discontinuation process.
•
Model item substitutions in the bill of material
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
351
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Lesson:
302
TSCM40_I
Multiple and Variant BOMS
Lesson Duration: 40 Minutes
Lesson Overview
Variant and multiple bills of material are a method to manage BOMs. We will
discuss the circumstances and advantages of each.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Discuss the advantages of using multiple and variant BOMs
Create a multiple BOM
Create a variant BOM
Define variant configuration
The objective is to teach the multiple and variant concepts. Many students get
confused with “variant BOM’s” and Variant Configuration. For this reason it is
necessary to define variant configuration.
Details of variant configuration should be avoided. Definition only.
Business Example
Two situations many occur that may increase the number of BOMs that need to
be managed. First, a single material may have more then one list of components.
We will use multiple BOMs to manage these. Second, many materials may use
similar components. We will use variant BOMs for these.
Multiple BOM - One Product
Multiple BOM “M”
Explain the meaning of multiple BOM.
Explain when the multiple (alternative) BOM is used.
Note: A maximum of 1000 alternatives are possible.
Demonstration for multiple BOMs 10 minutes
Use the exercise for the multiple BOM for your demonstration.
Assign a name to the alternatives in the alternative text.
For example: "Alternative + Material number + Maximum lot size"
. Enter a description for the BOM group,
for instance: Alternatives or Paints
Show the differences and similarities when compared to variant BOMs.
352
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Comparison of Different Types of BOM
Summarize the features of and differences between the individual technical BOM
types.
Optional exercise on multiple BOMs only 15 minutes
Multiple BOMs
One product may be made of different combinations of components, depending on
the quantity (lot size) to be manufactured or the date. This type of product is often
represented by alternative BOMs (alternatives). These alternative BOMs differ
only slightly from one another, usually in terms of the component quantity.
Figure 113: Multiple BOM: One Product
The field BOM group can also be used as an external BOM number.
All alternatives for a multiple BOM are saved under one internal BOM number.
You can assign one name to all the alternatives in a multiple BOM by entering a
BOM group in the BOM header.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
353
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 114: Multiple BOM
The plant and usage are part of the unique key that identifies a BOM.
Each alternative has a BOM header.
The alternative is selected according to the selection method indicator in the
material master record:
•
•
•
Lot size
Date
Production version
Variant BOM: Several Products
Point out that the different products should only differ slightly from each other.
Variant BOM
Variant BOM “V”
Present the variant BOM and its purpose.
Demonstration for Variant BOM 10 minutes
Create a variant T-F88 for BOM T-F00.
Point out the BOM number and the technical type.
Enter the additional value "PLM110" for the BOM in the BOM header for the
BOM group, and change item 10 to material 100-100.
In the alternative text field, enter "Variant Material Number". Show the BOM
headers / alternative texts and material items.
Alternatively you can use the exercise from the topic "Variant BOM" as an
example.
Note: A maximum of 99 variants are possible for each internal BOM.
354
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Variant BOMs
If several similar products are manufactured whose parts only differ in minor
ways, you can represent these various products using a variant BOM. Variants
can also differ in component quantity alone.
Figure 115: Variant BOM: Several Products
Only a simple (basic) material BOM can be extended to become a variant BOM.
You cannot convert a multiple BOM into a variant BOM.
Figure 116: Variant BOM
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
355
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
You can create a variant only if:
•
•
A BOM does not already exist for the material.
The base unit of measure of all variant materials is the same. This is because
the base unit of measure of the bill of material must be the same as the base
unit of measure of the material master record.
Figure 117: Variant BOM (2)
Several products created as variants of a variant BOM are saved under one internal
BOM number. You can give a name to all of the variants of a variant BOM by
entering a BOM group in the BOM header. Each variant has its own material
number.
The field BOM group can also be used as an external BOM number.
The plant and the BOM usage are part of the unique key of a bill of material.
Each variant has a BOM header.
You can create a variant only if:
•
•
356
A BOM does not already exist for the material.
The base unit of measure of all variant materials is the same. This is because
the base unit of measure of the bill of material must be the same as the base
unit of measure of the material master record.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Figure 118: Different Types of BOMs
Variant Configuration
Configuration of a Pump
Explain what variant configuration means and when this should be used. Explain
how this differs to variant BOMs. If there is time, you can show the configuration
of pump P-500 for example.
Variant Configuration
When dealing with multivariant products, the combinations of individual product
features give rise to a vast range of variants.
Complex products mean complex configuration tasks in both sales and production.
A company that sells or produces products with variants must perform these
configuration tasks quickly and accurately.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
357
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 119: Variant Configuration
However, this is not easy, as product development cycles and life cycles of
products are becoming shorter than ever before.
Standard product is a general term used to define a product that is to be
manufactured in multiple variants. It covers all the possible features of the variant
product, and therefore does not refer to one specific article.
The features of configurable products are defined the SAP system as
characteristics.
Figure 120: Configuration of a Pump
358
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
There are often inter-dependencies between the individual forms of a product. It
is frequently the case that not all combinations that are theoretically possible are
allowed. There are two reasons for this:
•
•
Some combinations are not possible for technical reasons.
Other combinations may not be allowed for marketing and sales reasons. For
example, if you want to order a motorcycle, you may only be able to have
certain colors of paint and seats if you are ordering an expensive model.
Instead of creating a separate BOM for each product variant, you can group the
components together into a super BOM. This super BOM consists of parts that
appear in all variants of the product, and others that can be chosen and included
in the product depending on the variant. You use object dependencies to define
which components are selected under which conditions.
In the sales order, an individual product structure is created dynamically.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
359
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
360
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
309
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Exercise 15: Multiple/Alternative Bills of
Material
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Maintain an alternative/multiple BOM
Business Example
You need to group together bills of material for “blue paint” in a multiple BOM.
Task: Maintaining Alternative/Multiple BOMs
The BOM for “blue paint” (material number T-F77## (## = group number) has
different components or component quantities for different lot sizes.
1.
Create a BOM for the paint in plant 1000 with the following data:
Material T-F77##, BOM group Color-##, and BOM text ‘multiple BOM
group ##’.
2.
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B71
0,5
kg
20
L
T-B74
1
kg
30
L
T-B75
1
kg
Create an alternative by copying alternative 1. In this alternative, replace
item 10, component T-B71, with the item below and change the quantity
of item 20:
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B72
0.3
kg
Change the quantity of component T-B74 in item 20 to 1.4 kg.
3.
Create another alternative by copying alternative 1. In this alternative,
replace item 10, component T-B71, with the following:
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B73
0.3
kg
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
361
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
4.
5.
TSCM40_I
Add the following data to the BOM headers of the alternatives:
Alternative
Alt text
Lot size
from
to
1
Paint Color 1
1
100
2
Paint Color 2
101
200
3
Paint Color 3
201
500
Display all alternatives of T-F77## (BOM group Paint-##).
Check your entries. Pay particular attention to the following:
BOM group ____________
Internal BOM number ____________
Technical type ____________
6.
Optional: Create a production order with the material T-F77## and test the
effects of the different BOM alternatives with your lot sizes.
The production order should be for plant 1000, order type PP01, for
more than 125 pieces and for 2 months from today. Since there is no
working schedule, let the system create an operation. Without changing
the production order, check which BOM alternative has been associated.
Why was this used?
Alternative ____ because ______________________________
Change the order quantity to 225 pieces and update the PP master data. Why
this alternative?
Alternative ____ because ______________________________
7.
Optional: Maintain a multiple BOM for the different alternatives.
Select of alternatives according to date.
Example:
362
Material
Plant
BOM
usage
Valid from
BOM Alt
T-F77##
1000
1
01/01/xxxx
1
T-F77##
1000
1
01/07/xxxx
2
T-F77##
1000
1
01/12/xxxx
3
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Solution 15: Multiple/Alternative Bills of
Material
Task: Maintaining Alternative/Multiple BOMs
The BOM for “blue paint” (material number T-F77## (## = group number) has
different components or component quantities for different lot sizes.
1.
Create a BOM for the paint in plant 1000 with the following data:
Material T-F77##, BOM group Color-##, and BOM text ‘multiple BOM
group ##’.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
363
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B71
0,5
kg
20
L
T-B74
1
kg
30
L
T-B75
1
kg
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create: .
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-F77##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
c)
Choose Enter
.
d)
On the Item overview screen, enter the following data:
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
10
L
T-B71
0.5
20
L
T-B74
1
30
L
T-B75
1
e)
Give the BOM group a name:Paint-##.
f)
Go to the BOM Header
g)
In the BOM Group field, enter PAINT-##.
h)
Save the BOM.
.
Create an alternative by copying alternative 1. In this alternative, replace
item 10, component T-B71, with the item below and change the quantity
of item 20:
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B72
0.3
kg
Continued on next page
364
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Change the quantity of component T-B74 in item 20 to 1.4 kg.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create:
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
Entry
Material
T-F77##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
c)
Select copy from
d)
Confirm the warning “Alternative 2 added to BOM.”
e)
Enter alternative 1 in the dialog box and choose Enter.
f)
Select all of the components to copy and choose Copy
g)
Change the following two rows in the item overview:
h)
3.
Field
or press F7.
again.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
10
L
T-B72
0.3 kg
20
L
T-B74
1.4 kg
Save the BOM
Create another alternative by copying alternative 1. In this alternative,
replace item 10, component T-B71, with the following:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
365
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Item
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
Un
10
L
T-B73
0.3
kg
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create:
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-F77##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
c)
Select copy from
d)
Confirm the warning “Alternative 3 added to BOM.”
e)
Enter Alternative 1 in the dialog box and choose Enter.
f)
Select all of the components to copy and choose Copy
g)
Change the following in the item overview:
h)
4.
TSCM40_I
or choose F7.
again.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
10
L
T-B73
0.3 kg
Save the BOM
Add the following data to the BOM headers of the alternatives:
Continued on next page
366
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
5.
Alternative
Alt text
Lot size
from
to
1
Paint Color 1
1
100
2
Paint Color 2
101
200
3
Paint Color 3
201
500
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Change:
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
Field
Entry
Material
T-F77##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
c)
Select alternative 1 and select the Header icon
.
d)
On the Quantities/Long text tab page, (F6) add the following: Alt text.
Paint Color 1 and lot size from 1 to 100.
e)
Repeat steps for alternatives 2 and 3.
Display all alternatives of T-F77## (BOM group Paint-##).
Check your entries. Pay particular attention to the following:
BOM group ____________
Internal BOM number ____________
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
367
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Technical type ____________
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → BOM Group → Display:
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
c)
Field
Entry
BOM group
Paint-##
Plant
1000
Usage
1
Valid from
Today’s date
Choose Goto → Alternative overview. Three alternatives should now
be displayed. Select all alternatives and choose the Header icon .
Hint: Switch between the three different alternatives using
the Next alternative icon
d)
.
BOM number, usage 1 and technical type M should be the same in
all alternatives.
Alternative texts and lot sizes should be different for each alternative
(see defaults).
6.
Optional: Create a production order with the material T-F77## and test the
effects of the different BOM alternatives with your lot sizes.
The production order should be for plant 1000, order type PP01, for
more than 125 pieces and for 2 months from today. Since there is no
working schedule, let the system create an operation. Without changing
the production order, check which BOM alternative has been associated.
Why was this used?
Alternative ____ because ______________________________
Change the order quantity to 225 pieces and update the PP master data. Why
this alternative?
Continued on next page
368
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Alternative ____ because ______________________________
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order →
Create → with material.
b)
Enter the data from the table below.
c)
d)
Field
Entry
Material
T-F77##
Production plant
1000
Order type
PP01
Choose Enter. Enter the following data.
Total quantity
125
Order finish date
2 months from today
Choose Enter.
Ignore the message “ no working schedule found .”
7.
e)
Choose generate process.
f)
On the Master data tab page, enter BOM Alt.
quantity).
g)
Now change quantity to 225 pieces. Choose Functions → Read PP
master data → Read BOM only. Enter BOM Alt. 3 (because of
quantity).
h)
Exit the order without saving.
2 (because of
Optional: Maintain a multiple BOM for the different alternatives.
Select of alternatives according to date.
Example:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
369
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
370
TSCM40_I
Material
Plant
BOM
usage
Valid from
BOM Alt
T-F77##
1000
1
01/01/xxxx
1
T-F77##
1000
1
01/07/xxxx
2
T-F77##
1000
1
01/12/xxxx
3
a)
In the IMG, transaction code SPROchoose Production → Basic Data
→ Bill of Material → Alternative Determination → Define Alternative
Determination for Multiple BOMs. or use transaction code OS32.
b)
Maintain data as described in the table and Save.
c)
Change the Selection Method indicator in the Material Master by
choosing Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master
→Material → Change → Immediately or use transaction code MM02.
d)
Enter T-F77##, choose the MRP 4 View, and enter plant 1000.
e)
Set the Selection Method indicator to 1 Selection by Explosion Date
and save.
f)
Test by creating a production order with different dates and check with
alternative BOM was used as in the previous exercise.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
319
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Exercise 16: Variant BOMs
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Maintain a variant BOM
Business Example
The engineering department requires BOMs to efficiently maintain simple but
similar materials.
Task:
You now want to create two additional variants of the pump T-F## in plant 1000
with where-used list 1.
These are pumps T-FY## and T-FZ##.
1.
Create a BOM for pump T-FY## as a variant of T-F##. Replace component
T-B## with T-B1##. Enter the following header data.
BOM text
“Standard pump”
Alternative Text
Y variant and Z variant
BOM group
VA##
2.
Create a BOM for pump T-FZ## as a variant of T-F##. Replace component
100-300 with T-BZ##.
3.
Display all variants of T-F## (BOM group VA##).
Check your entries are correct. Check in particular:
4.
2010
BOM group
_______________
Internal BOM number
_______________
Technical type
_______________
Enter BOM item 100-801 in BOM group maintenance (any quantity you
choose), which is only valid for variants T-FY## and T-FZ##. Check the
result.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
371
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 16: Variant BOMs
Task:
You now want to create two additional variants of the pump T-F## in plant 1000
with where-used list 1.
These are pumps T-FY## and T-FZ##.
1.
Create a BOM for pump T-FY## as a variant of T-F##. Replace component
T-B## with T-B1##. Enter the following header data.
BOM text
“Standard pump”
Alternative Text
Y variant and Z variant
BOM group
VA##
a)
Create an additional variant for pump T-FY##.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create .
b)
Enter the data below.
Material
T-FY##
Plant
1000
(Default)
Usage
1
(Default)
Valid from
Today’s date
(Default)
do not press
<Enter>
c)
Choose Create variant of.... button .
d)
Enter Material T-F## in the Create variant of... dialog box.
Choose Enter
.
e)
Select all components to be copied and choose the Copy icon
f)
Enter header data from the table below:
BOM group
VA##
BOM text
Standard pump
.
Continued on next page
372
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Alt text
Y variant
Confirm with Enter.
g)
h)
2.
In the Item Overview, change the component below:
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
10
L
100-100
1
Save the BOM.
Create a BOM for pump T-FZ## as a variant of T-F##. Replace component
100-300 with T-BZ##.
a)
Create additional variant for pump T-FZ##.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create .
b)
c)
Enter the following data.
Material
T-FZ##
Plant
1000
(Default)
Where-used list
1
(Default)
Valid from
Today’s date
(Default)
do not press
<Enter>
Choose Create variant of.... button.
Enter Material T-F## in the Create variant of... dialog box.
d)
Choose Enter
e)
Select all components to be copied and choose the Copy icon
f)
In the Item Overview, change the component below:
g)
3.
.
.
Item no.
Item cat.
Component
Quantity
30
L
T-BZ##
1
Save the BOM.
Display all variants of T-F## (BOM group VA##).
Check your entries are correct. Check in particular:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
373
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
BOM group
_______________
Internal BOM number
_______________
Technical type
_______________
a)
Display your BOM group.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → BOM Group → Display.
b)
Enter the following data.
BOM group
VA##
Plant
1000
Valid From
Today’s date
Choose Enter.
c)
Select Variants button.
d)
Select all variants and choose the Header button
.
BOM number, usage 1, and technical type V exist only once.
Hint: In the header, choose : Item. You can then move between
the individual variants using the Previous Variants and Next
Variants buttons.
In the summarized BOM, choose Variant items to view selected
items.
4.
Enter BOM item 100-801 in BOM group maintenance (any quantity you
choose), which is only valid for variants T-FY## and T-FZ##. Check the
result.
a)
Change your BOM group.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → BOM Group → Change.
374
b)
Enter BOM Group VA## and press ENTER.
c)
Enter component material 100-801 and a quantity in the first available
component item, and set the Item indicator in alternative/variant 02 and
03 for variants T-FY## and T-FZ##.
d)
Save the BOM.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Multiple and Variant BOMS
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Discuss the advantages of using multiple and variant BOMs
•
Create a multiple BOM
•
Create a variant BOM
•
Define variant configuration
Related Information
Variant configuration is taught in the following SAP courses:
•
•
•
•
•
2010
PLM130 Classification
PLM140 Variant Configuration 1 – Modeling
PLM143 Variant Configuration 2 – Integration
WNAP45 Variant Configuration 1 & 2 - Modeling and Integration
PLM146 Variant Configuration 3 – Scenarios
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
375
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
Lesson:
324
TSCM40_I
Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, we will discuss mass changes and the product structure browser in
bills of material.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Update BOMs using mass changes
Navigate the product structure browser
Mass changes with BOMs
Explain and show the mass function options:
1. Mass replacement, for example, assembly T-B00 replaced by 100-100,
2. Mass insertion of new item and so on.
Product Structure Browser
Explain the function of the product structure browser.
Show examples:
Changing a BOM, item, material.
Demonstration for Product Structure slide 10 minutes
Show the functionality using examples T-F00 or P-100.
Business Example
A component material is used on many BOMs and must be replaced.
All the objects in a structure have to be displayed, processed, or created.
Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
You can use the mass change function to make changes to items in several BOMs
using only one function call.
376
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
Figure 121: Mass Change in BOMs
The following item changes are supported for material items, document items,
and class items:
•
•
•
•
Changing the component quantity
Changing the item data
Adding of items
Replacing an item
•
–
In all selected BOMs
–
With assignment of a new item quantity if necessary
–
Using Engineering Change Management if necessary
–
With restrictive selection criteria such as plant and/or usage
Deleting an item
–
–
–
2010
In all selected BOMs
Using Engineering Change Management if necessary
With restrictive selection criteria, such as plant and/or usage
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
377
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 122: Product Structure
The product structure enables you to display and process all functionally related
objects (such as material, BOM, document, and routing). The product data is
displayed in a tree structure. You can restrict the display to only the detail data
required for the current processing situation.
You can explode the product structure across different systems. Data can be
evaluated and processed either locally or in multiple systems (Application Link
Enabling [ALE] destinations).
You can:
•
•
•
•
•
378
Go directly to display mode or processing mode for individual objects
Display or process similar objects
Create an additional tree structure for any object
Select several objects for object management records in Engineering Change
Management
Jump to the engineering workbench
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
327
Lesson: Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
Exercise 17: Mass Changes and the
Product Structure Browser
Exercise Duration: 10 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Analyze and navigate your product structure
Business Example
The design engineer wants an overview of all existing objects for his pump in
order to process them as and when required.
Task:
Navigate the Product Structure Browser
1.
Take a look at the product structure for material T-F##.
Display the BOM and open a document info record.
Display the BOM for the assembly.
2.
Change item 0010 for BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
Double the required quantity for component 0010.
3.
Go to the classification and display the characteristics for your pump.
Pump height: ____________
Pump capacity: ____________
Usage: ____________
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
379
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 17: Mass Changes and the
Product Structure Browser
Task:
Navigate the Product Structure Browser
1.
Take a look at the product structure for material T-F##.
Display the BOM and open a document info record.
Display the BOM for the assembly.
a)
Open the product structure browser
Choose Cross-Application Components → Engineering Change
Management → Environment → Product Structure or Logistics
→ Central Functions → Engineering → Engineering Change
Management → Environment → Product Structure.
b)
Enter the material T-F## on the Material tab page and choose Enter
.
c)
Expand the tree structures for bills of material and documents by
clicking on the hierarchy node.
d)
Double-click on the symbols for bill of material or document to display
the corresponding master record. You can also click on the eyeglasses
to the right to display the documents.
e)
Select the individual objects then right-click to display a context menu.
From the context menu, you can display or change objects or go to
the engineering workbench.
f)
To recognize which T-F## components are also assemblies, we
recommend placing the assemblies indicator in the layout.
Select the right-hand side of the Change Layout button
2.
.
g)
Select the right-hand side of the Filter button and choose BOM item.
h)
Highlight the Assembly field and move to the left using the
and then choose Enter.
i)
To display the BOM of an assembly, expand the appropriate node and
right-click.
button
Change item 0010 for BOM T-F## in plant 1000.
Continued on next page
380
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Mass Changes and the Product Structure Browser
Double the required quantity for component 0010.
3.
a)
Open the tree structure of BOM T-F## in plant 1000 at item level.
Select the header of the BOM and right-click. Select Change.
b)
Double-click on the item number 0010.
c)
Change the required quantity.
d)
Choose Save.
Go to the classification and display the characteristics for your pump.
Pump height: ____________
Pump capacity: ____________
Usage: ____________
a)
Expand the hierarchy node Classification and select the Class.
b)
Right-click and select Characteristic Value Assignment or choose the
Values icon .
c)
Pump height: 5 m (may vary)
Pump capacity: 15 m3 (may vary)
Usage: House technology (may vary)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
381
Unit 8: Advanced Bill of Material Functions
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Update BOMs using mass changes
•
Navigate the product structure browser
382
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Explain the concept of a phantom BOM and when it should be used
•
Create a phantom BOM in SAP R/3
•
Maintain phantom bills of material
•
Demonstrate model co-products and by-products
•
Demonstrate and explain the discontinuation process.
•
Model item substitutions in the bill of material
•
Discuss the advantages of using multiple and variant BOMs
•
Create a multiple BOM
•
Create a variant BOM
•
Define variant configuration
•
Update BOMs using mass changes
•
Navigate the product structure browser
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
383
Unit Summary
384
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
333
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
A component with a negative quantity exists on a BOM. Select each of the
following that it could be.
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
2.
A
B
C
D
Co-product
By-product
Waste product
Recursive product
Co-products, by-products, and waste products are materials on the BOM
which you can choose to produce.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
3.
True
False
One of the differences between co-products, by-products, and waste products
is their inventory valuation and settlement.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
4.
True
False
In order to use a material on a BOM as a co-product, you must first enable it
to be used as a co-product in the material master.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
385
Test Your Knowledge
334
TSCM40_I
Answers
1.
A component with a negative quantity exists on a BOM. Select each of the
following that it could be.
Answer: A, B, C
A component on a BOM with a negative quantity could be a co-product,
by-product, or a waste product.
2.
Co-products, by-products, and waste products are materials on the BOM
which you can choose to produce.
Answer: False
Co-products, by-products, and waste products are materials on the BOM that
are created simultaneously with the main product. The main product cannot
be produced in isolation without producing these.
3.
One of the differences between co-products, by-products, and waste products
is their inventory valuation and settlement.
Answer: True
Co-products have non-zero inventory valuation and are earmarked for cost
settlement. By-products have a non-zero inventory valuation but are not
earmarked for cost settlement. Waste products have zero inventory valuation
and are not earmarked for cost settlement.
4.
In order to use a material on a BOM as a co-product, you must first enable it
to be used as a co-product in the material master.
Answer: True
In order to use a material as a co-product on a BOM you must set the
co-product indicator on the MRP 2 view of its material master record. In
addition, you should also define the apportionment structure under the joint
production button for cost settlement.
386
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 9
Advanced Routing Functions
335
In this unit you will demonstrate to the participants advanced functions of the
routing. It is important that participants understand that not all funcations may be
used in their implementation.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces several advanced concepts surrounding the use of routings
in SAP ERP. Not all of the following functions will be required to use during the
modeling of your company’s manufacturing process. These functions will include
the user of parallel and alternative operations, detailed scheduling segments, scrap
and other miscellaneous functions.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010
Use parallel sequences in modeling complex manufacturing processes
Use alternative sequences in modeling flexible manufacturing processes
Model alternative manufacturing processes using alternative routings
Use production versions to model a very specific production process
Utilize reference operation sets to minimize routing maintenance
Create a reference operation set
Use a reference operation set in a routing
Use a reference operation set as a template to create a routing
Describe in detail the concept of lead time scheduling and updating in-house
production time in the material master
Identify the data used in lead time scheduling
Explain how the SAP ERP system uses the data to determine the lead time
schedule
Update the material master record of a material from the routing
Demonstrate the use of interoperation times in the routing for job shop
related environments
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
387
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TSCM40_I
Demonstrate the use of Overlapping for a continuous manufacturing process
Demonstrate the use of splitting for multi-capacity work centers.
Describe the use of trigger points to streamline and automate several
administrative processes
Explain how the assembly and component scrap in the material master field
affect the production process
Explain how the component scrap and operation scrap percentage in the bill
of material affect the production process
Explain how the scrap in the percentage field in the routing affects the
production confirmation process
Describe and use production resources/tools in the routing
Unit Contents
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes .....389
Exercise 18: Creating Alternative and Parallel Sequences ...........393
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes ..................400
Exercise 19: Creating Alternative Routings and Production
Versions......................................................................403
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets...........................................412
Exercise 20: Reference Operation Sets .................................415
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates............423
Exercise 21: Scheduling...................................................427
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing ......432
Demonstration: Demonstrate how to Use Splitting in the Production
Order .........................................................................436
Demonstration: Demonstrate the use of Continuous Flow............437
Exercise 22: Time Elements of the Operation in Scheduling .........441
Lesson: Trigger Points in the Routing........................................448
Demonstration: Setting Up a Trigger Point..............................450
Procedure: Setting Up a Trigger Point...................................452
Demonstration: Rework Operations and Orders During the Production
Order Confirmation Process ..............................................452
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects .................................................456
Demonstration: Assembly Scrap in Planned and Production Orders 458
Demonstration: Component Scrap in Planned and Production
Orders ........................................................................459
Demonstration: Operation Scrap in Planned and Production
Orders ........................................................................461
Exercise 23: Scrap in Production ........................................465
Lesson: Production Resources/Tools ........................................472
Demonstration: Assigning Material Components and Production
Resources/Tools ............................................................474
Exercise 24: Creating and Assigning PRTs .............................475
388
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
337
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing
Processes
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will discuss the use of parallel and alternative sequences to
model complex and flexible manufacturing processes.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Use parallel sequences in modeling complex manufacturing processes
Use alternative sequences in modeling flexible manufacturing processes
Business Example
Within the project team, you are responsible for routing management. You have
several products that undergo complex manufacturing steps. Due to the unique
nature of the process, several operations must occur simultaneously. In order to
due this, you want to make use of parallel sequences in the routing.
In addition, you have some machines that are identical in nature. For capacity
planning purposes, you can switch jobs between the machines with little or no
effect on the subsequent operations. You would like to use alternative sequences
to model this flexible manufacturing opportunity.
Parallel Sequences
You use a single sequence to represent a simple linear series of production steps in
production. If you want to represent a more complex series of production steps,
you link several sequences with relationships to predecessors and successors.
In the simplest case a routing only has one sequence, the standard sequence.
Every other sequence is either an alternative or a parallel sequence, depending on
whether its operations are performed as an alternative to the standard sequence
or in parallel (at the same time) with the standard sequence. Only routings can
have alternative sequences, parallel sequences can be created in both routings
and rate routings.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
389
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Parallel sequences are special types of overlapping operations that can be used in
various industries. A parallel sequence enables you to process several operations
at the same time. It is carried out at the same time as the corresponding section in
the standard sequence. It is a special form of overlapping operations.
For example, in mechanical engineering for assembly lines with individual
component manufacturing, a parallel sequence allows for several individual
components from the BOM to be prepared as smaller units for final assembly.
In the chemical industry, parallel sequences can be used to model analytical
processes that occur parallel to the production process.
Figure 123: Sequence Scheduling
An alignment key defines the start of the individual parallel sequences and,
consequently, the position of the sequence buffers.
Only the first operation of a referenced operation set (or reference rate routing)
that has not been unlocked can be used as a branch or as a return operation for
alternative or parallel sequences. To use other operations within a reference
operation set (or reference rate routing) for your parallel sequence, you must
first unlock the reference.
You can create parallel sequences in routings and rate routings. You cannot create
them in reference operation sets or reference rate routings
Alternative Sequences in Routings
A linear sequence of operations that is an alternative to a sequence of operations in
the standard sequence.
390
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
You use an alternative sequence for example, if:
•
•
The production flow is different for certain lot-size ranges For instance you
can machine a work piece on conventional machine or on NC machines. A
NC machine has a longer set-up time than a conventional machine. However
the machining costs are considerably less. Therefore whether you use NC
machines will depend on the lot size.
The production flow changes under certain business conditions. For instance,
if you have a capacity problem, you have some production steps performed
externally by a vendor.
You can enter a lot-size range, so that the system automatically selects the
alternative sequence if an order lies within this range. The lot size range of
an alternative sequence can differ from the one specified in the routing header.
However, it must overlap at least partially with the lot size range in the routing
header.
Alternative sequences are linked to the standard sequence. Branch operations in
the standard sequence are ignored in the procedure.
Figure 124: Alternative Sequences
Only the first operation of a referenced operation set that has not been unlocked
can be used as a branch or as a return operation for alternative or parallel
sequences. To use other operations within a reference operation set for your
alternative sequence, you must first unlock the reference.
You can only create alternative sequences in routings. You cannot create them in
reference operation sets, reference rate routings or rate routings.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
391
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
392
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
341
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
Exercise 18: Creating Alternative and
Parallel Sequences
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a parallel sequence
•
Allocate components to an operation in the parallel sequence
Business Example
In your manufacturing process, you have steps in the process that are being done
simultaneously. You would like to model this complex manufacturing process
using parallel sequences.
Task:
Create a routing with a parallel sequence for your finished material T-F## and
allocate components to both the standard sequence and the parallel sequence.
1.
First, create the standard sequence of the routing for the production of
material T-F## in plant 1000, which consists of the five steps in the table
below. The routing should be creation status, valid from today’s date, for
production usage, and for lot sizes from 1 to 100,000 pieces. Use the data in
the table below to complete the routing information.
Primary Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-M##
PP01
Material staging by picking list
20
T-E##
PP01
Preassemble pump components
30
T-F##
PP01
Final assembly of pump
40
T-P##
PP99
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
393
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Setup
0 Min
10 Min
15 Min
0 Min
Machine
0 Min
10 Min
10 Min
0 Min
Labor
10 Min
10 Min
10 Min
5 Min
Create the parallel sequence of the routing for the production of material
T-F## in plant 1000, which consists of the three steps in the table below. Use
the data in the table below to complete the routing information.
Parallel Sequence Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-V##
PP01
Cut sheet metal
20
T-V##
PP01
Drill and tap holes
30
T-L##
PP01
Cover and paint
Standard Processing Times:
3.
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Setup
10 Min
0 Min
15 Min
Machine
10 Min
0 Min
5 Min
Labor
0 Min
5 Min
5 Min
Assign material components from the BOM of T-F## to specific operations
on the routing. Assign 100-700 to operation 10 of the parallel sequence and
100-600, 100-130, and the non-stock item to operation 30 of the standard
sequence.
Where will the other components that you haven’t assigned be allocated?
394
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
Solution 18: Creating Alternative and
Parallel Sequences
Task:
Create a routing with a parallel sequence for your finished material T-F## and
allocate components to both the standard sequence and the parallel sequence.
1.
First, create the standard sequence of the routing for the production of
material T-F## in plant 1000, which consists of the five steps in the table
below. The routing should be creation status, valid from today’s date, for
production usage, and for lot sizes from 1 to 100,000 pieces. Use the data in
the table below to complete the routing information.
Primary Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-M##
PP01
Material staging by picking list
20
T-E##
PP01
Preassemble pump components
30
T-F##
PP01
Final assembly of pump
40
T-P##
PP99
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
395
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Setup
0 Min
10 Min
15 Min
0 Min
Machine
0 Min
10 Min
10 Min
0 Min
Labor
10 Min
10 Min
10 Min
5 Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Create or use transaction code CA01.
b)
Enter the material T-F## and plant 1000 and choose Enter
c)
Enter usage 1 for production, status 1 for creation phase, planner group
0##, and lot size of 1 to 100,000 pieces.
d)
Choose the Operations Overview icon and enter the primary operation
data from the table. Respond to any system messages that appear.
e)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operation from the menu.
Enter the standard operation processing Times from the table and
choose
to navigate to the next operation detail screen. Continue
until all times have been entered and then choose
to return to the
operation overview.
f)
Save your routing.
.
Create the parallel sequence of the routing for the production of material
T-F## in plant 1000, which consists of the three steps in the table below. Use
the data in the table below to complete the routing information.
Parallel Sequence Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
T-V##
PP01
Cut sheet metal
20
T-V##
PP01
Drill and tap holes
30
T-L##
PP01
Cover and paint
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
396
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Setup
10 Min
0 Min
15 Min
Machine
10 Min
0 Min
5 Min
Labor
0 Min
5 Min
5 Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter the material T-F## and plant 1000 and choose Enter
c)
Choose the Sequence Overview icon. Notice only the standard sequence
is listed and this one is always numbered 0.
d)
Choose the Create icon
e)
Accept the default sequence number, enter Cut and paint sheet
metal as the description, select the alignment key Align with latest
dates, and enter reference sequence 0 and return operation 20.
f)
Choose the Operations Overview icon and enter the parallel sequence
operation data from the table. Respond to any system messages that
appear with No.
g)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operation from the menu.
Enter the standard operation processing times from the table and
to navigate to the next operation detail screen. Continue
choose
until all times have been entered and then choose
to return to the
operation overview.
h)
Choose the Sequence Overview icon again. Notice there are now two
sequences: the standard sequence number 0 and the parallel sequence
number 1.
i)
Select both sequences by clicking the button to the left of each and
and select Parallel sequence.
choose the Operation Graphic icon
3.
.
j)
Choose the Expand All icon
routing.
k)
Choose
.
to view the graphic details of your
to return to the sequence overview and save your routing.
Assign material components from the BOM of T-F## to specific operations
on the routing. Assign 100-700 to operation 10 of the parallel sequence and
100-600, 100-130, and the non-stock item to operation 30 of the standard
sequence.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
397
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Where will the other components that you haven’t assigned be allocated?
398
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Chose the Component Allocation icon on the tool bar and select the
alternative 1 Bill of Material.
d)
Select items 100-700 from the BOM that appears. Choose the New
Assignment icon on the tool bar .
e)
You can enter sequence 1 operation 10 in the Activity field or choose
Oper./act. list icon to select the operation from a list.
f)
Choose Continue
and repeat steps d) through e) for components
100-300, 100-130, and the non-stock item, assigning them to operation
30 of sequence 0.
g)
Choose Save
h)
All other components that have not been assigned to any operation will
default to the first operation of the standard sequence.
.
to save your routing and exit.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Complex and Flexible Manufacturing Processes
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Use parallel sequences in modeling complex manufacturing processes
•
Use alternative sequences in modeling flexible manufacturing processes
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
399
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
348
TSCM40_I
Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will discuss the use of alternate routings to model alternative
manufacturing processes. You will also learn about the use of production versions.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Model alternative manufacturing processes using alternative routings
Use production versions to model a very specific production process
Business Example
Within the project team, you are responsible for routing management. Several of
your products require specific production cycles that are lot-size dependent. To
model this in SAP ERP, you must create routing alternatives for these products.
Alternative Routings
Different production lot sizes may require alternative production methods for
reasons of efficiency.
400
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Figure 125: Routings
The same material can be produced with different routings. The different routings
can be from different plants.
A single product with one BOM can be manufactured using different technologies.
You might use an automatic assembly line for large quantities and a manual
assembly line for small quantities. The end result, however, is the same material
for both assembly lines.
A product can be made of different combinations of components, depending on
the quantity (lot size) to be manufactured. This type of product is represented by
alternative BOMs. A product can have up to 1000 alternative BOMs that only
differ slightly, usually in terms of the component quantity.
In the above example, a single product is manufactured using different
manufacturing technologies, which require different bills of material. This
necessitates not only different routings, but also different BOMs. Machine
1 represents the older technology where the product is assembled from two
previously assembled components. Machine 2 is a newer piece of equipment
supporting the assembly of the product from four raw materials.
Each routing requires a BOM for the product representing the unique components
consumed by each manufacturing process. The selection of alternatives is
controlled by the material master record and could be based on lot size, date,
or production version.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
401
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Production Versions
In the example illustrated below, a product is manufactured using two sets of
technologies and methods. This necessitates different routings and different
BOMs.
Figure 126: Production Versions
Version 0001 produces brackets for large order lots on an NC punching machine.
The bracket is punched whole from a metal sheet.
Because it takes longer to set up a NC punching machine than the actual time it
takes for punching, version 0002 is used to produce small quantities of brackets
with another manufacturing process. This process requires strips of metal.
The appropriate alternative is selected using the production version in the material
master. The production version determines the manufacturing process according
to the routing and BOM specified.
You can store multiple production versions for different lot size intervals in the
material master. The group counter values differentiate the individual routings.
402
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
351
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Exercise 19: Creating Alternative Routings
and Production Versions
Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create an alternative routing
•
Create a routing using the Engineering WorkBench
Business Example
You have two different ways of manufacturing your product, T-B##. You need
another routing to model the manufacturing options. Your company is considering
using the Engineering Workbench for master data maintenance. You will use the
EWB to create another routing for your material.
Task 1:
Use the EWB to create a second routing to model an alternate manufacturing
process. This manufacturing process is only to be used for small lot sizes.
1.
Access the EWB using the P_ALLES working area and load the existing
task list for T-B##.
2.
Create a second routing for the production of material T-B## in plant 1000,
which consists of the five steps in the table below. The routing should be
creation status, valid from today’s date, for production usage, and for lot
sizes from 1 to 100 pieces. Use the data in the table below to complete the
routing information.
Primary Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
1112
PP01
Lathe casing
20
1114
PP01
Drill holes
30
1310
PP01
Preassembly
40
1310
PP01
Final assembly
50
1310
PP01
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
403
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
TSCM40_I
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Op 50
Setup
10 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Machine
30 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Labor
30 Min
10 Min
5 Min
5 Min
10 Min
Now maintain the header information for your task lists for material T-B##.
Task 2:
Assign components to operations on your alternate routing. Change the lot size so
one routing is valid for small lot sizes 1-10 and the other is valid for large lot sizes
11-100,000. Be sure to release both routings for production.
1.
Assign component T-T2## to operation 30 and component T-T3## to
operation 40 on your new routing with group counter 2.
2.
Change the lot size on routing with group counter 1 so it is valid for lot sizes
11-100,000 and set the status to Released (general) for both routings.
Task 3:
Display your routing using the SAP transactions and answer the following
questions.
1.
Display your routing.
2.
What are the group number and group counter? How does this compare with
the other routing for T-B## with Group Counter 1?
Task 4:
Create production versions for the selection of routings.
404
1.
Create a production version 0001 for the selection of BOMs and routings for
T-B##. The production version should be valid from today until 12/31/9999,
for lot sizes 11 to 100,000 pc. Use task list type routing with your routing for
T-B## group counter 1, and use BOM alternative 1 with usage 1.
2.
Create another production version 0002 for the selection of BOMs and
routings for T-B##. The production version should be valid from today until
12/31/9999, for lot sizes 1 to 10 pc. Use task list type routing with your
routing for T-B## group counter 2, and use BOM alternative 1 with usage 1.
3.
For the system to select your routings by production versions for this
material, you will need to change the Selection Method field on the MRP4
view of the material master.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Solution 19: Creating Alternative Routings
and Production Versions
Task 1:
Use the EWB to create a second routing to model an alternate manufacturing
process. This manufacturing process is only to be used for small lot sizes.
1.
2.
Access the EWB using the P_ALLES working area and load the existing
task list for T-B##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Engineering
Workbench or use transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select the P_ALLES working area and choose Continue.
c)
Enter material T-B## and plant 1000 in the Basic Selection Criteria
section.
d)
Choose Load Task Lists and BOMs .
e)
In the Headers Overview you now see a list of task lists for your
selection criteria.
Create a second routing for the production of material T-B## in plant 1000,
which consists of the five steps in the table below. The routing should be
creation status, valid from today’s date, for production usage, and for lot
sizes from 1 to 100 pieces. Use the data in the table below to complete the
routing information.
Primary Operation Data:
Operation #
Work
Center
Control
Key
Description
10
1112
PP01
Lathe casing
20
1114
PP01
Drill holes
30
1310
PP01
Preassembly
40
1310
PP01
Final assembly
50
1310
PP01
Deliver to stock
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
405
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
TSCM40_I
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Op 40
Op 50
Setup
10 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Machine
30 Min
10 Min
0 Min
0 Min
0 Min
Labor
30 Min
10 Min
5 Min
5 Min
10 Min
a)
In the EWB, select the
Create icon.
b)
In the second row of the table (headers), enter 2 for the Group Counter
and lot size 1 to 99,999,999 and choose Enter .
c)
A lock will appear on that second row. Now select that row and choose
Task LIsts → Operations.
d)
In the first row of the table (operations), enter the work center for
operation 10 from the above Primary Operation Data table and choose
Enter. Respond to any dialog boxes that appear by choosing Enter .
e)
Enter or replace the Operation Short Text with the text listed in the
above table.
f)
Continue this process with the next row in the table until all 5 operations
in the Primary Operation Data have been entered.
g)
Select the Processing Times tab and enter the data from the Standard
Processing Times table above and save your data by choosing
Save.
Now maintain the header information for your task lists for material T-B##.
a)
In the EWB, choose the menu path Task Lists → Headers.
b)
In the table for the header of Group Counter 2 change the lot size
validity to 1 to 10.
c)
Scroll to the right in the table and enter 0## in the Planner Group field
and save.
Continued on next page
406
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Task 2:
Assign components to operations on your alternate routing. Change the lot size so
one routing is valid for small lot sizes 1-10 and the other is valid for large lot sizes
11-100,000. Be sure to release both routings for production.
1.
2.
Assign component T-T2## to operation 30 and component T-T3## to
operation 40 on your new routing with group counter 2.
a)
In the EWB, use the menu path Task Lists → Component Assignments
and enter PP01 for the application if the dialog box appears.
b)
In the row for item T-T2## from the BOM that appears, enter 30 in the
operation field in the table.
c)
In the row for item T-T3## from the BOM that appears, enter 40 in the
operation field in the table.
d)
Choose Save
to save your routing.
Change the lot size on routing with group counter 1 so it is valid for lot sizes
11-100,000 and set the status to Released (general) for both routings.
a)
In the EWB, use the menu path Task Lists → Headers
b)
On the Headers General tab, select the header with group counter
Change.
1 and choose
c)
Change the lot size validity fields to 11 to 100,000.
d)
Scroll to the right and change the status to 4 Released (general) for
both routings.
e)
Choose Save
to save your routings and exit.
Task 3:
Display your routing using the SAP transactions and answer the following
questions.
1.
Display your routing.
a)
From the main menu choose Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Routings → Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use
transaction code CA03.
b)
Enter T-B## and plant 1000 and choose
c)
On the Routing overview screen, select the routing with group counter
2 and choose .
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
407
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
2.
TSCM40_I
What are the group number and group counter? How does this compare with
the other routing for T-B## with Group Counter 1?
a)
The group number will vary but should be a number beginning with
50000____ and the group counter should be 2.
b)
The group number is the same as the group number for the other routing
for T-B## but the group counter is different.
Task 4:
Create production versions for the selection of routings.
1.
Create a production version 0001 for the selection of BOMs and routings for
T-B##. The production version should be valid from today until 12/31/9999,
for lot sizes 11 to 100,000 pc. Use task list type routing with your routing for
T-B## group counter 1, and use BOM alternative 1 with usage 1.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Production
Versions or use transaction code C223.
b)
Delete all entries in the Selection condition fields except Material
T-B## and Plant 1000. Then choose Enter .
c)
You should now be able to enter the data for material T-B##,
production version 0001, and text Normal Production. By
hitting ENTER twice to work through the warning, the valid dates
will default.
d)
You can continue to work in the table or you can double-click on the
production version number 0001 and work in the detail screen to enter
data, which might make data entry easier.
e)
Enter lot size 11 to 100,000 pc.
f)
In the Task List section, choose Routing from the list for Task List Type.
g)
Enter your routing’s group number in the Group field. If you don’t
know the group number, you can find the correct routing by using the
F4 search function or the drop-down list. Choose tab C: Search using
material and choose Continue . Be sure to choose the routing with
group counter 1.
h)
In the Bill of Material section, enter alternative BOM 1 and usage 1.
i)
Now you can close the detail screen by choosing
.
Continued on next page
408
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
2.
Create another production version 0002 for the selection of BOMs and
routings for T-B##. The production version should be valid from today until
12/31/9999, for lot sizes 1 to 10 pc. Use task list type routing with your
routing for T-B## group counter 2, and use BOM alternative 1 with usage 1.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Production
Versions or use transaction code C223.
b)
Delete all entries in the Selection condition fields except Material
T-B## and Plant 1000. Then choose Enter .
c)
Now you should be able to enter the data for material T-B##,
production version 0002, and text Small Lot Size
Production. By hitting ENTER twice to work through the warning,
the valid dates will default.
d)
You can continue to work in the table, or you can double-click on the
production version number 0002 and work in the detail screen to enter
data, which might make data entry easier.
e)
Enter lot size 1 to 10 pc.
f)
In the Task List section, choose Routing from the list for Task List Type.
g)
Enter your routing’s group number in the Group field. If you don’t
know the group number, you can find the correct routing by using the
F4 search function or the drop-down list. Choose tab C: Search using
material and choose Continue . Be sure to choose the routing with
group counter 2.
h)
In the Bill of Materiall section, enter alternative BOM 1 and usage 1.
i)
Now you can close the detail screen by choosing
j)
Be sure to save your production versions.
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
409
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
410
TSCM40_I
For the system to select your routings by production versions for this
material, you will need to change the Selection Method field on the MRP4
view of the material master.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Change → Immediately or use transaction code MM02.
b)
Enter material T-B## and press ENTER.
c)
Select the MRP 4 view from the list and press ENTER.
d)
Enter plant 1000 and press ENTER.
e)
In the BOM explosion/dependent requirements section, change the
Selection Method field to 2 Selection by production version or 3
Selection only by production version.
f)
Choose Save. Now the system will use the production versions for
selection of the BOM and routing for this material.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Modeling Alternative Manufacturing Processes
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Model alternative manufacturing processes using alternative routings
•
Use production versions to model a very specific production process
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
411
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
360
TSCM40_I
Reference Operation Sets
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about reference operation sets and how to use them.
You will create a reference operation set and reference it in your routing. You will
also use a reference operation set as a template for creating routings.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Utilize reference operation sets to minimize routing maintenance
Create a reference operation set
Use a reference operation set in a routing
Use a reference operation set as a template to create a routing
Discuss reference operation sets as building blocks for routings.
Business Example
The inspection process for several different pumps consists of the same steps. You
need an efficient way to maintain these steps on multiple routings. Your group
routing uses the same steps, but they have different standard values. You want
to use these inspection steps as a template as an efficient way of creating your
group routing.
Reference Operation Sets
A reference operation set is a standard operation sequence for performing a task
that is frequently used. Creating a reference operation set provides an efficient
way to maintain this set of operations. It can be used either as a reference or as
a template when you create a routing.
412
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets
Figure 127: Reference Operation Sets
The reference to a reference operation set is created in the operation overview.
The operations in the reference operation set are renumbered to fit into the routing.
A reference operation set does not allow parallel or alternative sequences.
Material components, PRTs, and trigger points can be assigned to an operation in
a reference operation set. Any assignments to a reference operation set will be
copied into the routing. Any change made to a reference operation set will update
all routings that use it.
A reference operation set can be created manually, or a routing or reference
operation set can be used as a template. If you copy from a routing, only the
basic sequence is copied. If you copy from a reference operation set, there is
no reference.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
413
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
414
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
363
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets
Exercise 20: Reference Operation Sets
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a reference operation set
•
Use a reference operation set in a routing
•
Use a reference operation set as a template to build a routing
Business Example
In your production process, there is an inspection process that is common to many
routings. Since the steps and standard values are identical for all routings, you
need an efficient way to maintain this data. In your group routing, the steps are
identical but the standard values are different. You need an efficient way to build
these steps into your routing but still be able to change the standard times.
Task 1:
Create a reference operation set for the inspection of manufacturing products.
1.
Create a reference operation set for the inspection of your manufacturing
products. This will be an in-process inspection to be used for production
with status Release (general). Assign it to your planner group 0##, use the
description In-process inspection ##, and enter the data in the table below.
Operation
Work Center
Control Key
Description
Labor
10
R-K##
PP01
Test
Inspection
10 Min
20
R-P##
PP01
Examine
after testing
5 Min
Task 2:
Assign the reference operation set to your routing.
1.
Change your routing for T-F## to include the reference operation set you
just created. This inspection needs to take place just prior to final assembly,
and again before delivery to stock.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
415
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Use your reference operation set to build inspection steps into your group routing.
1.
Your group routing PUMP## also needs the same inspection steps, but since
the standard values are different in this routing you will use the reference
operation set to insert the operations and then unlock the reference so you
can change the standard values for this routing. The reference operation set
should be inserted at operations 35 and 45. Only unlock the reference at 35,
since those are the only standard values that are different.
Task 4:
New inspection requirements have increased the standard time at inspection work
center R-K## from 10 min to 15 min. Change your reference operation set to
reflect this new time.
416
1.
Change the standard value of operation 10 in your reference operation set
from 10 min to 15 min and update all routings to which it is assigned. What
does the warning message mean?
2.
Display your routing for T-F## and plant 1000 to make sure the changes
were made.
3.
Display your group routing PUMP## to check if the changes have also been
made there. Was the standard value for operation 45 changed? Was the
standard value for operation 35 changed? Why or why not?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets
Solution 20: Reference Operation Sets
Task 1:
Create a reference operation set for the inspection of manufacturing products.
1.
Create a reference operation set for the inspection of your manufacturing
products. This will be an in-process inspection to be used for production
with status Release (general). Assign it to your planner group 0##, use the
description In-process inspection ##, and enter the data in the table below.
Operation
Work Center
Control Key
Description
Labor
10
R-K##
PP01
Test
Inspection
10 Min
20
R-P##
PP01
Examine
after testing
5 Min
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Reference Operation Sets → Create or use transaction
code CA11.
b)
Choose Enter
c)
Enter the description In-process inspection ##, usage 1,
status 4, planner group 0##, lot size 1 to 100000 pc, and choose the
Operation overview icon.
d)
Enter the data from the table and save. Make note of the system
assigned group number that appears in the status bar when you save.
without entering any data in the initial screen.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
417
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Assign the reference operation set to your routing.
1.
Change your routing for T-F## to include the reference operation set you
just created. This inspection needs to take place just prior to final assembly,
and again before delivery to stock.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the operation overview, choose Extras → Reference → Create.
d)
Enter operation 25 and the group number of the reference operation
set you recorded earlier. If you don’t have the group number, you can
search possible entries with the drop-down list. Choose S: Reference
operation sets and enter your planner number 0##. Then choose Enter
and your reference operation set will appear on a list for you to choose
it.
e)
Repeat step d for operation 35.
.
Note: Notice the operations of the reference operation set are
display only and cannot be changed here. Changes will need to
be made in the reference operation set. All routings to which it
is assigned will then be automatically updated.
Task 3:
Use your reference operation set to build inspection steps into your group routing.
1.
Your group routing PUMP## also needs the same inspection steps, but since
the standard values are different in this routing you will use the reference
operation set to insert the operations and then unlock the reference so you
Continued on next page
418
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets
can change the standard values for this routing. The reference operation set
should be inserted at operations 35 and 45. Only unlock the reference at 35,
since those are the only standard values that are different.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Be sure the material number is blank, enter plant 1000, group
PUMP##, and choose Enter .
c)
From the operation overview, choose Extras → Reference → Create.
d)
Enter operation 35 and the group number of the reference operation
set you recorded earlier. If you don’t have the group number, you can
search possible entries with the drop-down list. Choose S: Reference
operation sets and enter your planner number 0##. Then choose Enter
and your reference operation set will appear on a list for you to select it.
e)
Repeat step d using operation 45.
f)
Select operation 35 and choose Extras → Reference → Unlock.
g)
Now change the standard times of operations 35 and 36 to 5 Min
and 3 Min, respectively.
Note: Be aware that since this reference has been unlocked,
any changes to the reference operation set will not update
operations 35 and 36.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
419
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 4:
New inspection requirements have increased the standard time at inspection work
center R-K## from 10 min to 15 min. Change your reference operation set to
reflect this new time.
1.
2.
Change the standard value of operation 10 in your reference operation set
from 10 min to 15 min and update all routings to which it is assigned. What
does the warning message mean?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Reference Operation Sets → Change or use transaction
code CA12.
b)
Enter the group number of your reference operation set or search for it
as previously indicated and choose Enter .
c)
Acknowledge the warning message that appears. This message means
that upon saving, any changes made to the reference operation set will
update all routings to which it is assigned.
d)
Double-click on operation number 10 to go to the details of the
operation. Change the 10 Min of labor time to 15 Min.
e)
Save the reference operation set.
Display your routing for T-F## and plant 1000 to make sure the changes
were made.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Double-click on operation number 25 and check the details to be sure
the labor time is now 15 Min.
d)
Repeat this for operation number 35.
.
Continued on next page
420
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Reference Operation Sets
3.
2010
Display your group routing PUMP## to check if the changes have also been
made there. Was the standard value for operation 45 changed? Was the
standard value for operation 35 changed? Why or why not?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Be sure the material number is blank, enter plant 1000, group
PUMP##, and choose Enter .
c)
Double-click on operation number 45 and check the details to be sure
the labor time is now 15 Min. Yes, this standard value was changed
when the reference operation set was saved.
d)
Repeat this for operation number 35. No, the standard values here were
not changed because the link back to the reference operation set was
broken when it was unlocked.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
421
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Utilize reference operation sets to minimize routing maintenance
•
Create a reference operation set
•
Use a reference operation set in a routing
•
Use a reference operation set as a template to create a routing
422
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
371
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson describes the details of lead time scheduling and updating in-house
production time in the material master.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Describe in detail the concept of lead time scheduling and updating in-house
production time in the material master
Identify the data used in lead time scheduling
Explain how the SAP ERP system uses the data to determine the lead time
schedule
Update the material master record of a material from the routing
Business Example
As a member of the project team, you are responsible for the precise time
scheduling of your products. To ensure this can happen, you need to first fulfill the
following prerequisites:
•
•
•
Maintain working times
Maintain in-house production time in the material master
Prepare reduction measures
Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Material requirements planning explodes a material’s BOM, generates planned
orders or purchase requisitions for the components to be procured, and calculates
basic order dates. Basic order dates (planned dates) are calculated using either
the lot-size-independent or lot-size-dependent in-house production time for
internally procured materials, or the planned delivery time for externally procured
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
423
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
materials. The in-house production time for a material can be calculated using
lead time scheduling of a routing without an order, and can then copied to the
material master.
Figure 128: Calculation of Basic Dates
Production planning has two types of scheduling that are implemented in different
ways: basic date scheduling and lead time scheduling.
Figure 129: Scheduling in Production Planning
424
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
To ensure smooth material requirements planning, it is absolutely necessary to
schedule a routing and to update the material master with the scheduling results. If
material requirements planning (MRP) is carried out without lead time scheduling
(as shown in the top half of the figure), capacity requirements are not determined
for planned orders.
Production orders are always scheduled using lead time scheduling for the
operations. A production order always contains both sets of dates (basic dates and
baseline dates). Baseline dates are relevant for production.
You can also use lead time scheduling to determine capacity requirements for
planned orders in MRP.
Figure 130: Scheduling of In-House Production Time
You maintain the in-house production time in the material master. To calculate
basic dates correctly in requirements planning, it is very important that the
in-house production time in the material master agrees with the results of lead
time scheduling in the routing.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
425
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
426
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
375
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Exercise 21: Scheduling
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Schedule a routing
•
Analyze the schedule of a routing using a table and Gantt chart
•
Update the basic dates in the material master from the schedule of the routing
Business Example
It is important to ensure that the production schedule is accurate. Therefore,
you need to analyze the scheduling of routings before they are used to create
production order. In addition, to ensure that basic date and lead time scheduling
are synchronized, you will need to schedule the routing and update the material
master record.
Task 1:
Schedule your routing to make sure the production schedule is accurate. Display
the schedule using an object overview and a Gantt chart.
1.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule.
Task 2:
Schedule your routing and update the material master record with the schedule
data.
2010
1.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and update the material master record.
2.
Update the material master record with the schedule data.
3.
Now check the material master to be sure it was updated.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
427
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 21: Scheduling
Task 1:
Schedule your routing to make sure the production schedule is accurate. Display
the schedule using an object overview and a Gantt chart.
1.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select forward scheduling as
the scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
Make sure all your operations are scheduling correctly in the scheduling
overview table that appears. Make any necessary corrections and
schedule the routing again.
g)
Click the Gantt chart icon
.
and view the schedule graphically.
Continued on next page
428
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Task 2:
Schedule your routing and update the material master record with the schedule
data.
1.
2.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and update the material master record.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select forward scheduling as
the scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
In the Scheduling Overview, select the Scheduling Results icon.
g)
In the dialog box that appears, you can compare the scheduling results
with the current material master settings. Choose the Update mat.
master button in the dialog box.
h)
You should receive a message box that says “Scheduling data marked
for material master update.”
.
Update the material master record with the schedule data.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Extras
→ Material Master → Update Material Master or use transaction code
CA96.
b)
Enter plant 1000, production planner 0##, and choose Enter
c)
Select your material from the list and choose the Update mat. master
icon on the tool bar.
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
429
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
430
TSCM40_I
Now check the material master to be sure it was updated.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Display → Display Current or use transaction code MM03.
b)
Enter material T-F## and choose Enter
c)
Select the Work Scheduling view and choose
d)
Enter plant 1000 and choose
e)
You should see the results of the update in the In-house production
time in days section.
.
.
.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Lead Time Scheduling and Material Master Updates
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe in detail the concept of lead time scheduling and updating in-house
production time in the material master
•
Identify the data used in lead time scheduling
•
Explain how the SAP ERP system uses the data to determine the lead time
schedule
•
Update the material master record of a material from the routing
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
431
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
380
TSCM40_I
Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the
Routing
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will look at the various options for detailed scheduling including
interoperations times, continuous input/ouput, and splitting operations in multiple
capacity work centers.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Demonstrate the use of interoperation times in the routing for job shop
related environments
Demonstrate the use of Overlapping for a continuous manufacturing process
Demonstrate the use of splitting for multi-capacity work centers.
Business Example
As a member of the project team, you are responsible for the precise time
scheduling of your products. In order to do this you need to model the critical
path and any possible interoperation or float time that might occur during a
normal production. To ensure this can happen, you need to review the use of
interoperation times, overlapping, and splitting in the routing operations.
Modeling Standard Float Time in the Routing
Since malfunctions and other disturbances in the production process can never
be fully prevented, the system carries out scheduling using a float before and a
float after production. The floats before and after production are defined in the
material master record using a scheduling margin key.
The two float times serve different purposes:
432
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Float before production
The float before production has the following two functions in the order: It
can compensate for delays in the staging of the material components or if
there is a capacity bottleneck at the work centers involved, you can move
the production dates forward in the future. In this way it serves as a float for
capacity leveling. The system calculates the scheduled start by adding the
float before production to the basic start date.
Float after production
The float after production is used in the order to compensate for unexpected
interruptions in the production process. It prevents a delay of the scheduled
finish. The system calculates the scheduled finish by subtracting the float
after production from the basic finish date.
Figure 131: Time Elements in Lead Time Scheduling
The order float can be predefined and is controlled by the scheduling margin key.
In Customizing, the scheduling margin key is defined and then assigned on the
MRP 2 view of the material master record.
The duration of an operation consists of a maximum of five time components:
•
•
•
•
•
2010
Queue time
Setup time
Processing time
Teardown time
Process-related wait time
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
433
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Queue Time
In addition to the floats before and after production, you can define an operation
float in the form of a queue time. The queue time is used to compensate for
malfunctions and delays within an operation. The queue time is the interval
between the earliest and latest dates of the operation (see the following figure).
During each scheduling run, the system calculates the earliest and the latest dates
for the individual operation segments. You can maintain the queue time in both
the work center and operation. However, the system only schedules with the
queue time in the work center if you have not maintained the queue time in the
operation. If the lead time of an operation must be reduced, the system can shorten
the standard queue time as far as the minimum queue time.
Setup Time
The setup time is the time needed to prepare the work center for operations to
perform there. The setup time is part of the lead-time.
Processing Time
The processing time is the time needed to process a material in an operation. The
processing time is dependent on the order quantity, and does not contain a setup or
teardown time. It is part of the execution time.
Teardown Time
The teardown time is the time needed to restore a work center to its normal state
after operations have been processed. The teardown time is part of the execution
time.
Wait Time
The wait time is the time between the end of the execution time and the start of
move time. In the SAP system, types of wait time are:
•
•
Maximum
Minimum
In scheduling, only the minimum wait time is taken into account. The maximum
wait time is used for information.
Using the teardown/wait simul. indicator in the interoperation times section of the
Operation Details screen, you can specify whether teardown and wait are to be
considered as simultaneous or consecutive operation segments in scheduling. If
teardown and wait times are simultaneous, the lead time of the operation is reduced
The wait time is scheduled without taking the factory calendar into account. This
means that it can be scheduled daily from 0.00 to 24.00.
Move Time
434
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
In addition to these operation segments, you can define a move time. The move
time is the time needed to move a material from one work center to the next one.
Move time is always between two operations and is assigned to the preceding
operation.
You can maintain the move time in the individual operations or in Customizing
per location group in the move time matrix. In the interoperation times section of
the Operation Details screen, you can maintain a minimum and a standard move
time. If reduction measures are carried out, the system schedules the operations
using the minimum move time. The system determines the move time using the
move time matrix, only if you do not maintain move times in the interoperation
times section of the Operation Details screen.
You can combine work centers which are in close proximity to each other into
location groups. You can define location groups in Customizing and assign a
work center to a location group on the Scheduling screen of the work center. In
the move time matrix, you can specify planned values for the move time within
a location group or from one location group to another. For each entry, you can
specify a minimum and a standard move time.
The operation segments and the move time are used to determine the execution
time, lead time and interoperation time of an operation.
The material requirement is scheduled from the earliest start date (you can change
this in Customizing).
The capacity requirement can be displayed on the earliest or latest start date
depending on the customizing settings.
For external operations, the delivery time is specified in days. These operations
are scheduled based on the Gregorian calendar.
Figure 132: Time Components and Their Origins
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
435
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
You maintain time elements for lead time scheduling in various places within
the PP application.
It is important to make the correct settings and use the system properly for
successful scheduling.
The interoperation time in the material master is calculated from:
•
•
•
•
Order float (float before and after production)
Operation float (queue time)
Wait time
Move time
Modeling Operation Splits in the Routing
An operation is split if it is carried out on several machines or by several persons
at the same time. Splitting an operation has the following effects on the operation
dates: The processing time/execution time becomes shorter. Setup and teardown
must be carried out more than once for the operation.
Demonstration: Demonstrate how to Use Splitting in
the Production Order
Purpose
System Data
System:
T34
Client:
800
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
No setup required.
1. Use Tcode CA02 and schedule your routing for T-F## with lot size 100 and
operation segments variant. Show the results of operation 20 is 1000 min.
436
2.
Now change operation 20 to force a split. In the operations details and the
splitting section, check the splitting required indicator. You don’t need to
specify the number of splits, it will default to the number of capacities in
the work center.
3.
Now schedule the routing again and show that operation 20 now schedules
for 333.3 min because it is split across 3 machine capacities.
4.
Show the results and the total lead time of the order is reduced to 21 days.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Modeling Continuous Manufacturing as with Multiple
Operations
To reduce the lead time of a routing or production order you can overlap operations.
This means that an operation starts before the previous operation has finished
You can define for each individual operation whether it should overlap with the
next consecutive operation and in what way. To do this you can set the following
indicators:
•
Required overlapping
This means the operations always overlap
•
Optional overlapping
This means the operations overlap if scheduling uses a reduction level that
allows overlapping
•
Flow manufacturing
This means the system extends the lead time of all operations, that overlap
using flow manufacturing, to the same length as the lead time of the longest
of these operations. As with required overlapping, the operations always
overlap
For every type of overlapping you can
•
•
Define a minimum overlap time which only allows overlapping after a
particular minimum limit has been reached.
Define a minimum send-ahead quantity to ensure that the operation is
performed for a particular minimum quantity of the material to be produced,
before the next operation starts.
Demonstration: Demonstrate the use of Continuous
Flow
Purpose
Show the effect of continuous flow on the lead time of the routing. The routing
is currently scheduling the production of all 100 pieces at operation 10 before
passing the entire quantity to operation 20, etc. Here overlap the operations with
a send ahead quantity of 1. Show the scheduling times of the operations hasn’t
changed, the results show the total lead time reduced, and the Gantt chart shows
how the operations now overlap.
System Data
System:
Client:
2010
T34
800
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
437
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
No setup required.
1. If you have just shown the previous demo then just remind students that
the lead time of the routing is 21 days. If not, then schedule your T-F##
routing with a lot size of 100 to show them it schedules for 22 days without
splitting or 21 days with splitting.
2.
Now change each operations in the routing to overlap with the send ahead
quantity of 1. Do this in the operation details, Overlapping section by
selecting the required overlapping indicator and entering the send ahead
quantity of 1 in the appropriate field. Be sure to point out that the operations
from the reference operation set cannot be changed here.
3.
Now schedule the routing again with a lot size of 100. show each operation
still schedules the same time. Show the results now schedules 17 days total
lead time. Show the Gantt chart and how the operations now overlap.
Reduction Measures
The system can carry out reduction measures in lead time scheduling for orders.
If the lead time calculated in scheduling is longer than the time between the
basic dates, the system will carry out reduction measures to reduce the lead time.
Reduction is carried out step by step. After each reduction measure, the system
checks whether the calculated dates are within the basic dates. If this is the case,
no further reduction measures are carried out.
438
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Figure 133: Reduction Process in Scheduling Routings
You can assign a reduction strategy to each operation in the interoperation
times section of the Operation Details screen. This strategy specifies how many
reduction levels may be applied to an operation (maximum of six levels) which
reduction measures are carried out at the individual levels.
The order is rescheduled after every reduction level. To improve performance it is
recommended that you keep the number of reduction steps to a minimum.
Figure 134: Reduction Strategy
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
439
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
You can set the time elements that can be reduced as well as the reduction strategy
in Customizing (for each order category and planner group).
The following reduction measures can be carried out with respect to the operation:
Reduction of the queue time:
•
•
•
•
•
For each reduction level, you can specify the percentage by which the queue
time is to be reduced. However, you cannot reduce to a value smaller than
the minimum queue time.
Reduction of the execution time by splitting - Dividing an operation between
several people or machines results in a reduction of the execution time.
Reduction of the lead time by overlapping - You can reduce the overall lead
time of an order by overlapping operation processing.
Reduction of the move time - You can reduce the standard move time as far
as the minimum move time.
The minimum wait time cannot be reduced.
You can also specify reduction for the floats before and after production in the
order or in Customizing for each plant, order type and planner group.
In order to reduce the lead time of a routing with parallel sequences, you specify
that reduction is only carried out on operations, if a reduction in their execution
time leads to a reduction in the overall lead time of the order. The sequence of
such operations in the routing with parallel sequences forms the "critical path". If
applying reduction measures to an operation, would not lead to an overall lead
time reduction, this operation is not reduced. If a routing does not contain parallel
sequences, there is no critical path. All operations are then reduced, irrespective of
whether you have selected reduction via the critical path or not.
440
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
387
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Exercise 22: Time Elements of the
Operation in Scheduling
Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create an operation in a routing that splits the workload over several
machines
•
Create operations that model continuous output and overlap the previous
operation to reduce lead time
Business Example
One operation in your routing to produce pumps has several machines that can
do the work. You need to be sure the routing will schedule the workload across
all machines. As part of a lean manufacturing initiative at your company, you are
required to perform single-piece production.
Task 1:
Change the operation on your routing to require splitting the workload across
all machines.
1.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. What is the processing
(Edit) time of operation 20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
2.
Operation 20 in your routing, preassembly of the pump, has a work center
with three machines (three individual capacities). Change this operation to
require splitting across all three machines.
3.
Schedule your routing again for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling
from today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments
overview variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. Compare the
differences in scheduling. What is the processing (Edit) time of operation
20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
441
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Due to a lean manufacturing initiative in your company, you are required to
use single-piece manufacturing. Change your routing to accommodate this
requirement.
442
1.
Change your routing so every operation requires overlapping with one piece
send-ahead quantity.
2.
Schedule your routing again for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling
from today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments
overview variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. Compare the
differences in scheduling. What is the processing (Edit) time of operation
20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Solution 22: Time Elements of the
Operation in Scheduling
Task 1:
Change the operation on your routing to require splitting the workload across
all machines.
1.
2.
Schedule your routing for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling from
today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments overview
variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. What is the processing
(Edit) time of operation 20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select forward scheduling as
the scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
The processing time (labeled Edit) for operation 20 is 1000 min.
g)
In the Scheduling Overview, select the Scheduling Results icon. Make
note of the lead time in days for the entire routing.
h)
Click the Gantt chart icon
.
and view the schedule graphically.
Operation 20 in your routing, preassembly of the pump, has a work center
with three machines (three individual capacities). Change this operation to
require splitting across all three machines.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Double-click on operation number 20 to go to the details of the
operation.
d)
Scroll down to the splitting section and select the indicator for Required
splitting. You need not enter the number of splits, but let it default to
the number of individual capacities.
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
443
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
TSCM40_I
Schedule your routing again for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling
from today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments
overview variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. Compare the
differences in scheduling. What is the processing (Edit) time of operation
20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select forward scheduling as
the scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
The processing time (labeled Edit) for operation 20 is 333.3 min.
g)
In the Scheduling Overview, select the Scheduling Results icon. Make
note of the lead time in days for the entire routing.
h)
Click the Gantt chart icon
.
and view the schedule graphically.
Continued on next page
444
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Task 2:
Due to a lean manufacturing initiative in your company, you are required to
use single-piece manufacturing. Change your routing to accommodate this
requirement.
1.
Change your routing so every operation requires overlapping with one piece
send-ahead quantity.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operations to go to the
details of the operation.
d)
Scroll down to the overlapping section, select Required overlapping,
and enter 1 pc in the min. send-ahead qty.
e)
to go to the next operation and repeat the settings until all
Choose
operations have been performed.
f)
Click the green back arrow
to get back to the operations overview
and then choose the Sequence overview icon to see the other sequences.
g)
Select sequence 1, the parallel sequence, and choose the Operations
overview icon .
h)
Select all operations and choose Details → Operations to go to the
details of the operation.
i)
Scroll down to the overlapping section, select Required overlapping,
and enter 1 pc in the min. send-ahead qty.
j)
Choose
to go to the next operation and repeat the settings until all
operations have been performed.
k)
Save your changes.
.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
445
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
2.
446
TSCM40_I
Schedule your routing again for the pump T-F## using forward scheduling
from today’s date with a lot size of 100 pc. Use the operation segments
overview variant and the Gantt chart to view your schedule. Compare the
differences in scheduling. What is the processing (Edit) time of operation
20? What is the lead time of the routing in days?
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select Forward as the
scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
In the Scheduling Overview, select the Scheduling Results icon . Make
note of the lead time in days for the entire routing.
g)
Choose the Gantt chart icon
.
and view the schedule graphically.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Time Components, Reduction Possibilities in the Routing
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Demonstrate the use of interoperation times in the routing for job shop
related environments
•
Demonstrate the use of Overlapping for a continuous manufacturing process
•
Demonstrate the use of splitting for multi-capacity work centers.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
447
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
394
TSCM40_I
Trigger Points in the Routing
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn how trigger points can be used to trigger actions in
the production order. You will use a standard trigger point to create a specific
trigger point for your routing.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the use of trigger points to streamline and automate several
administrative processes
Trigger points can be used to trigger other actions in the system automatically. In
this unit we will demo creating standard trigger points. Then we will use these
trigger points to insert an operation from a reference operation set and then another
example to create a production order by copying a reference operations set. For
time sake, we decided not to include another exercise so the demonstrations
were included in the participant manual as procedures so students have the
documentation for future reference.
Business Example
As a production planner/scheduler, you are responsible for modeling the
production process of several materials in SAP ERP. Several of your assembles
undergo a very sophisticated manufacturing process. Due to the complex nature of
the process, it often yields product that needs to be reworked during the process,
as well as after the final process is complete. Your company has asked you to find
a way to automate the rework business process at the time rework is reported
during production confirmation. You need to investigate trigger points as a way of
automating the rework process.
Defining Trigger Points
Trigger points are assigned to operations in a routing to trigger certain functions in
the production order at a later time. Trigger points can trigger functions when an
operation’s status changes or when an operation is confirmed.
448
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Trigger Points in the Routing
Figure 135: Using Trigger Points in Routings
The person making the confirmation decides if the function is triggered when the
operation is confirmed. Trigger points can trigger the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release succeeding operations. You can release all operations that follow the
operation which has the trigger point assigned to it.
Release up to stop indicator. You can release all operations up to and
including the next operation for which the RelStop indicator is set.
Release preceding operations. You can release all operations before the
operation with the trigger point assigned to it.
Create order by copying. You can create a new order without reference to
a material by copying a reference operation set.
Insert reference operation set. You can insert a reference operation set into
an existing order. To do this, you must enter the operations between which
you would like to insert the reference operation set.
Start workflow task (for example, send mail to a user)
Standard trigger points can be copied to create new trigger points. If you copy a
standard trigger point to create a trigger point, the system automatically transfers
all necessary data from the standard trigger point into the trigger point you are
creating. This reduces the time and work involved in creating a trigger point.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
449
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 136: Trigger Point Structure
You can combine several standard trigger points into a trigger point group. If you
copy from a trigger point group, the system automatically transfers all standard
trigger points in the trigger point group to the operation. Using trigger point
groups considerably reduces the time and work involved in creating trigger points.
You can maintain trigger point groups in Customizing.
Demonstration: Setting Up a Trigger Point
Purpose
System Data
System:
TE3
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM114-##
Password:
Set up instructions:
None needed.
1. Create a trigger point that creates a rework operation when scrap is confirmed.
Assign the trigger point to operation 20 on your reference operation set.
450
2.
Use menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard Trigger
Points → Standard trigger pt → Create or use transaction CO31.
3.
Enter REWORK## as the Std Triggerpoint and Insert Rework Reference
Operation Set as the description.
4.
In Usage select TrigPointFuncts, select User Status profile PP000006 and
press enter.
5.
Select Insert Reference Operation Set, User status NAVO, + Status set, and
press enter.
6.
Enter group number 50000001, group counter 1 and save.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
2010
Lesson: Trigger Points in the Routing
7.
Now change your reference operation set by assigning this trigger point
to operation 20.
8.
In the operations overview, select operation 20 and choose Goto → Trigger
point overview.
9.
Select copy standard trigger point, select trigger point rework##, and save.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
451
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
397
TSCM40_I
Setting Up a Trigger Point
1.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard Trigger Points
→ Standard trigger pt → Create or use transaction CO31.
2.
Enter the Std Triggerpoint name and description.
3.
Assign a usage and group if you want.
4.
In Usage, select the function the trigger point should serve: TrigPointFuncts
or Release Stop.
•
•
TrigPointFuncts: The trigger point triggers the functions you entered
on the detail screen for trigger points (for example, release operation or
include reference operation set).
Release Stop: The operation is the last in a series of operations released
by the trigger point. If the function release up to stop was triggered in
a previous operation, all subsequent operations are released up to the
operation with the RelStop indicator
5.
Assign a User Status profile and press ENTER.
6.
Select the function the trigger point should execute, along with the system or
user status and how it is initiated.
7.
In trigger point parameters, assign the group number and counter or any
additional data that is needed.
Demonstration: Rework Operations and Orders During
the Production Order Confirmation Process
Purpose
System Data
System:
Client:
User ID:
Password:
Set up instructions:
1. Create a production order with type PP01 for 10 PCs of 100-301 due in one
week. Release and save the order. Use menu path Logistics → Production →
Production Control → Order → Create → With Material or use transaction
CO01.
452
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
2010
Lesson: Trigger Points in the Routing
2.
Enter a final confirmation for operation 30 of your order for 8 pieces and
2 scrap with reason 0004. Use menu path Logistics → Production →
Production Control → Confirmation → Enter → For Operation → Time
Ticket or use transaction CO11N. Acknowledge any messages and show
dialog box of reference operation set being added to order.
3.
Display order and show operation 32 has been added to order for rework.
Use menu path Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order
→ Display or use transaction CO03.
4.
Now enter a final confirmation for operation 60 of your order for 8 pieces
and 2 scrap with reason 0005. Use menu path Logistics → Production →
Production Control → Confirmation → Enter → For Operation → Time
Ticket or use transaction CO11N. Acknowledge any messages and show
dialog box of rework order being created with reference operation set.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
453
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
454
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Trigger Points in the Routing
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the use of trigger points to streamline and automate several
administrative processes
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
455
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
399
TSCM40_I
Scrap and Its Effects
Lesson Duration: 25 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will look at the different ways to define scrap in the SAP ERP
system, and what effect they have on planning.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Explain how the assembly and component scrap in the material master field
affect the production process
Explain how the component scrap and operation scrap percentage in the bill
of material affect the production process
Explain how the scrap in the percentage field in the routing affects the
production confirmation process
Business Example
As a production planner/scheduler you are responsible for meeting customer
services demands placed on you by the forecast and sales orders. Several of the
production processes that you are responsible for scheduling are quite complex
and yield loss is quite high. To assure that you deliver enough good production to
inventory, you need to factor in these losses ahead of time. You want to examine
the options in the bill of material, the material master, and the routing so you can
properly model your scrap allowances.
Calculating Scrap
You can calculate and plan the scrap quantity that will result from production.
These scrap quantities are then included in the planning run and in the calculation
of production costs. Which calculation the system uses depends on the settings in
the material master record, the BOM, or the routing. The scrap quantity is settled
456
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
against the net requirements quantity. Scrap is used for material requirements
planning and product costing. The three scrap calculation procedures supported
by the system are:
•
•
•
Assembly scrap
Component scrap
Operation scrap
Figure 137: Scrap Categories and Their Effect
Assembly Scrap
You use this function to plan the scrap that results from the production of an
assembly. Assembly scrap increases the order quantity of the assembly and,
subsequently, increases the order quantity for each component in the BOM of the
assembly by adjusting the quantity of the dependent requirements generated during
the MRP run. The system automatically increases the quantity to be produced by
the percentage of scrap. However, the system always uses the estimated yield for
the availability calculation for the assembly. Furthermore, the estimated yield of
the assembly is always displayed in the MRP list or in the stock/requirements list.
Assembly scrap is only used when the material is an assembly. Reasons for
assembly scrap include inadequate quality or bad working conditions, such as
heat, cold, or dampness.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
457
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Demonstration: Assembly Scrap in Planned and
Production Orders
Purpose
To demonstrate the effects of assembly scrap on the planned quantities in the
planned and production orders.
System Data
System:
TE3
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM114-##
Password:
Set up instructions:
All data for this demo should already exist in the
system and no system setup is needed.
1. Change the material master of your pump R-B1## to plan for 12% assembly
scrap on MRP1 View. Also change the planning strategy to 40 on MRP3
View. MM02
458
2.
Change the routing so operations 10, 20 and 40 each have standard times of
10 pc per 60 min and operations 30 has a standard time of 5 pc per 60 min.
Also assign components 20 and 30 to operation 30. CA02
3.
Enter a Planned Independent Requirement for 100 PCs 2 months from today.
MD61
4.
Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP. MD02
5.
Show the SRList quantities. With 10 in stock 90 is needed and it shows a
planned order for 90. However, display the details of the planned order and
it shows a planned order for 101 with 11 scrap which nets to 90. Show the
component details and the requirement quantities for all components reflect
the increased quantity due to scrap. MD04
6.
Convert the planned order to a production order. The quantity in the
production order is the same as the planned order. Show the component
overview and the components are the same as the planned order. Now show
the operation overview, select all operations, and click details. Choose the
Qties/Activities tab and all operations show operations Qty of 101 and an
increase in operations time to produce the extra quantities for scrap. Exit
the production order without saving.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Component Scrap
You use this function to plan the scrap of a component that may break during
production of an assembly. You can define component scrap in two places:
•
•
In the BOM on the Item Detail Screen: General Data (quantity data section).
This component scrap is only relevant for the individual BOM.
In the material master (MRP 4 view) in the Component scrap field. This
component scrap is relevant for all BOMs.
The component scrap quantity maintained for a material component in the BOM
has the higher priority. Component scrap increases the dependent requirements
quantity of the component. If a scrap quantity is planned for a higher-level
assembly, assembly scrap and component scrap are both added to the component
level.
Component scrap relates only to the individual components in an assembly.
During BOM explosion, the system increases only the component quantity by
the calculated scrap quantity.
Demonstration: Component Scrap in Planned and
Production Orders
Purpose
To demonstrate the effects of component scrap on the planned quantities in the
planned and production orders and the interaction of the two.
System Data
System:
TE3
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM114-##
Password:
Set up instructions:
All data for this demo should already exist in the
system and no system setup is needed.
1. Change the material masters of your pump components R-T1##, R-T2##, and
R-T3## to plan for 2%, 3%, and 7% component scrap respectively. MM02
2010
2.
Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP and be sure to use planning mode 3 to
delete and recreate all planned orders. MD02
3.
Show the SRList quantities. As compared to using assembly scrap, the
SRList did not change and the details of the planned order also stayed the
same. However, the component quantities have now increased to reflect the
component scrap quantities in addition to the increase from the assembly
scrap. MD04
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
459
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
4.
Convert the planned order to a production order. The only changes in the
production order is the component quantities. Be sure to show the operations
again. Exit the production order without saving.
5.
Now change the BOM for R-B1## and enter component scrap of 20, 30, and
70 % respectively for R-T1##, R-T2##, and R-T3##. CS02
6.
Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP and be sure to use planning mode 3 to
delete and recreate all planned orders. MD02
7.
Show the SRList quantities. The SRList did not change and the details of the
planned order also stayed the same. However, the component quantities have
now increased to reflect the component scrap in the BOM. The component
scrap in the material master has been ignored. MD04
8.
Convert the planned order to a production order. The only changes in the
production order is the component quantities. Be sure to show the operations
again. Exit the production order without saving.
9.
Change the BOM by deleting the component scrap quantities.
Operation Scrap
Before high-value components are built into an assembly, your manufacturing
process may require a quality control check of the assembly. Faulty materials
that were taken into account in assembly scrap are not passed on to the next
operation; they are removed from the manufacturing process. Therefore, for a
high-value component, you plan using operation scrap instead of general assembly
scrap. This scrap quantity refers to the quantity of one component that is to be
processed in an operation, meaning that the planning run is more exact and you
can determine service and quantity consumption more precisely.
If the component is contained in an assembly for which an assembly scrap quantity
has been maintained, the system only takes the operation scrap into account. The
net indicator instructs the system to calculate the component operation scrap
without taking assembly scrap into account (net usage scrap). You should also set
the net indicator if operation scrap has not been maintained and assembly scrap
has been entered. The assembly scrap should not, however, be taken into account.
Operation scrap in the BOM relates to the quantity of a component to be processed
in an assembly. The specification replaces the estimated assembly scrap for the
high quality materials and allows for more precise MRP. The net indicator controls
the operation scrap for components and is calculated without taking into account
the assembly scrap (net input quantity). You still have to set this indicator if no
operation scrap has been maintained and the assembly scrap is not to be taken
into account.
460
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Operation scrap in the operation results in a fall in quantity in the next operation,
and is taken into consideration in scheduling and costing. The scrap percentage
maintained in the operations is added to the material master with the scheduling
update.
Demonstration: Operation Scrap in Planned and
Production Orders
Purpose
To show the effect of operation scrap on the planned and production orders and
how they interact with assembly and component scrap with and without the Net ID.
System Data
System:
TE3
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM114-##
Password:
Set up instructions:
All data for this demo should already exist in the
system and no system setup is needed.
1. From the previous demos we now have 12% assembly scrap for R-B1## and
2, 3, and 7 % component scrap for R-T1##, R-T2##, and R-T3## respectively.
2010
2.
Now change the BOM for R-B1## to add operation scrap of 5% for R-T1##.
Show that the system requires you to select the Net ID. For components
R-T2## and R-T3## select just the Net ID.
3.
Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP and be sure to use planning mode 3 to
delete and recreate all planned orders. MD02
4.
Show the SRList quantities. The SRList did not change and the details of the
planned order also stayed the same. However, the component quantities have
changed. The planning now ignores the assembly scrap and doesn’t plan
enough quantity for any of the components. MD04
5.
Convert the planned order to a production order. The components quantities
are the same as the planned order and will be short. In the operation details
on the Qty/Activities tab the production time did not plan for any extra time.
Exit the production order without saving.
6.
Now change the routing to add 5% operation scrap to both operations 10
and 20.
7.
Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP and be sure to use planning mode 3 to
delete and recreate all planned orders. MD02
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
461
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
8.
Show the SRList quantities. No quantities have been affected by the
operation scrap. The operation scrap in the BOM has been ignored and only
the routing operation scrap is being planned. MD04
9.
Convert the planned order to a production order. The components quantities
are the same as the planned order and will be short. In the operation details
on the Qty/Activities tab the operation quantities have been adjusted to
reflect the operations scrap and the production times have also been adjusted.
Exit the production order without saving.
10. Change the BOM by deleting the operation scrap and all the Net IDs for
each component.
11. Now schedule the routing and update both the production time and assembly
scrap in the material master.
12. Run Single-Item Multi-Level MRP and be sure to use planning mode 3 to
delete and recreate all planned orders. MD02
13. Show the SRList quantities. The correct quantities are now planned for the
components. MD04
14. Convert the planned order to a production order. The correct quantities are
planned for the components. In the operation details the system has now
planned for the correct operation quantities and production times.
Scrap Example
Figure 138: Scrap Example
462
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Assembly scrap in the material master can be calculated from operation scrap
entered in the routing. The following example shows how the assembly scrap is
calculated. Formula: total scrap quantity (9.75) divided by total yield quantity
(90.25) equals 10.80%. Even though the unit of measure is pc, there is no rounding
in the scrap calculation.
Operation
Scrap
Start Qty
Scrap Qty
Op Yield
10
5%
100
5
95
20
5%
95
4.75
90.25
Based on the component scrap and operation scrap values defined on the BOM and
routing, the system calculates the following planned component and production
quantities:
Material
Req
Op
Asmbly
Scrap
Comp
Scrap
BOM
Scrap
Op
Net
Ind
Req
Qty
Blank
10
12%
2%
0%
N
115
Gasket
30
12%
3%
0%
Y
103
Screws
30
12%
7%
0%
Y
107
Execution time is also adjusted for the scrap quantities.
2010
Operation
Production Qty
Time Target Required Time
10
112
10 H
11.2 H
20
106
10 H
10.6 H
30
101
5H
20.2 H
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
463
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
464
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
405
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Exercise 23: Scrap in Production
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Maintain scrap in the material master, BOM, and routing
•
Maintain and use assembly scrap, component scrap, and operation scrap
•
Use the operation net indicator in planning scrap
•
Use operation scrap in the routing to update assembly scrap in the material
master
Business Example
Your production for the pump casing creates scrap in several different areas. You
need to use assembly scrap, component scrap, and operation scrap to accurately
plan the required quantities. You also want to use the operations scrap in the
routing to update the assembly scrap in the material master without planning
scrap for both.
Task 1:
Maintain assembly scrap, component scrap, and operation scrap in your pump
production.
1.
Change the material master of your pump R-B1## to plan for 12% assembly
scrap.
2.
Change the material masters of your pump components R-T1##, R-T2##,
and R-T3## to plan for 2%, 3%, and 7% component scrap, respectively.
3.
Change the BOM of your pump R-B1## so planning does not plan for both
operation and assembly scrap by setting the operation net indicator for
R-T2## and R-T3##.
4.
Change your routing for the production of material R-B1## in plant 1000 to
reflect the operation scrap of 5% that occurs at operations 10 and 20. Also,
adjust the standard values of the first three operations to match the data in
the table below.
Standard Processing Times:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
465
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Base Quantity
10 PC
10 PC
5 PC
Setup
10 Min
3 Min
0 Min
Machine
60 Min
60 Min
60 Min
Labor
60 Min
60 Min
60 Min
Scrap in %
5
5
0
Task 2:
Test the scrap calculation by scheduling a production order for material.
1.
Schedule a production order for 100 pieces of R-B1## due in two months.
2.
Analyze the component quantities and operation times to be sure the system
planned properly for scrap.
Task 3:
Update the material master record with the operation scrap from the routing.
1.
466
Update the material master record of R-B1## with the operation scrap from
the routing.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Solution 23: Scrap in Production
Task 1:
Maintain assembly scrap, component scrap, and operation scrap in your pump
production.
1.
2.
Change the material master of your pump R-B1## to plan for 12% assembly
scrap.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Change → Immediately or use transaction code MM02.
b)
Enter R-B1## for the material number, choose the MRP1 and MRP3
views, and enter plant 1000.
c)
In the section for Lot Size Data, enter 12 in the Assembly scrap (%)
field. On the MRP3 view be sure the Strategy Group is set to 40 and
save.
Change the material masters of your pump components R-T1##, R-T2##,
and R-T3## to plan for 2%, 3%, and 7% component scrap, respectively.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Change → Immediately or use transaction code MM02.
b)
Enter R-T1## for the material number, choose the MRP4 view, and
enter plant 1000.
c)
In the section for BOM explosion/dependent requirements data, enter
2 in the Component scrap (%) field and save.
d)
Repeat steps b through c for each of the other materials, R-T2## and
R-T3##, and enter the correct scrap quantity for each.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
467
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
3.
4.
TSCM40_I
Change the BOM of your pump R-B1## so planning does not plan for both
operation and assembly scrap by setting the operation net indicator for
R-T2## and R-T3##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material
→ Bill of Material → Material BOM → Change or use transaction
code CS02.
b)
Enter material R-B1##, plant 1000, BOM usage 1, and choose Enter.
c)
In the General Item Overview, select components R-T2## and R-T3##.
d)
Go to the Item details screen by choosing the Item icon
e)
In the Item details screen, select the Net ID for R-T2##.
f)
Choose Next
g)
Select the Net ID and save your BOM.
.
to move to the details of R-T3##.
Change your routing for the production of material R-B1## in plant 1000 to
reflect the operation scrap of 5% that occurs at operations 10 and 20. Also,
adjust the standard values of the first three operations to match the data in
the table below.
Standard Processing Times:
Activity
Op 10
Op 20
Op 30
Base Quantity
10 PC
10 PC
5 PC
Setup
10 Min
3 Min
0 Min
Machine
60 Min
60 Min
60 Min
Labor
60 Min
60 Min
60 Min
Scrap in %
5
5
0
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter the material R-B1## and plant 1000 and choose Enter
c)
Select operations 10, 20, and 30 and choose Details → Operation from
the menu. Enter the base quantity and the standard operation processing
times from the table. Scroll down to enter the scrap values and choose
to navigate to the next operation detail screen. Continue until all
times and scrap quantities have been entered and then choose
to
return to the operation overview. Be sure you save your routing.
.
Continued on next page
468
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Task 2:
Test the scrap calculation by scheduling a production order for material.
1.
2.
Schedule a production order for 100 pieces of R-B1## due in two months.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order →
Create → With Material or use transaction code CO01.
b)
Enter material R-B1##, production plant 1000, and order type PP01
and choose Enter.
c)
Enter Total Qty of 100, a Basic Finish date 2 months from
today and hit ENTER.
d)
Stay in the production order without saving.
Analyze the component quantities and operation times to be sure the system
planned properly for scrap.
a)
In the production order, choose Component overview
b)
You should see in the component overview that the system has planned
the following:
Component
Reqmts qty
R-T1##
115
R-T2##
103
R-T3##
856
.
c)
Choose Operations overview
d)
Select operations 10, 20, and 30 and select the Op. details icon
the lower left of the screen.
e)
Select the Qty/activities tab and compare the data to the table below.
f)
.
Operation
Operation Qty
To confirm time
10
112
11.2 H
20
106
10.6 H
30
101
20.2 H
in
When you are finished and are satisfied the production order was
scheduled correctly, exit without saving by choosing
and answering
No to the dialog box.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
469
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Update the material master record with the operation scrap from the routing.
1.
470
Update the material master record of R-B1## with the operation scrap from
the routing.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Change or use transaction code
CA02.
b)
Enter material R-B1##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
From the menu, choose Extras → Scheduling → Schedule.
d)
Enter today’s date as the start date, select forward scheduling as
the scheduling type, enter 100 for the lot size (these should all default),
and choose Continue .
e)
Select the overview variant 000000000001 Operation segments and
choose Continue .
f)
In the Scheduling Overview, select the Scheduling Results icon .
g)
In the dialog box that appears, you can compare the scheduling results
with the current material master settings. Choose Update mat. master
icon. in the dialog box.
h)
You should receive a message box that says, “Scheduling data marked
for material master update.” Choose OK and back out of the routing.
i)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Extras
→ Material Master → Update Material Master or use transaction code
CA96.
j)
Enter plant 1000, production planner 0##, and choose Enter
k)
Select your material from the list and be sure to select the Update with
assembly scrap indicator. Now choose Update mat. master icon. on
the tool bar and check your material master record to be sure it updated
correctly.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
.
.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Scrap and Its Effects
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Explain how the assembly and component scrap in the material master field
affect the production process
•
Explain how the component scrap and operation scrap percentage in the bill
of material affect the production process
•
Explain how the scrap in the percentage field in the routing affects the
production confirmation process
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
471
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
Lesson:
412
TSCM40_I
Production Resources/Tools
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson explains how to create and use production resources/tools.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe and use production resources/tools in the routing
Business Example
As a production scheduler, several of your products require extensive testing. The
testing process requires expensive and sophisticated equipment. For the purpose
of informing the quality department of its need and duration of use, you think it
might be useful to model in on the production floor. In order to do this you will
use production resources/tools in the routing
Production Resources/Tools
Production resources/tools are required for production but are not consumed.
A PRT may be needed in order to carry out an operation and therefore must be
assigned to that operation.
The PRT must be identified by a material master, equipment master, or a PRT
master.
The input screen for production resources/tools with a material master is
automatically displayed when assigning a PRT to an operation. The PRT category
can be changed.
472
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Production Resources/Tools
Figure 139: Production Resources/Tools
The ECC System differentiates between the following types of production
resources/tools, according to their properties and business function:
•
•
•
•
Materials that are accounted for in materials management, for instance in
inventory management, requirements planning and procurement.
Equipment, for instance measuring instruments or valuable tool, which are
serviced
Documents, for instance drawings or programs, which use the document
management system.
Miscellaneous production resources/tools (with a PRT master record), that
require less maintenance in the system.
Production resources/tools can be assigned to operations, activities or phases
in task lists (including standard networks and recipes), production orders and
maintenance orders as well as networks. Production resources/tools that are used
for testing during production, can be assigned to the corresponding inspection
characteristic in the inspection plan.
In the SAP system, you can assign various PRT categories to an operation in a
routing or a production order. The PRT category is determined by the requirements
of a PRT and its reference to a particular object (material, equipment, and so on).
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
473
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Figure 140: PRT Categories
Demonstration: Assigning Material Components and
Production Resources/Tools
Purpose
This demonstration will familiarize the participants with PRT categories and the
process of assigning materials and PRTs to an operation.
System Data
System:
T34
Client:
8##
User ID:
PLM111-##
Password:
init
Set up instructions:
1. Assign a PRT to operation 20 in your routing.
474
2.
Demonstrate a search with matchcode for the PRT material type and select
the PP-FHMM PRT.
3.
Show how a PRT of the Other type is created.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Production Resources/Tools
415
Exercise 24: Creating and Assigning PRTs
Exercise Duration: 10 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a PRT
•
Assign a PRT to an operation on a routing
Business Example
In your production process, you have production inspection tools that are needed
for testing pumps. You need to create these as PRTs and assign them to your
inspection operations on the routing.
Task 1:
Create a PRT to represent your inspection gauge.
1.
Create a miscellaneous PRT called INSP-## to represent your inspection
gauge. Be sure you release it for use in production, allow it to be used only
for routings, and the unit of measure is pieces.
Task 2:
Assign a PRT to your inspection operation of your reference operation set.
2010
1.
Assign a PRT inspection gauge to operation 10 of your reference operation
set.
2.
Display your routing for T-F## and plant 1000 to ensure the PRT is visible
there also.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
475
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Solution 24: Creating and Assigning PRTs
Task 1:
Create a PRT to represent your inspection gauge.
1.
Create a miscellaneous PRT called INSP-## to represent your inspection
gauge. Be sure you release it for use in production, allow it to be used only
for routings, and the unit of measure is pieces.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Production
Resources and Tools → Production Resources/Tools → PRT Master
(Misc.) → Create or use transaction code CF01.
b)
Enter INSP-## and press ENTER.
c)
Enter Inspection Gauge ## as the description, Status 03, Task
List Usage 001, and Base Unit of Measure PC.
d)
Choose the Default icon to go to the default view.
e)
Enter Control Key 1 for all business processes, Ref. start date as
04 Start Date for execution, and Ref. date for finish as
05 Start date for wait.
f)
Save your PRT.
Continued on next page
476
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Production Resources/Tools
Task 2:
Assign a PRT to your inspection operation of your reference operation set.
1.
2.
Assign a PRT inspection gauge to operation 10 of your reference operation
set.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Reference Operation Sets → Change or use transaction
code CA12.
b)
Enter the group number of your reference operation set or search for it
using S:RefOpSet and your Planner numbeer 0## and choose Enter .
c)
Acknowledge the warning message that appears. This message means
that upon saving, any changes made to the reference operation set will
update all routings to which it is assigned.
d)
Select operation 10 and choose Prod.resources/tools icon..
e)
The dialog box that appears defaults to material PRT. If you want to
assign a different PRT, you must choose the appropriate button at the
bottom of the box. Choose Others to assign a miscellaneous PRT.
f)
Enter INSP-## as the name of the Prod.resource/tool and press
ENTER. Respond to any messages that appear.
g)
Save the reference operation set.
Display your routing for T-F## and plant 1000 to ensure the PRT is visible
there also.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →
Routings → Standard Routings → Display or use transaction code
CA03.
b)
Enter material T-F##, plant 1000, and choose Enter
c)
In the operations overview, be sure the PRT column is selected for
both operations 25 and 35.
d)
Select one of those operations and choose Prod.resources/tools
.
.
e)
2010
The PRT INSP-## should be visible.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
477
Unit 9: Advanced Routing Functions
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe and use production resources/tools in the routing
478
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Use parallel sequences in modeling complex manufacturing processes
•
Use alternative sequences in modeling flexible manufacturing processes
•
Model alternative manufacturing processes using alternative routings
•
Use production versions to model a very specific production process
•
Utilize reference operation sets to minimize routing maintenance
•
Create a reference operation set
•
Use a reference operation set in a routing
•
Use a reference operation set as a template to create a routing
•
Describe in detail the concept of lead time scheduling and updating in-house
production time in the material master
•
Identify the data used in lead time scheduling
•
Explain how the SAP ERP system uses the data to determine the lead time
schedule
•
Update the material master record of a material from the routing
•
Demonstrate the use of interoperation times in the routing for job shop
related environments
•
Demonstrate the use of Overlapping for a continuous manufacturing process
•
Demonstrate the use of splitting for multi-capacity work centers.
•
Describe the use of trigger points to streamline and automate several
administrative processes
•
Explain how the assembly and component scrap in the material master field
affect the production process
•
Explain how the component scrap and operation scrap percentage in the bill
of material affect the production process
•
Explain how the scrap in the percentage field in the routing affects the
production confirmation process
•
Describe and use production resources/tools in the routing
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
479
Unit Summary
480
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
421
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
Float time that can be modeled in the scheduling of the routing include:
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
□
2.
A
B
C
D
E
Float before production
Float after production
Setup time
Queue time
Teardown time
The duration of an operation consists of a maximum of 5 components.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
3.
True
False
Teardown and wait time are always scheduled simultaneously.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
4.
True
False
Only the minimum wait time is scheduled.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
5.
True
False
Move time is defined only in the operation details.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
6.
True
False
You can only split an operation processing time on a work center with more
than 1 individual capacity.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
481
Test Your Knowledge
7.
TSCM40_I
Operation can be set to overlap so that the next operation starts before the
previous operation has finished.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
8.
True
False
Reduction measures are applied when the lead time schedule of a routing
does not fit within the basic date schedule.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
9.
True
False
Which of the following are types of PRT’s?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
□
A
B
C
D
E
Material
Equipment
Component
Miscellaneous
Document
10. PRT is another name for a component that is used in production.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
True
False
11. The same PRT can be assigned to more than one operation on the same
routing.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
482
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
423
Test Your Knowledge
Answers
1.
Float time that can be modeled in the scheduling of the routing include:
Answer: A, B, D
Float time that can be modeled in the scheduling of the routing include the
float before and after production and queue time sometimes referred to as
operation float time.
2.
The duration of an operation consists of a maximum of 5 components.
Answer: True
The duration of an operation consists of a maximum of 5 components which
are queue time, setup time, processing time, teardown time, and wait time.
3.
Teardown and wait time are always scheduled simultaneously.
Answer: False
Teardown and wait time are scheduled consecutively unless the
teardown/wait simul. indicator is set in the operation details of the routing.
4.
Only the minimum wait time is scheduled.
Answer: True
Only the minimum wait time is scheduled, the maximum wait time is used
for information purposes only.
5.
Move time is defined only in the operation details.
Answer: False
Move time can be defined in the operation details or by location groups in
the work center.
6.
You can only split an operation processing time on a work center with more
than 1 individual capacity.
Answer: True
An operation is split if it is carried out on several machines or by several
persons at the same time.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
483
Test Your Knowledge
7.
TSCM40_I
Operation can be set to overlap so that the next operation starts before the
previous operation has finished.
Answer: True
To reduce lead time of a routing or production order you can overlap
operations. This means that an operation starts before the previous operation
has finished.
8.
Reduction measures are applied when the lead time schedule of a routing
does not fit within the basic date schedule.
Answer: True
Reduction measures are applied when the lead time schedule of a routing
does not fit within the basic date schedule
9.
Which of the following are types of PRT’s?
Answer: A, B, D, E
The 4 types of PRT’s are material, equipment, document, and miscellaneous.
10. PRT is another name for a component that is used in production.
Answer: False
PRT’s like components are needed for production but they are not consumed
like components which makes them much different than components.
11. The same PRT can be assigned to more than one operation on the same
routing.
Answer: True
Unlike components, PRT’s are not consumed in the production process and
the same PRT can be assigned to multiple operations on the same routing.
484
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 10
Alternative User Interfaces
425
In this unit you will instruct participants on other alternatives user interfaces that
can be used to create and change engineering data. The Engineering Workbench
and the PLM Web UI can be used to access master data objects. These very
different tools have different functionality and different uses.
Unit Overview
This unit introduces the engineering workbench and the PLM Web User Interface
to create and maintain various production planning and execution master data.
These transactions can replace the create and change functions for most master
data objects.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use the engineering workbench for routing maintenance
Use the EWB browser functions
Navigate in the engineering workbench
Create a work area
Explain the effect of the work area focus
Explain the effect of objects contained in the work area
Explain the use of the PLM Web UI.
Navigate in the PLM WEB UI
Maintain master data objects using the PLM Web UI
Unit Contents
Lesson: Structure of the Engineering Workbench ..........................487
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench .......................494
Demonstration: Material-Routing Assignment and Lock Logic .......498
Exercise 25: Navigating in the EWB .....................................501
Exercise 26: Navigating in the EWB II...................................505
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
485
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas ..............................512
Exercise 27: Create a Work Area ........................................521
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface ......................526
Demonstration: PLM Web UI Navigation and Search Function ......533
Demonstration: Using the Work Center to Change a BOM with
ECM ..........................................................................536
Exercise 28: Using the PLM Web User Interface ......................543
486
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
426
Lesson: Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Lesson Duration: 40 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn the benefits of using the engineering workbench. You
will learn to navigate in the tool, create your own work area, and copy multi-level.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Use the engineering workbench for routing maintenance
Use the EWB browser functions
Business Example
You would like to find the optimum maintenance environment for permanent
changes to allow multiple users to make changes simultaneously. You would also
like to create new master data and link it in a hierarchy.
Introduction to the Engineering Workbench
The engineering workbench (EWB) is part of the PP module in SAP R/3, and is a
complex tool for the integrated processing of BOMs and routings. This means
that both object types and their links are maintained simultaneously and in detail,
with the same user interface.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
487
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 141: Benefits of the Engineering Workbench
The concept of the engineering workbench however, goes far beyond the
conventional maintenance of BOMs and routings in that all transactions for the
conventional maintenance of these objects are brought together and an extensive
change management is offered. Using complex selection criteria, any number
of objects can be combined; the resulting data then contains no additional
information, helping you to achieve a quick overview. The integration of an object
browser, as well as various viewers and the digital mock-up viewer, makes the
workbench a central object within PLM.
Figure 142: Formatting of Specific Information
488
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Often times changes to master data happen in complex processes and groups.
These activities can arise from new development, design changes, or changes
in procedure. Design changes can be changes that are required due to new
products, rules, warranty dates, and so on. Technical changes can occur in BOMs,
routings, or new steps in the process (work center). These types of changes call
for simultaneous changes to the assembly in the BOMs and to the sequence in
the routings.
Figure 143: Worklist: Purpose
The engineering workbench is a maintenance environment for product structures
and PP objects. Its capabilities far exceed those of the conventional maintenance
of BOMs and routings because you do not have to process routings and BOMs
separately.
The most important objects of the engineering workbench are BOM items
and operations. Views are applied to these objects, which then further enable
the conventional BOM or routing structures to be used. The full scope of the
processing functions, Create, Change, and Delete, is supported in all these views.
The worklist contains the selected objects so that they can be displayed, changed,
or newly created in the engineering workbench. These objects are copied by the
system from the database into the worklist. Only when the worklist has been
saved, following the processing of objects, are new objects created in the database
or existing ones changed or deleted.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
489
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 144: Simultaneously Processing Objects in EWB
Different users can work on the same BOM and /or routing simultaneously
without locking each other out. Any number of operations from any number of
routings can be processed at the same time by different people. The same applies
to different BOM items or different operations. If you want to process an object
that is already being processed by someone else, the engineering workbench
information will show you who to contact, so that you can consult with the other
processor. The processor can then release the object to you, without interrupting
your work on other objects.
Structure of the Engineering Workbench
To display or process an individual object using the EWB, you have to select the
corresponding object. Examples of objects are:
•
•
•
•
•
490
The task list header of a routing
The operation and sub-operation
The production resource/tool, trigger point, and inspection characteristic
The BOM header
The item and sub-item in the BOM
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Figure 145: Structure of the Engineering Workbench
An object can also take the form of an assignment between individual
objects. Examples of assignment objects are a material-routing assignment, a
material-BOM assignment, or a component assignment.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
491
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
492
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Structure of the Engineering Workbench
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Use the engineering workbench for routing maintenance
•
Use the EWB browser functions
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
493
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
Lesson:
432
TSCM40_I
Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn the benefits of using the engineering workbench. You
will learn to navigate in the tool, create your own work area, and copy multilevel.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Navigate in the engineering workbench
Explain which data can be read in the working area.
Business Example
You would like to find the optimum maintenance environment for permanent
changes. You would like to make changes simultaneously. You would also like
to create new master data and link it in a hierarchy.
Data Selection in EWB
Work areas are created in Customizing for the engineering workbench. Using
the Display work area button, you can specify a standard work area or select
another work area. In the Select work area dialog box, you also have the option
of branching to the detail screen in the working area. In this detail screen, you
can read the information about the predefined focus and about the object types
contained in the working area.
494
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Figure 146: Choosing the Work Area
The system automatically offers the tab page in which the object of the focus has
been placed. When entering the selection criteria, you can switch the tab page.
Figure 147: Selection Criteria
You can also use the selection range to restrict the time period for the data. Only
data that lies entirely or partially in the validity period is copied into the worklist.
By using the arrow key on the tab page, you can enter into fields additional
selection criteria that is not contained as selection criteria in the tab pages on
the screen. In addition, you can also use this procedure when you want to select
according to several individual values, value intervals, or generically.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
495
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 148: Effectivity Window
With the help of the effectivity window, the display of objects is filtered into
the overview screen. In this figure above, the example is of a working area with
four operations. The operations have been partially changed. If you choose
the selection period in the effectivity window, all operations that are effective
in the selection period are displayed. If you restrict the effectivity window, the
operations that lie completely outside of the effectivity window are not displayed.
If you choose the key date in the effectivity window, only those operations that are
effective on the key date are displayed.
Navigation in the Engineering Workbench
The screen layout is divided into three elements:
•
•
•
496
Toolbar
Cockpit
Overview screen
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Figure 149: Navigation in the EWB
The toolbar provides the user with currently available functions at the touch of a
button. The cockpit is always available and controls the engineering workbench.
It consists of three areas:
•
•
•
Process using, for the entry of the key dates or of the change number, to
process the objects in the worklist. The entry of a key date or a change
number is necessary when an object has to be created, changed, or deleted.
Effectivity window, to display a particular time segment of the worklist.
Context, to display the hierarchical relationship of objects in the overview
screen.
In this figure below there is an input line for each material, BOM, and item. The
overview screen lists objects that are contained in the worklist and that match the
entries in the effectivity window and in the context. It provides information about
the object and change status of a particular object type.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
497
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 150: Functional Overview of the EWB
In the browser:
•
•
If you double-click on an object, the context block is filled in the EWB
window and the tab page belonging to it is displayed.
The right mouse button provides the functions from the graphics displayed
above in a context menu.
Multilevel copy prerequisites:
The copy range has to include the object to be copied. The copy range is
predefined with the settings from the working area and also those from the
restrictions. No objects an be expanded unless they are contained in the working
area. Should the situation arise, check under Extras→ Options→ Copy range.
Demonstration: Material-Routing Assignment and
Lock Logic
Purpose
This isn’t a valid use for this demo! Becoming familiar with operation copy
features
System Data
System:
T34
Client:
8##
User ID:
PLM111-##
Password:
init
Set up instructions:
include settings here, do not refer to other exercises
1. Explain the locking properties of the EWB and work with a second session.
Show how the changes are automatically compiled in the second session.
NOTE: For the demonstration, it is important to switch on the locking
498
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
mechanism again using the transaction SE38 and the program ZSENQON.
Show the additional selection criteria and emphasize that these are saved for
the user. Demonstrate the effects of switching to the effectivity window.
Discuss the options in the Extras menu with the details for the selection
criteria and the working area.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
499
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
500
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
437
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Exercise 25: Navigating in the EWB
Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Navigate in the engineering workbench
•
Select objects for your work list
•
Assign materials to routings using the EWB
•
Change BOMs and routing using EWB
•
Use EWB locking logic
Business Example
You are responsible for maintaining master data for BOMs and routings in your
company. To do this you want to use the common maintenance interface in the
engineering workbench.
Task 1:
Select the routings that you created.
1.
Using the P_ALLES working area, select all routings that you created.
2.
How many routings did you create?
3.
Check whether the groups displayed belong to your products.
Task 2:
Using the EWB, create a material-routing assignment.
2010
1.
When creating the routing for your pump T-F##, it occurs to you that your
routing can also be used for the production of pump P-100. Assign material
P-100 to your routing.
2.
In the BOM for pump P-100, change the quantity of the component 100-130
to the number of your group. Who currently has the data locked?
3.
Can you change another BOM item in the same BOM without the lock
being lifted?
4.
Save the changes and exit the EWB.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
501
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Solution 25: Navigating in the EWB
Task 1:
Select the routings that you created.
1.
2.
Using the P_ALLES working area, select all routings that you created.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Engineering
Workbench or use transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select the P_ALLES working area and choose Continue.
c)
Select the Additional Selection Criteria icon .
d)
On the Header tab page, choose More Selection Criteria
task list section.
e)
In the Explorer window that appears, expand the Task list - Header
folder by clicking the triangle to the left of it.
f)
Select Created by and choose Adopt Field Selection .
g)
Complete the field with your user ID and choose Save.
h)
Choose Load Task Lists and BOMs .
i)
In the Headers Overview you now see a list of task lists that you created.
How many routings did you create?
a)
3.
under the
Four routings and one reference operation set.
Check whether the groups displayed belong to your products.
a)
From the menu, choose Task Lists → Material-Task list assignments.
b)
The Material - Routing Assignments Overview screen now shows
which materials are assigned to your routings.
Continued on next page
502
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Task 2:
Using the EWB, create a material-routing assignment.
1.
2.
3.
When creating the routing for your pump T-F##, it occurs to you that your
routing can also be used for the production of pump P-100. Assign material
P-100 to your routing.
a)
Select the routing for T-F## from the list by clicking the button to the
left of it in the table.
b)
Choose Task Lists → Material-Task List Assignment.
c)
Click the Create icon.
d)
Enter P-100 in the first blank line in the table and press Enter.
e)
The new assignment is created and appears on the list.
In the BOM for pump P-100, change the quantity of the component 100-130
to the number of your group. Who currently has the data locked?
a)
Select the routing-material assignment for P-100 on the
Material-routing assignments Overview screen and choose Bills of
Material → BOM Headers from the menu.
b)
In the context section, replace T-F## with P-100, delete the BOM
number, and choose Enter to load the BOM for P-100.
c)
Select the P-100 BOM header line in the table and use the EWB menu
path Bill of Material → Items to display the components.
d)
Select the line with 100-130 and choose Change.
e)
If another group is changing the same item, a dialog box will appear
specifying which group has the data locked.
Can you change another BOM item in the same BOM without the lock
being lifted?
a)
4.
.
Yes.
Save the changes and exit the EWB.
a)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
503
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
504
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
441
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Exercise 26: Navigating in the EWB II
Exercise Duration: 35 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Reassign component assignments
•
Use the browser to copy and an operation
•
Create a routing and a BOM by using multi-level copy
Business Example
You are responsible for maintaining master data for BOMs and routings in your
company; to do this you use the common maintenance interface in the Engineering
Workbench.
Task 1:
Copy an operation for a similar pump.
1.
Copy operation 50 with its corresponding PRT’s from the routing for material
T-F1## to operation 45 in the T-F## routing.
2.
In the operation overview, check the copied operation. Select Save to exit
editing in the EWB.
Task 2:
Your company is introducing a new pump T-H## which is similar to T-F## with 2
flywheels and an extra raw material T-P## assigned to operation 40.. You must
create the master data needed to manufacture this new pump.
1.
First create the material master record for your new pump T-H## by using
T-F## as the template and create your default views. Change the description
to Rotary Pump W/2 flywheels GR##.
2.
Now create the rest of the master data using the Engineering Workbench.
The routing should be copied multi-level from the pump with material
number T-F## and group counter 1.
Before copying, set the indicator for Set target context after copying on the
Misc. tab page.
After you copy the master data for the pump T-H##, add the component
T-P## as a raw material with a quantity of 1.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
505
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Display the PRT assignments in the Engineering Workbench.
506
1.
Use the browser to display an overview of the production resources/tools for
pump T-F1## in plant 1000.
2.
Search for the production resource/tool INSP-## in your routings by using
the browser. Navigate to the details screen.
3.
You have assigned the hollow shaft to operation 40 in your routing for
material T-F##. Reassign this assignment to operation 45 by using the
browser.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Solution 26: Navigating in the EWB II
Task 1:
Copy an operation for a similar pump.
1.
2.
Copy operation 50 with its corresponding PRT’s from the routing for material
T-F1## to operation 45 in the T-F## routing.
a)
Use the menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data →
Engineering Workbench or transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select the P_ALLES working area and click continue.
c)
Select the Additional Selection Criteria icon .
d)
Click Multiple Selection Icon to the right of material and enter
T-F1## and T-F## as material numbers.
e)
Click the Load Task Lists and BOMs Icon .
f)
Confirm the dialog box EWB: Process Using with the specified key
date if it appears.
g)
Click the Activate Browser Icon
to activate the browser, enter
application PP01 in the dialog box that appears.
h)
Expand the routing for T-F1## to the operations by clicking the triangle
to the left of T-F1##. Use the same method to navigate to the operations
for material T-F##.
i)
Click and drag operation 50 from material T-F1##, and drop it on the
Standard Sequence of T-F##.
j)
Enter operation 45 in the dialog box that appears.
k)
The operation and PRT assignments now appear in the T-F## routing.
In the operation overview, check the copied operation. Select Save to exit
editing in the EWB.
a)
Right-click the standard sequence in the routing for material T-F## and
select Operations to go to the operations overview.
b)
Click save.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
507
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Your company is introducing a new pump T-H## which is similar to T-F## with 2
flywheels and an extra raw material T-P## assigned to operation 40.. You must
create the master data needed to manufacture this new pump.
1.
2.
First create the material master record for your new pump T-H## by using
T-F## as the template and create your default views. Change the description
to Rotary Pump W/2 flywheels GR##.
a)
Choose Logistics → Production → Master data → Material master →
Material → Create (General) → Immediately (MM01).
b)
Enter the material number T-H## and material type for Finished
goods. Enter T-F## as the copy from material.
c)
In the Basic Data 1 view, change the description to Rotary Pump
W/2 flywheels GR##.
d)
Choose Save
.
Now create the rest of the master data using the Engineering Workbench.
The routing should be copied multi-level from the pump with material
number T-F## and group counter 1.
Before copying, set the indicator for Set target context after copying on the
Misc. tab page.
After you copy the master data for the pump T-H##, add the component
T-P## as a raw material with a quantity of 1.
a)
Use the menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data →
Engineering Workbench or transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select the P_ALLES working area and click continue.
c)
Select the Basic Selection Criteria icon .
d)
Enter T-F## as the material number and 1000 as the Plant number.
e)
Click the Load Task Lists and BOMs Icon .
f)
First select the Options Icon , choose the Misc. tab and in the
Navigate while copying section select Set target context after copying
and click Execute.
g)
Select the T-F## routing you wish to copy and click the Copy Object
Icon .
h)
In the Target Data dialog box, enter material number T-H##, plant
1000, task list type N Routing and delete the routing group number.
i)
Select the Multi-level Copy indicator.
Continued on next page
508
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
j)
Click the Copy Range Icon to set the indicators for the relevant copy
objects (select all) in the EWB: Options dialog box.
k)
If you didn’t set it in step b) then in the EWB: Options dialog box, set
the Set target context after copying indicator on the Misc. tab page.
l)
Now copy the routing by clicking the copy button.
m)
Change the lot-size validity in the table to 1-100,000 and scroll to the
right to be sure planner 0## is assigned.
n)
Choose Bills of Material → Items.
o)
In the first open line enter T-P## and quantity 1 and click enter.
p)
Select Mechanical Engineering as the Industry sector and Raw
Material as the Material Type in the dialog box that appears and click
Enter.
q)
Click Cancel on the Select Views dialog box that appears next.
r)
Enter T-T0## as the Copy from material and click Enter.
s)
Select the default views except for the Sales views and add the
Purchasing view since this is a raw material. Also be sure the Create
views selected indicator is set then click Enter.
t)
Enter Plant 1000 and click Enter on the Organization levels dialog box.
u)
Change the description to Raw Material GR##.
v)
Choose Bills of Material → Component Assignments and assign your
new component to operation 40.
w)
Save your data.
x)
Be sure to check the Component Assignments, the PRT assignments,
the BOM Header, and BOM Items.
y)
Exit the Engineering Workbench.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
509
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Display the PRT assignments in the Engineering Workbench.
1.
2.
3.
510
Use the browser to display an overview of the production resources/tools for
pump T-F1## in plant 1000.
a)
Use the menu path Logistics → Production → Master Data →
Engineering Workbench or transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select the P_ALLES working area and click continue.
c)
Enter T-F1## and T-F## as material numbers using the
selection icon.
d)
Click the Load Task Lists and BOMs Icon .
e)
Select the line in the table for the task list header for material T-F1##
and use the EWB menu path Task Lists → Production Resources
and Tools to display an overview of PRT’s assigned to the routing of
T-F1##.
Multiple
Search for the production resource/tool INSP-## in your routings by using
the browser. Navigate to the details screen.
a)
Open the Browser by clicking
showing.
b)
In the left panel Browser window, select Find
c)
In the Find dialog box, select the object type PRT and enter INSP-##.
d)
Double-click the search results (lower window) to select the production
resource/tool in the upper browser screen. Double-click again in the
upper screen to get to the production resource/tools details.
the Browser icon, if its not already
.
You have assigned the hollow shaft to operation 40 in your routing for
material T-F##. Reassign this assignment to operation 45 by using the
browser.
a)
Drill down in the browser structure and reassign the hollow shaft to
operation 45 by clicking and dragging.
b)
Close the browser and exit the EWB without saving.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Navigating in the Engineering Workbench
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Navigate in the engineering workbench
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
511
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
Lesson:
448
TSCM40_I
Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will investigate the work area and how it affects work in the
engineering workbench.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Create a work area
Explain the effect of the work area focus
Explain the effect of objects contained in the work area
Business Example
Users will need specific work areas to allow them to do their jobs efficiently.
You need to understand how to configure work areas to make them efficient for
users in your company.
Work Areas
Work areas are created in Customizing for the engineering workbench. Using
the Display work area button, you can specify a standard work area or select
another work area.
512
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Figure 151: Work Area Selection
In the Select work area dialog box, you also have the option of branching to the
detail screen in the working area. In this detail screen you can read the information
about the predefined focus and about the object types contained in the working
area.
Figure 152: Objects in the Worklist
A focus object is an object of the focus object type that meets the selection criteria
that you enter. An environment object is an object whose object type is contained
in the working environment and that is assigned to a focus object. Environment
objects are automatically selected by the system and represent the environment
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
513
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
of the focus object that you are interested in. Using the selection criteria that
you enter, you immediately determine which focus objects are contained in your
worklist. The focus objects form the core of your worklist.
An example would be loading operations in the worklist by selecting according to
the work center:
•
•
If the focus is set on the operation, then only those operations that use this
work center are read into the worklist.
If the focus is set on the routing header, then the operations that are contained
in the routings are also read into the worklist.
Figure 153: Example: Focus BOM Header
514
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
The focus lies on the object type BOM header. In addition to the focus on the
BOM header, the object types item and subitem, routing header with sequence,
operation, PRT, trigger point, and inspection characteristic should all be contained
in the working environment. A component has been entered as selection criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.
All BOM headers, with their items and subitems, are copied into the worklist
that contains these components.
All task list headers belonging to the BOM headers of these components
are copied in to the worklist.
Additionally, the objects that are connected to the task list header and whose
object type is included in the working environment are also copied into the
worklist.
All component assignments between the items in the BOM headers, and the
operations for the corresponding routings, are copied into the worklist.
Figure 154: Example: Focus BOM Item
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
515
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
The focus lies on the object type item. With the focus on the item, the following
object types should also be included in the working environment: BOM header
and subitem, routing header with sequence, operation, PRT, trigger point, and
inspection characteristic. A component has been entered as selection criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Only the items that correspond to these components, are copied into the
worklist with their BOM headers and subitems.
All operations to which this component has been assigned are copied in
to the worklist.
Additionally, the objects that are connected to this operation and whose
object type is contained in the working environment are copied into the
worklist, for example, task list header, sequence, and so on.
As a further restriction, the material / routing assignment is taken into
account.
Figure 155: Different Focus: BOM
These examples illustrate the expected results of a different focus. The prerequisite
for these results is that the working area always contains the same object types.
The working area (with focus) and the selection criteria can be viewed in the
menu entry Extras:
•
•
516
Working area
Selection criteria
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Figure 156: Different Work Areas: BOM
These examples illustrate the expected results of a different working area. The
prerequisite for these results is that the focus is always on the same focus object.
The working area (with focus) and the selection criteria can be viewed in the
menu entry Extras:
•
•
Working area
Selection criteria
As an example, the focus is defined in reference to the BOM header.
Figure 157: Example: Focus Task List Header
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
517
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
The focus lies on the object type routing header. In addition to the focus routing
header, the object types sequence, operation, PRT, trigger point, inspection
characteristic, BOM header, item, and subitem should all be contained in the
working environment. A work center has been entered as selection criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.
All routing headers are copied with their sequences and operations into the
worklist, provided that one of the operations contains this work center.
Additionally, the objects that are connected to the operation, and whose
object type is included in the working environment, are also copied into
the worklist.
All BOM headers that are assigned to these routing headers are copied into
the worklist.
All objects that are on a lower level to these BOM headers are copied into
the worklist.
All component assignments that are between the operations of the routing
header and the items of the assigned BOM headers are copied into the
worklist.
Figure 158: Example: Focus Operation
518
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
The focus lies on the operation object type. In addition to the focus operation,
the following object types should all be contained in the working environment:
routing header, sequence, PRT, trigger point, inspection characteristic, BOM
header, item, and subitem. A work center has been entered as selection criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.
All objects that are at a higher or lower level than the focus objects covered
by these work center operations are copied into the worklist.
All items that are assigned to these operations, including the component
assignments, are copied into the worklist.
All objects that are on a higher or lower level than these items are copied
into the worklist.
The assignments between routing headers and BOM headers, determined in
steps 1 and 3, are copied into the worklist.
Figure 159: Routing: Different Focus
The figure above illustrates the expected results of the different focus. Prerequisite
for the respective result is that the working area always contains the same object
types. The working area (with focus) and the selection criteria can be viewed by
choosing Extras → Working Area Details → Selection Criteria Details.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
519
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 160: Routing: Different Work Area
The figure above illustrates the expected results of a different working area. A
prerequisite for the respective results is that both examples use the same focus.
The working area (with focus) and the selection criteria can be viewed by choosing
Extras → Working area details → Selection criteria details.
520
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
457
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Exercise 27: Create a Work Area
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a work area for use in the engineering workbench
Business Example
You need to create different work areas for different users in the engineering
workbench.
Task 1:
Create a work area with focus on the BOM header and use it to make a change in
a BOM.
1.
Create a work area called PLM## with focus on the BOM header.
2.
Use your new work area to make a change to the quantity of component 30
of the BOM of T-F##. What is missing in the work area that prevents you
from making this change?
Task 2:
Change your work area to focus on the task list header and include task list header,
operations, and material-routing assignments in the work area. Use you work area
to assign BOM components to an operation on the routing.
1.
Change your work area, PLM##, to focus on the task list header. Include task
list header, operations, and material-routing assignments in the work area.
2.
Use your new work area to assign material components of the BOM of
T-F## to operations. What is missing in the work area to be able to make
this change?
Task 3:
Change your work area to focus on the BOM header and include the master data
items we created in this course. Then test your work area by loading all the data
you created this week.
2010
1.
Change your work area, PLM##, to focus on the BOM header. Include all
master items you created this week.
2.
Use your new work area to load all the master data you created this week.
What is the difference between your work area and the P_ALLES work area
we used previously?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
521
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Solution 27: Create a Work Area
Task 1:
Create a work area with focus on the BOM header and use it to make a change in
a BOM.
1.
2.
Create a work area called PLM## with focus on the BOM header.
a)
In the IMG, choose Production → Basic Data → Engineering
Workbench → Edit Working Areas or use transaction code OP77.
b)
Choose the New entries button.
c)
Enter PLM## as the name of your working area with description Work
Area ##.
d)
In the Focus section, select BOM Header.
e)
In the Contained in Work Area section select BOM Header and choose
Save.
Use your new work area to make a change to the quantity of component 30
of the BOM of T-F##. What is missing in the work area that prevents you
from making this change?
a)
From the main menu, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Engineering Workbench or use transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select your new PLM## working area and choose Continue.
c)
Enter T-F## as the material number.
d)
Choose the Load BOMs icon.
e)
Try to drill down to the item level in the BOM. The browser doesn’t let
you, and the menu path Bills of Material → Items is greyed out.
f)
It is not possible to drill down to the item level because only headers
were included in the work area.
Continued on next page
522
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Task 2:
Change your work area to focus on the task list header and include task list header,
operations, and material-routing assignments in the work area. Use you work area
to assign BOM components to an operation on the routing.
1.
2.
Change your work area, PLM##, to focus on the task list header. Include task
list header, operations, and material-routing assignments in the work area.
a)
In the IMG, choose Production → Basic Data → Engineering
Workbench → Edit Working Areas or use transaction code OP77.
b)
Select your work area, PLM##, and choose Details
c)
In the Focus section, select Header.
d)
In the Contained in Work Area section, select Operations and
everything above it in the list will be automatically selected.
e)
Choose Save.
.
Use your new work area to assign material components of the BOM of
T-F## to operations. What is missing in the work area to be able to make
this change?
a)
From the main menu, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Engineering Workbench or use transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select your new PLM## working area and choose Continue.
c)
Enter T-F## as the material number.
d)
Choose Load Task Lists and BOMs icon.
e)
Select a routing and choose Task Lists→ Component Assignments.
Unfortunately, it is greyed out.
f)
It is not possible to drill down to the item level because BOM items
were not included in the work area.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
523
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Change your work area to focus on the BOM header and include the master data
items we created in this course. Then test your work area by loading all the data
you created this week.
1.
2.
524
Change your work area, PLM##, to focus on the BOM header. Include all
master items you created this week.
a)
In the IMG, choose Production → Basic Data → Engineering
Workbench → Edit Working Areas or use transaction code OP77.
b)
Select your work area, PLM##, and choose Details
c)
In the Focus section, select BOM Header.
d)
In the Contained in Work Area section, select BOM header, Sub-Item,
Component Assignment,, Sub-Operations, PRT, Trigger Point, .
e)
Also in the Group Processing section select BOM and Task Lists.
f)
Choose Save.
.
Use your new work area to load all the master data you created this week.
What is the difference between your work area and the P_ALLES work area
we used previously?
a)
From the main menu, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data
→ Engineering Workbench or use transaction code CEWB.
b)
Select your new PLM## working area and choose Continue.
c)
Select the Additional Selection Criteria icon .
d)
On the Header tab page, choose More Selection Criteria
e)
In the Explorer window that appears, expand the Material to BOM Link
folder by clicking the triangle to the left of it.
f)
Select Created by and choose Copy Selected Items icon.
g)
Complete the field with your user ID and choose Save.
h)
Choose Load BOMs and Task Lists .
i)
Compare this view to the P_ALLES view we used previously.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Engineering Workbench Work Areas
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Create a work area
•
Explain the effect of the work area focus
•
Explain the effect of objects contained in the work area
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
525
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
Lesson:
462
TSCM40_I
Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson we will look at another alternative interface that can be used for
master data maintenance to make it easier for users to work in the SAP ECC
system.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Explain the use of the PLM Web UI.
Navigate in the PLM WEB UI
Maintain master data objects using the PLM Web UI
The PLM Web UI was added as an initiative in PLM 7.0 and is included in EhP4.
It is intended for collaborative environments to control access by various users.
The table locks are like standard SAP functionality and not like the EWB. This
is only an introduction which focuses on master data maintenance. The specific
functionality for DMS, iPPE, and ECM is introduced in PLM100 and covered in
more detail in the respective courses.
Business Example
Your business collaborates on projects to develop new products and improve
existing products with both users from a subsidiary and with external users. You
need to give the project personnel access to master data that only pertains to the
specific project to which they are assigned but you do not want to give them
access to all master data objects. Also since not everyone on the project has the
SAP GUI installed, you need an alternative way to collaborate effectively with
your project personnel.
Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
The PLM Web User Interface works very well in collaborative environments
where you collaborate with internal users of a subsidiary company or with
external users to develop new products or improve existing products. Using this
new interface you can give project members access to only the project data to
which they are assigned. This creates a security level for collaboration that can
526
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
be managed at the project level. And since the PLM Web UI is a web browser
based interface, members of the project team can access and maintain master data
objects in your ECC System using only a web browser.
You can manage the master data objects relevant to SAP PLM on the Web user
interface (Web UI) of SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) including
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Material Master Records
BOM
Document
Change master record
Classification (Tab pages for classes and characteristics are integrated in the
Web UIs of the objects name above.)
Other applications are also available.
Figure 161: Collaboration Internal
You can control access to information on the Web UI at context, user, or role level.
For example, not all users will be allowed to call up all material BOMs even
though they have general authorization to display material BOMs. You can use
access control contexts (ACC) and access control lists (ACL) to tailor user access
to the objects on the PLM Web UI to your requirements.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
527
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 162: Collaboration External
In particular, the Web UI supports you when working with partner enterprises
via the Internet. You can give external users Web access to the data in the PLM
back-end system without allowing them direct access to the back-end system.
The Web UI can be decoupled from the back-end system and installed in a
demilitarized zone (DMZ) outside your corporate firewall.
Access Control Management
The access authorization concept of this component supports business use
cases where a user freely navigates in the SAP PLM system. The users’ access
authorizations determine the objects that they can find and work with. These
scenarios can occur when employees of different subsidiaries are working in the
same SAP PLM system, for example, if external employees share the same office
with internal employees (in an integrated external design team), or trusted external
parties (for example, a supplier, or an engineering service provider) access the
SAP PLM system using the internet.
Collaboration within the intranet of a company
Due to globalization more and more companies are working with subsidiaries
or they work with engineers who are employed by other companies. In some
cases the external engineers work in the same office as the internal employees and
access data through the company’s intranet. This is also true when subsidiaries are
connected to the company’s data through a virtual private network (VPN). Even
in cases when only internal employees are working with an SAP PLM system,
528
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
they should not have access to all data in the system. For example, an automotive
company segregates data that is solely relevant for the Formula One department
from internal employees who have no Formula One-related tasks. Moreover,
business objects in a system (like a material) can be the responsibility of a certain
team, project or department. If a user wants to change a specific material, the
system checks whether the material belongs to the user’s area of responsibility. If
not, the system prevents the user from changing the material.
In all cases, both the internal and external engineers need access to the
information that is necessary for their work. However, due to the protection
of intellectual property they should not have access to information that is not
relevant for their work. Protection of intellectual property applies in particular to
external employees and to employees of subsidiaries that have a lower level of
trustworthiness. We provide a solution for this requirement with this component.
Figure 163: ACC - Direct Access
The concept of Access Control Contexts (ACCs) offers the possibility to define
a context which represents a department or project and contains data (business
objects such as documents, materials, bill of materials and change numbers)
relevant for the department or project. Furthermore a set of specific roles which
define authorized activities for all relevant business objects are assigned to this
context. By assigning users to a context role it possible to grant access only to
the relevant objects in the PLM-backend. All other information will not even be
visible to your partner because it is not assigned to the specific context or the
activity to display/process the information is not granted by context roles. This
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
529
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
approach allows for collaboration with trusted external partners in addition to
proven approach with SAP cFolders an alternative way of collaboration with no
need to replicate data. In addition the access to data in the PLM backend for
internal employees or external employees working in the intranet can be controlled.
Collaboration with business partners accessing data from the extranet
In other cases, the external engineers work in remote locations and use the internet
to access data. The same considerations regarding data security apply as above,
but in addition the level of trust determines what type of software solution we
recommend for collaboration with external parties.
When the level of trust is low, it makes sense that external parties access only
copies of the original objects, as these external parties should not be able to access
the company’s intranet. The copies reside in another system than the originals,
which are stored in the SAP PLM back-end system. We offer Collaboration
Folders (cFolders) to support this approach. For more information, see Design
Collaboration with cFolders. Replication of the relevant data from one system to
a collaboration system and reconciliation of the collaboration data back into the
original system result in significant efforts. These efforts are only justified by the
low level of trust. Therefore, when the level of trust is high and the data volume is
high, the alternative method is preferable: direct controlled access to the original
data in the SAP PLM system.
Figure 164: ACC - Indirect Access
530
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Internal employees can access directly all relevant data in the PLM backend. The
access to this information (e.g.: materials, documents, etc.) is controlled by the
classic SAP authorization concept. To collaborate with your partner your company
uses SAP cFolders. All relevant information is replicated to cFolders so that the
external engineers can access and work with these documents. On a regular basis
all information has to be reconciled to the PLM backend so all parties have a
consistent data basis. Due to this principle it becomes obvious that the replication
and reconciliation of the relevant data cause significant efforts. These efforts are
justified only when the level of trust is low so that you do not allow your partners
access to the PLM backend directly
Direct controlled access to the original data in the SAP PLM system (but only to
data that is relevant for the actual work) is the recommended approach when
collaborating with trusted external parties. We provide a solution for this
requirement with this component.
Control Center
The control center is the central initial screen on the Web UI of SAP PLM and
provides an overview of the objects of different PLM object types you are working
on. It also provides central access to these objects. The information displayed
in the object lists presents the information from the different work centers in
consolidated form. You can also specify default values for the navigation.
Figure 165: PLM Control Center
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
531
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
To access the control center, choose Work Overview in the SAP PLM UI. The
fields which are to appear on the Generic tab page of the Edit Work Environment
window can be specified in Customizing. If you do not make any settings in
Customizing, the settings supplied with the standard system apply.
The following sections appear on the Work Overview screen page:
•
•
•
•
Work Environment - This is where you specify settings and default values
for the Control Center.
Search - You use the search to find individual objects that are not listed and
that you have not yet specified as favorites
My Contexts - This screen area contains the list of access control contexts to
which you are assigned. Depending on your role, you may also display the
individual access control contexts and edit them .
My Objects - This screen area contains lists of your object favorites and the
objects that you recently accessed and changed. You can display or change
all objects directly or display them in the Object Navigator by choosing the
relevant pushbutton on the tab pages. When you click an object, the system
opens it in edit mode.
In the work environment, you can specify default values for certain key fields of
objects to which you want to navigate. The following fields are displayed in the
Work Environment screen area and by choosing Edit Work Environment, you can
specify the values for these fields on the Specific tab page
•
•
•
Change Number Key Date - The key date specifies the date for which the
object is displayed. You can specify whether the key date is the current date,
a date you entered, or the valid-from date of the specified change number.
Plant - If you are using bills of material, the bill of material is displayed in
this plant. If you do not enter a plant, the group BOM applies.
Context - Specifies the access control context, that is, the area whose
business objects can only be accessed by users with a corresponding context
role.
Depending on your Customizing settings, you can specify more default values, for
example the (BOM) usage, on the Generic tab page of the Edit Work Environment
window and you can specify which fields appear on this tab page.
You can personalize the My Objects screen area and hide the tab pages. To show
the tab pages again, you have to define a new query. You can also add your own tab
page using a customer-specific enhancement. There is no limit on the number of
favorites that can be displayed. You can change the query for the last-accessed and
recently-changed objects to specify how many objects the system should display.
You can use the transaction links to call transactions for creating, displaying,
and changing different PLM objects.
532
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Demonstration: PLM Web UI Navigation and Search
Function
Purpose
To show the PLM Web UI accessed through the portal. You will want to show
students some navigation and the search function. The search function is only
available if the PLM Web UI is access through the portal or NetWeaver Business
Client. If students access the functionality through the WebDynPro transactions it
will not be available to them.
System Data
System:
ZTE
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM-##
Password:
initial
Set up instructions:
You may want to change the language to English in
SU01 for the user ID that you use.
1. Access the PLM Web UI using the provided transaction or
http://portal-zte.wdf.sap.corp:50000/irj/portal. This may work by
substituting your system ID for zte in the url. Log in with one of the above
logons.
2010
2.
Click on the PLM Expert tab. Point out the different sections. Since your
user ID is not assigned to any context both the My Context and the My
Objects sections are blank.
3.
In the Work Environment section, click the Edit Work Environment button.
Enter ECN## in the Change Number field and 1000 in the Plant field and
click Save.
4.
In the Search section, click on Advanced Search. A new dialog box will open
and you can enter your User ID in the Created By field to select all objects
that you have created. Click Go to retrieve those objects.
5.
Select all the objects on the results list and choose Additional Functions
-> Add to Favorites.
6.
When you close the Search window, click Refresh at the bottom of the PLM
Favorites tab. The complete list of objects should now appear on that tab.
7.
You can access any of the objects by simply clicking on them. The work
center for that object will appear with the object information.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
533
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Work Center
You use the work centers for the individual objects in SAP Product Lifecycle
Management (SAP PLM) to display predefined object lists with object-specific
information and customer-defined worklists for a particular PLM object type.
The following work centers are available on the SAP PLM Web UI and can be
selected depending on your role:
•
•
•
•
•
Materials
Material BOMs
Documents
Change Management
Object Access (access control contexts)
The different work centers have some functions and screen areas in common.
In addition, the work centers for documents and access control contexts have
some special features. The following functions and screen areas are available in
all work centers:
534
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Figure 166: PLM Work Center
•
•
•
2010
My Materials (or other objects) - The system displays your favorites as
well as the most recently accessed and changed objects, the same as in the
control center. The difference is that the lists in the work center only contain
objects of the object type, for which the work center is defined. The system
also displays object-specific information, such as base unit of measure,
material type, or revision level, in addition to general information.
Personal Object Worklist for Materials (or other objects) - You can
define your own queries, that is, your own worklist in this screen area, which
is supplied as an empty screen area by SAP. You can change and rename the
empty query or you can define a new query. For example, this enables you
to create a worklist which lists all material BOMs with the status Locked.
You can use the Personalize link to delete or rename the tab pages. You
can display or change the objects in the list by choosing the appropriate
pushbutton.
Search and Transaction Links - You use the search to find individual
objects that are not listed and that you have not yet specified as favorites.
You can use the transaction links to call transactions for creating, displaying,
and changing of the object type of the relevant work center.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
535
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Demonstration: Using the Work Center to Change a
BOM with ECM
Purpose
This is to show students how to do the exercise for this lesson. We will use the
ECM number you created earlier in the course and replace a component. In 2
months when you replace the casing you also want to upgrade the screws at the
same time. So component 100-130 will be replaced by T-T3##.
System Data
System:
zte
Client:
800
User ID:
PLM-##
Password:
initial
Set up instructions:
You may want to change the language to English in
SU01 for the user ID that you use.
1. From the Control Center, click on Change Material BOM on the left side.
2.
If you did the previous demo then plant 1000 and change number ECN##
should default. If not, provide that info, enter material T-F##, BOM Usage
Production, and click Start.
3.
Replace component 100-130 with T-T3##. the valid from date should change
according to the ECM validity date.
4.
Click Save and Close.
The PLM Object Navigator
The Object Navigator is a flexible display tool, which provides navigation help for
complex object relations on an integrated user interface. The objects involved can
be related to each other across system boundaries. For individual roles, you can
control access to objects and the composition of the relations involved.
The Object Navigator relationships can be configured in customizing to make it
easier for users to locate the information. This is a display only view of the data
but can be invaluable at locating the information needed.
536
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Figure 167: PLM Object Navigator - Center for User Interaction
Figure 168:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
537
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
The starting point of the object navigator is the central object that you load in the
object navigator. The system displays the objects that are related to the central
object in the views of the object navigator. You can display a complex structure
using the relations that you have defined for a view in the object navigator
Customizing.
Figure 169: PLM Object Navigator
In the object navigator, you can do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Display specific object data (attributes) for the central object and the related
objects
Display relations between objects
Navigate along the breadcrumb trail to related objects or to the central object
Navigate from the central object to related objects via Structure links
Navigate to the object-type-specific applications, such as the display or
change modes
Product Centric View
You can use PCV to easily retrieve product-related information originating from
various internal and external data sources. PCV provides analytical applications
that are embedded and operate within the context of the business application you
are working in. PCV enables you to effectively use analytical capabilities within
the context of business objects, such as materials. The PCV provides one central
location to access all data relating to a product.
538
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Figure 170: Product Centric View
PCV comes delivered with predefined business content for the analysis of
materials. You can enhance this standard content and configure PCV for your
own business needs. Furthermore, you can monitor the configuration and use of
PCV. PCV consists of four components:
•
•
•
•
2010
User Interface - The software layer of PCV that contains visual presentation.
Query Management - The software layer of PCV that processes queries.
Search Integration - The software layer of PCV that contains the integration
of data source searches in PCV. The data is provided to query management
in a unique structure.
Foundation, Monitoring - The software layer of PCV that contains basic
functions for all layers.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
539
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Figure 171: Product Centric View - Side Panel
The side panel contains product data in various forms. Tables, charts, reports of
various kinds and from various sources can be embedded for quick access to
the data needed for decision making. The types of data and reports can be user
specific or role specific.
You can use this function to display additional contextual information for a central
object or selected object. The side panel is not intended for displaying object
details. It provides context-sensitive analytics and supplementary information.
The context is defined by the main application, SAP Product Lifecycle
Management (SAP PLM). You can access the side panel from the work center of
the SAP Product Lifecycle Management Web UI, by choosing Side Panel. The
side panel contains the following tab pages:
•
•
•
540
Previews - Displays previews of query views that you have defined. You can
enlarge the query views that the previews represent in the view area for
further analysis or editing.
Query Views - Displays the list of query views you have defined for the
specific business object you are working with, as well as the SAP predefined
query views for the specific business object.
Dashboards - Displays a list of predefined dashboards. A dashboard displays
product-related information in a single page, allowing you to compare
different data, and easily share information. A dashboard can display a
maximum of nine query views.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Figure 172: Product Dashboard
The data charts and reports can be organized in the Product Dashboard. You can
use this function to get a comprehensive overview on product-related information.
You can display as many as nine query views, which enables you to analyze and
compare data. To access the list of dashboards available for the business object
you are working with, choose the Dashboards tab page in the side panel and click
on the name of the dashboard.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
541
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
542
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
TSCM40_I
2010
TSCM40_I
477
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Exercise 28: Using the PLM Web User
Interface
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Navigate in the PLM Web User Interface
•
Use the search and favorites features of the PLM Web UI
•
Change a BOM using the PLM Web UI
Business Example
Navigate in the PLM WEB UI.
Task 1:
Navigate in the PLM Web User Interface.
1.
Navigate to the PLM WEB UI using the role based menu,
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER and logon using the data below. Set your
work environment to default your Engineering Change Number ECN##,
plant 1000, and Active Context GROUP##.
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
(the password you changed it to in
Exercise 1)
Language
EN (or your choice)
Task 2:
You want to be sure that you begin using the new updated screws at the same
time as you begin using the new casing.
2010
1.
In the material BOM for material T-F## in plant 1000, the casing has already
been replaced with a new material to begin in 2 months. We also want to
change the screws to an updated version at the same time as we make the
change to the casing. Use the same ECN## in the PLM Web UI to replace
component 100-130 with T-T3##.
2.
Display the material master record in the PLM WEB UI.
3.
Display the BOM for material T-F1##Use the PLM WEB UI
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
543
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Solution 28: Using the PLM Web User
Interface
Task 1:
Navigate in the PLM Web User Interface.
1.
Navigate to the PLM WEB UI using the role based menu,
SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER and logon using the data below. Set your
work environment to default your Engineering Change Number ECN##,
plant 1000, and Active Context GROUP##.
Client
800
User
PLM-##
Password
(the password you changed it to in
Exercise 1)
Language
EN (or your choice)
a)
In the role based menu SAP_CA_PLM_DESIGNER use the following
menu path PLMWebUI → Internet NWBC.
b)
Enter the above information from the table and click logon.
c)
In the Work Environment section, click the Edit Work Environment
button. Enter ECN## in the Change Number field, 1000 in the Plant
field, GROUP## in the Active Context field, and click Save.
d)
These defaults should now be visible in the work environment section.
Continued on next page
544
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Introduction to the PLM Web User Interface
Task 2:
You want to be sure that you begin using the new updated screws at the same
time as you begin using the new casing.
1.
2.
3.
2010
In the material BOM for material T-F## in plant 1000, the casing has already
been replaced with a new material to begin in 2 months. We also want to
change the screws to an updated version at the same time as we make the
change to the casing. Use the same ECN## in the PLM Web UI to replace
component 100-130 with T-T3##.
a)
From the Work Overview screen, click on Change Material BOM in
the left panel.
b)
If you did the previous demo then plant 1000 and change number
ECN## should default. If not, provide that info, enter material T-F##,
BOM Usage Production, and click Start.
c)
Replace component 100-130 with T-T3##. the valid from date should
change according to the ECM validity date.
d)
Click Save and Close.
Display the material master record in the PLM WEB UI.
a)
From the Work Overview screen select Display material in the left
panel.
b)
Enter material T-F1##, be sure to delete the ECN number ECN##,
and click Start.
c)
Notice the document that is assigned to the material master is displayed
on the screen. Click Close to exit back to the Work Overview screen.
Display the BOM for material T-F1##Use the PLM WEB UI
a)
From the Work Overview screen select Display material BOM in
the left panel.
b)
Enter material T-F1##, plant 1000, Usage Production, be sure to
delete the ECN number ECN##, and click Start.
c)
In order to check up on sales and quality information use the side panel
viewer by clicking Side Panel in the very upper right of the screen.
d)
The quality, sales, and purchasing data appears. They are empty
because no data has been collected yet.
e)
Click Close to return to the Work Overview screen and exit the PLM
WEB UI.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
545
Unit 10: Alternative User Interfaces
TSCM40_I
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Explain the use of the PLM Web UI.
•
Navigate in the PLM WEB UI
•
Maintain master data objects using the PLM Web UI
546
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Use the engineering workbench for routing maintenance
•
Use the EWB browser functions
•
Navigate in the engineering workbench
•
Create a work area
•
Explain the effect of the work area focus
•
Explain the effect of objects contained in the work area
•
Explain the use of the PLM Web UI.
•
Navigate in the PLM WEB UI
•
Maintain master data objects using the PLM Web UI
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
547
Unit Summary
548
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Unit 11
Appendix
483
These configuration topics are rarely (i. e. only initially) used in the ECC system.
In order to add additional topics of new functionality, this information has been
moved to the appendix. It is optional and should only be covered in someone in the
class is very interested. Students can use these lessons for self study, if required.
Unit Overview
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the process of influencing the field characteristics of the material
master
Describe Process of configuring the screen layout of the material master
Set up a customized material master in Customizing
Test the settings by creating a material master
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM header
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM items
Define default values for work centers
Explain the configuration settings regarding work centers
Create and test work center formulas
Define system settings for routings
Unit Contents
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master ...............................551
Procedure: Setting Up Screen Sequences .............................562
Exercise 29: Material Types, Field Control and Material Status......567
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material.................................574
Exercise 30: Bill of Material Configuration ..............................585
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center .......................................590
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
549
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Exercise 31: Work Center Category and Field Selection Control,
Default Work Center (Optional) ...........................................609
Exercise 32: Optional: Work Center Formulas .........................615
Lesson: Configuring the Routing..............................................622
550
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson:
484
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Configuration of the Material Master
Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about the customized material master record as well
as other check tables. The following aspects of the customized material master
record are explained:
•
•
•
•
Screen sequence
Logical screens
Subscreens
Influencing factors
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
•
Describe the process of influencing the field characteristics of the material
master
Describe Process of configuring the screen layout of the material master
Set up a customized material master in Customizing
Test the settings by creating a material master
Discuss the functions and importance of Material Type decisions. Configuring
screen sequences and customized material master screens is fairly uncommon.
Suggestion is to focus on the configuration of Material type, field selection and
Material Status.
Business Example
As the project lead for implement material master files, you must be aware of the
structural design of the object in SAP ECC. One of the business requirements
your company has is to make certain fields required input before save a material
master. In addition users have commented on the screen the layout of the stand
SAP material master. In this lesson you will learn how to make fields in the
material master required, and acquire a basic understanding of customizing the
layout of the material master.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
551
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Configuration Sequence for Material Master Records
Figure 173: Configuration Sequence for Material Master Records
The abbreviations in the graphic have the following meanings:
•
•
•
M = Required activity (required)
O = Optional activity (optional)
D = Default available for activity (default)
Field Selection
Follow these steps to set field selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
552
Determine the field selection option (hide, and so on).
Determine the control string (material type, and so on).
Determine the field selection group.
Change the control indicator for the field selection group in the corresponding
control string.
Test the change.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Figure 174: Field Selection Procedure
You can find out the table name of a field by using the technical information in
the F1 help.
In Customizing, you can use the table name to help you find the appropriate
field selection group.
Figure 175: Field Selection - Field Selection Group
One or more material master fields are assigned to a field selection group.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
553
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
The field selection option applies to all the fields in the field selection group (for
example, all the fields are required fields).
Hint: Always check first which fields have been assigned to a field
selection group. Do not make changes without consulting the affected
department.
Figure 176: Field Selection - Influencing Factor
A separate control string exists for each of these influencing factors.
Each position in a control string of this kind applies to a specific field selection
group. The field option applies to the entire field selection group and all the master
data contained in it.
You generally use a reference key to specify which control list is valid for an
influencing factor.
You can maintain the reference key for the material type, plant, and industry sector
in the settings menu.
Each position in a control string defines the field selection for a group of material
master record fields. In the settings menu, you can determine to which group the
individual fields are assigned.
554
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Figure 177: Field Selection - Link Rules
Field selection in a material master transaction is generally determined by several
control strings. The entries of all the control strings for the relevant transaction are
linked to one another.
The link rules shown above determine which fields are selected for each group of
material master fields. In order of priority, the signs mean:
- Hide
* Display
+ Required entry
. Optional entry
Field Selection: Procedure
Field Selection: Field Selection Group (OMSR and OMS9)
Show the possible settings in Customizing and the detailed procedure, and add
the newly created field reference to material type MM##, which you created
previously.
... Logistics – General →Material master →Field selection: Assign fields to field
selection groups … Maintain field selection for data screens …
Hint: You can use two transactions for maintaining the field selection
(as of ECC 4.0):
1.
2.
Assign fields to field selection groups (OMSR) and
Maintain field selection for data screens (OMS9)
Both settings can be maintained from transaction Assign fields to field
selection groups (OMSR).
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
555
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
You should demonstrate the detailed procedure – it is also important to point out
that these settings are references. This means that a subsequent change affects all
existing objects.
1.
2.
3.
Which field is to be controlled and how? Use the F1 help to find the name
of the field, and define how to control it. (Hide - Display - Required or
optional entry)
Find the corresponding field reference or create a new field reference with
a template.
Control the field selection group you have just determined accordingly.
Caution: You always control the whole field selection group. This
means that you must consult with the affected user department.
4.
Assign the new field reference to the new material type (MM##) and test
the field control by changing the new material master record.
Field Selection: Influencing Factors and List of Influencing Factors
The field selection references can be assigned in different control tables:
1) Material type (OMS2)
2) Plant (OMSA)
3) Industries (OMS3)
Hint: In addition, the program determines the:
4) Transaction field reference and
5) Procurement type field reference
.
Caution: If you also want to use transaction and procurement type to
control, do not delete these field references. For example: E means
in-house production, MM01 means create material master (general)
immediately.
Field Selection: Link Rules
Explain the link rules, because 1-several field references are always linked. The
highest priority is determined when linking. This means the field references
are read per field group and the highest priority becomes effective. The field
references are linked with or –> the highest priority (lowest number) that appears
is set. Order of priority – whereby the lowest number represents the highest
priority (each priority is represented internally with an alphanumeric character):
556
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
1)
Hide
-
(Minus sign)
2)
Display
*
(Multiplication sign)
3)
Required entry
+
(Plus sign)
4)
Optional entry
.
(Period)
Demonstration for the Field Selection
Change material master record T-F1## and, in the basic data, use the F1 help, then
technical information to display the names of the two fields:
Old material number: MARA-BISMT
Material status (cross-plant): MARA-MSTAE
Both tables and fields names are in the technical information in the group box:
Field description for batch input.
Call transaction OMSR.
Customizing→ Logistics – General →Material master →Field selection: Assign
fields to field selection groups
In the Sort and position group box, choose the pushbutton Field name (position on
field name). Enter the field name for the old material number (MARA-BISMT).
The Sel.Group column contains the corresponding field selection group = 11.
Repeat this for the field Material status (cross-plant) (MARA-MSTAE) –> Field
selection group = 155.
Hint: It is always the field selection group that you control – not the
individual field.
The old material number (MARA-BISMT) contains no further fields in field
selection group 11.
The cross-plant material status (MARA-MSTAE) in field selection group 155
also contains the Date field, from which the cross-plant material status is valid
(MARA-MSTDE).
Demonstration with the field: Planned delivery time in days (EINE-APLFZ) in
field selection group 190 – example showing that not just one field is controlled.
The setting (control) of field selection groups can be done as follows:
1.
2.
2010
Next to column Sel. Group, you can go directly to field selection
maintenance (direct link between transaction OMSR and OMS9) without
leaving transaction OMSR.
Exit transaction Assign Fields to Field Selection Groups (OMSR) and start
transaction Maintain Field Selection for Data Screens (OMS9).
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
557
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Advantage of solution 1:
Since you select the field you want to change first, this field selection group is
displayed immediately.
Copy (F6) field selection reference FERT to your new field reference Z00 and
set the fields as follows:
Old material number
MARA-BISMT
Required entry
Material status (cross-plant)
MARA-MSTAE
Required entry
Assign the new field reference Z00 to your material type MM00 and create a new
material with your new material type T-A00.
Customizing the Material Master
You can structure the material master according to your company’s requirements:
•
•
•
You can remove screens, which are not required, from the screen sequence.
You can create your own screens, by adding or deleting screen modules.
You can influence individual fields in the screen modules.
Figure 178: Customized Material Master (1)
Customized material master records support efficient data maintenance by letting
you create entry screens that suit your company’s data requirements. The material
master record is a set of logical screens which appear in a specific sequence if
more than one view is selected. This is referred to as a screen sequence.
558
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Each logical screen consists of several related field groups. In ECC these are
referred to as subscreens. The fields assigned to each screen module cannot be
changed in Customizing.
In Customizing for the material master, you can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create and maintain screen sequences
Maintain logical screens
Maintain the order of logical screens in a screen sequence
Determine which subscreens appear on which logical screens
Assign influencing factors for field selection to a screen sequence
Assign a user or user group to a screen sequence
Preset the default organization level, default industry sector, and logical
screens for a user or group of users
The views of the material master record correspond to the logical screens in
Customizing. The logical screen is the visible data screen.
There are main screens (maximum of 29), additional screens (maximum of 15)
and other screens (non-configurable, for example, initial screens).
The additional screens are assigned to the main screen using the PB## function
codes (this corresponds to the name of the pushbutton in the Screen Painter).
The secondary screens can be added to the additional data screens with automatic
numbering (maximum of 15 additional screens including secondary screens).
Figure 179: Screen Sequence
A screen sequence consists of logical screens (views) and secondary screens.
The sequence of the screens can be specified for each screen sequence.
You can define a screen sequence to suit your requirements.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
559
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Figure 180: Subscreens
A logical screen (view) consists of several screen modules. It consists of a
subscreen container where you can enter several subscreens (maximum of 6).
Standard screen modules (SAPLMGDI) have exactly one frame that can contain
up to 10 lines and they have exactly 83 columns.
You are free to choose the sequence of the screen modules.
You can vary the number of subscreens for each logical screen.
Subscreens from different logical screens can be grouped together on one screen.
The maintenance status of the screen module fields must be the same as the
maintenance status of the logical screen. You may have to extend the status of the
logical screen in Customizing.
Changes to a logical screen are saved in the screen sequence that is changed. This
means that if you change the structure of MRP 1 in sequence 99, this change is
only effective in sequence 99.
560
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Figure 181: Topic Summary: Customized Material Master
When creating your own logical screens we recommend that you use the standard
subscreens that are already available.
You will need your own subscreens if different field groups or new fields are
required.
To create your own subscreens, copy standard program SAPLMGD1 to its own
function group (for instructions, see the IMG). Then create the required subscreen
in the new function group.
Append structures have been defined in DDIC for including your own fields.
You can only include fields from user-specific tables and user-specific subscreen
containers in program SAPLMGMM by using modifications.
Before you configure your own material master record dialogs, be sure to read
the IMG.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
561
Unit 11: Appendix
492
TSCM40_I
Setting Up Screen Sequences
1.
Set up a customized screen sequence Y# (where # equals 1 to U for groups
01 to 30) for material master maintenance.
Use screen sequence 21, Std ind.(short) tab pages as a template for your
screen sequence Y#, screen sequence GR ##.
2.
From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools→ Customizing→ IMG
→ Edit project (transaction SPRO).
Choose Display SAP Reference IMG (= F5).
Choose Logistics general → Material master →Configuring material master
records → Define structure of the data screens for each screen sequence.
3.
In the dialog structure for maintaining screen sequences, data screens, and
subscreens, copy screen sequence 21 with all its dependent entries to your
new screen sequence Y#. Save the screen sequence.
In the Screen Sequences view, select 21.
Choose Copy As (= F6).
Y# screen sequence group ##
Choose Enter.
Wait! Approximately 3000 dependent objects are copied.
Choose Save.
4.
Select your new screen sequence Y# and double-click on Data screens to go
to the dialog structure. Select the data screen Basic data 2 (Screen: 08 ) and
double-click on subscreens to go to the subscreens. Select module 2010 and
choose Delete (Shift+F2). Return to the data screen view.
5.
The data screen 29 (MRP 4) should be adjusted. Simulate the screen first,
and then delete all subscreens except:
1005
Material number
2502
Control repetitive manufacturing
2504
Discontinuation control.
You should use the subscreen procurement (2484) from the data screen 27
(material requirements planning 2). Simulate your changes.
Select data screen MRP 4 (screen 29) and display the subscreens. Display
the subscreens by clicking Data screen view. (Leave view using Exit.)
Select and delete all subscreens except1005, 2502, and 2504.
Continued on next page
562
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Overwrite the first subscreen 0001 ( = sequence number 4) with that of
procurement 2484 from screen 27.
Simulate the changed screen: Data screen view.
Save your changes.
6.
Delete data screen 27 (MRP 2) from your screen sequence.
Go back to the Data screens view again, select the MRP 2 (screen 27) screen
and delete it with all its dependent entries.
Approximately 92 dependent objects are deleted.
Choose Save.
7.
Change your screen sequence ## so that the data screens appear in the
following sequence:
1. Screen
Basic data
2. Screen
MRP 4
3. Screen
Work scheduling
4. Screen
Storage location stock
5. Screen
Classification
The rest of the sequence following these data screens should remain
unchanged.
Under Maintain Order of Main and Additional Screens, select your screen
sequence number and click the Details icon or double-click on the new
screen sequence.
Change the order according to the task.
MRP 4
140 –> 11
Work scheduling
160 –> 12
Storage location stock
280 –> 13
Classification
30 –> 14
Choose Sort Main Screens (renumbering) and save the new sequence.
8.
The screen sequence should be effective for your user. Define a screen
reference for your user and determine a new list of influencing factors.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
563
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
In Screen sequences for users / material types / transactions /assign industry
sectors, display the step Screen reference user. Maintain a new entry. Use the
user name that you used to log on to the system and assign an abbreviation
to it. For example, Y# (the same abbreviation as the new screen sequence).
Choose Save.
Under Controlling screen sequence, create a new string (New entries) or
copy the existing control string with the screen sequence 21 as a template,
and enter the following values:
SRef: trans.
01
ScrRef.User
The user reference you created (F4
help if saved previously)
ScrRef. matl type
*
ScrRef. industry
*
Scr.sq
The screen sequence number you
created (input help)
Save your changes.
9.
Check your settings by displaying material master T-F1##.
Check your settings as described in the exercise.
General Check Tables for the Material Master Record
Figure 182: Other Check Tables for the Material Master Record
564
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
The material master contains a series of fields that are checked against other tables.
These tables must be set up before you create material master records.
Hint: In addition to the check tables listed above, there are also check
tables for which no hard check is performed. In other words you need
not necessarily make an entry in Customizing. Here you can make entries
that were not made available previously. However, these entries do not
update the Customizing table: For example basic material in basic data 2.
General Check Tables for the Material Master Record
Show the Customizing directory where the check tables are maintained.
Point out that not all check tables are hard check tables. For example, the table
for basic materials is not a hard check table – you can also enter values that are
not maintained in Customizing.
The material group, for example, is a hard check table → values must be
maintained in Customizing first:
Customizing → Logistics – General →Settings for key fields: Define material
groups (Transaction:OMSF)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
565
Unit 11: Appendix
566
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
497
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Exercise 29: Material Types, Field Control
and Material Status
Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create a new material type
•
Set up a new field selection for your new material type and a new material
status
Business Example
A new material type is needed in plant 1000. Because the old material number
from the legacy system is very important, it is to be turned into a required entry in
SAP ECC. A new material status should only allow the maintenance of BOMs
with a warning message.
Task 1:
Add a new material type MA## (## = group number).
1.
As a template, use the material type for the finished product FERT. Change
the description of a new material type in group ##. Save the newly created
material type before processing further.
Account assignment is to be according to account category reference 0009,
the same as for material type FERT.
2.
Note the following specifications for the new material type:
- External and internal purchase orders are allowed.
- Externally assigned material numbers should not be checked against a
number range.
- Cost estimate with quantity structure (BOM, routing) is allowed.
For materials of this material type, the following views are allowed to be
maintained: Work scheduling, accounting, classification, MRP, purchasing,
costing, basic data, storage, plant stocks, and storage location stocks.
In all plants (valuation areas) the quantities and values for materials of
this material type should be updated.
The valuation of all materials of this material type should be binding (that
means not changeable) according to the valuation procedure moving
average price.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
567
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Check the number assignment for materials of your material type.
1.
Make sure that the number assignment for materials of your material type
MA## uses the same number range group as for the template material type
FERT.
Task 3:
Material type MA## is used for the finished products that are copied from an
external system. The following material fields are to be required fields for material
type MA##:
Material description
Field name complete
Old material number
(MARA-BISMT)
Material status (cross-plant)
(MARA-MSTAE)
You can see the data for the individual fields that you want to change by using
the field help (F1 or Help icon) and choosing the Technical Information button or
the Technical Information icon.
568
1.
To which field selection group do these fields belong?
2.
When you create a new material master record using the copy function,
are the contents of the fields copied?
3.
What other fields belong to these groups?
4.
Copy the field selection reference Z## with reference FERT, and define the
fields mentioned above as required fields at the same time.
5.
Now assign the field selection reference Z## to your material type MA##.
6.
Test your setting by creating a material T-A## with material type MA##
(basic data views 1 and 2 only and work scheduling for plant 1000). The old
material number for this material is your choice. Use material status 02
on valid-from date <today>.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Solution 29: Material Types, Field Control
and Material Status
Task 1:
Add a new material type MA## (## = group number).
1.
As a template, use the material type for the finished product FERT. Change
the description of a new material type in group ##. Save the newly created
material type before processing further.
Account assignment is to be according to account category reference 0009,
the same as for material type FERT.
a)
Creating a new material type:
From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools→ Customizing→ IMG
→ Edit project (SPRO).
Choose Display SAP Reference IMG (F5).
Choose Logistics general → Material master →Basic settings →
Material types → Define attributes of material types.
Select material type FERT.
Click Copy (F6).
2.
Note the following specifications for the new material type:
- External and internal purchase orders are allowed.
- Externally assigned material numbers should not be checked against a
number range.
- Cost estimate with quantity structure (BOM, routing) is allowed.
For materials of this material type, the following views are allowed to be
maintained: Work scheduling, accounting, classification, MRP, purchasing,
costing, basic data, storage, plant stocks, and storage location stocks.
In all plants (valuation areas) the quantities and values for materials of
this material type should be updated.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
569
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
The valuation of all materials of this material type should be binding (that
means not changeable) according to the valuation procedure moving
average price.
a)
Check all points according to the task set, and change if necessary:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name
Description
Internal/external order = 2
User department (like FERT, but without forecast, QM, warehouse
management, and sales)
Quantity/value update: 1 flag each
Valuation: Price ctrl mandatory
Task 2:
Check the number assignment for materials of your material type.
1.
Make sure that the number assignment for materials of your material type
MA## uses the same number range group as for the template material type
FERT.
a)
In Customizing, choose Logistics general → Material master → Basic
settings → Material types → Define number range for each material
type.
Choose Change groups (F6).
Your material type should already be assigned to group 1 (the same as
FERT). If not, select material type MA##, select the group to which
material type FERT belongs and choose Assign element / group (F5).
You may want to display the assigned number ranges here, too: choose
Maintain (Shift+F5).
Continued on next page
570
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Task 3:
Material type MA## is used for the finished products that are copied from an
external system. The following material fields are to be required fields for material
type MA##:
Material description
Field name complete
Old material number
(MARA-BISMT)
Material status (cross-plant)
(MARA-MSTAE)
You can see the data for the individual fields that you want to change by using
the field help (F1 or Help icon) and choosing the Technical Information button or
the Technical Information icon.
1.
To which field selection group do these fields belong?
a)
Setting fields as required entry: First you determine the numbers of the
field selection groups. For this, choose Logistics general → Material
master → Field selection: Assign fields to field selection groups in
Customizing.
Field selection groups (search by field name)
MARA-BISMT: 11
MARA-MSTAE: 155
2.
When you create a new material master record using the copy function,
are the contents of the fields copied?
a)
The contents of the fields is copied on creation, because the reference
indicator (default field content) is set.
Select the field and click on Detail or double-click on the field names.
3.
What other fields belong to these groups?
a)
Display the field selection maintenance in field group maintenance.
Find these fields in the Field groups table:
MARA-BISMT: 11
MARA-MSTAE: 155
Choose the Field selection maintenance icon (or corresponding
pushbutton in the right-hand column).
There are no more fields for field selection group 11.
Group 155 includes the field MARA-MSTDE (date from which the
cross-plant material status is valid).
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
571
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
4.
Copy the field selection reference Z## with reference FERT, and define the
fields mentioned above as required fields at the same time.
a)
In Customizing, use the menu path Logistics general → Material
master → Field Selection → Maintain Field Selection for Data Screens
or click the Field sel. maint. button in the previous exercise.
b)
Copy a field selection reference with the new name Z## and set it up
so that the fields named above are displayed as required entries. As
a template, use the field selection reference for the finished product
FERT.
Select the line FERT and copy it to Z## (choose Edit → Copy as, or
corresponding pushbutton, or F6).
Name
Z##
Line 11
Required entry
Line 155
Required entry
Enter and save.
5.
Now assign the field selection reference Z## to your material type MA##.
a)
Assign the field selection reference Z## to the material type MA##,
while you assign the field selection Z## to the material type.
In Customizing, choose Logistics general → Material master → Basic
settings → Material Types → Define attributes of material types and
then Change.
The field reference is Z## instead of FERT.
6.
Test your setting by creating a material T-A## with material type MA##
(basic data views 1 and 2 only and work scheduling for plant 1000). The old
material number for this material is your choice. Use material status 02
on valid-from date <today>.
a)
572
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Material Master →
Material → Create (general) → Immediately.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Material Master
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the process of influencing the field characteristics of the material
master
•
Describe Process of configuring the screen layout of the material master
•
Set up a customized material master in Customizing
•
Test the settings by creating a material master
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
573
Unit 11: Appendix
Lesson:
504
TSCM40_I
Configuration of the Bill of Material
Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes
Lesson Overview
This lesson discusses the detailed configuration of the bill of material.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM header
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM items
Discuss the various config options for BOM’s.
Business Example
As the project lead for implementing bills of material, you must be aware of the
structural design of the object in SAP ECC. In doing so, you will learn how the bill
of material is structured to integrate with several business areas in your company.
Your company has requirements to use bills of material for costing, engineering
and production. To support these integrated functions, you must be aware of what
configuration options are available to your company.
The BOM Header: Defining Modification Parameters
You can do the following by making the corresponding settings in the modification
parameters:
•
•
•
•
Control the validity of a bill of material
Allow or disallow technical types for bills of material
Maintain the settings for items
Make general BOM settings
In the group box for validity, engineering change management (history
requirement) for bills of material is defined. The low date setting means that the
BOM validity is set to the earliest processing date when it is created by the
574
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
system, that is, 01.01.1900. The low date cannot be changed. The valid-from date
is a default value and can be changed by the user. If the low date is not activated
(checkbox blank), the system proposes today’s date as the valid-from date.
The technical types multiple BOM and variant BOM can be deactivated. In other
words, no maintenance of bills of technical BOM types M and V is possible.
In BOM items, you can use the explosion type of a BOM item to display by
validity and define which text is displayed for a variable-size item.
In the general settings, the base unit of measure is defined for BOM headers of
special BOM categories, such as equipment BOM and document structure, and
for special item categories. In addition, you can activate the CAD interface for
bills of material (material BOMs only).
Define Modification Parameters
Show the possible settings in Customizing (OS27). Here, focus on the following:
•
•
Settings for ECM (first black apart from “low data”, “header”, “handling
deletion flag”, for this “item explosion type”)
Switching off technical types
BOM Default Settings
Default values for the BOM header and settings for variable-size items are defined
in Customizing:
•
•
•
Base quantity for bill of material
BOM status
Unit of measure for size and number of variable-size items
The following default values can be defined by the user or preset in Customizing:
•
•
•
•
Item increment
Item category
Material provision indicator
Various BOM reporting options
You can use default values to organize data entry effectively.
Each user can also define their own default values to optimize or simplify data
entry. However, this requires specific authorization. Alternatively, these settings
can be defined for a user in Customizing.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
575
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
BOM Default Settings
Show the possible settings in Customizing
General default values (OS28):
... Customizing for Bills of Material → Control Data …
User-Specific Default Values (OS29):
... Customizing BOMs →
or
in SAP Easy Access Menu ... → ... BOMs → Environment → Current Settings
or
in CS01 or CS02 initial screen Settings → Current Settings
Hint: Change the user-specific default values for “DUMMY” so that
they are very different from the settings for the exercise. (For example,
delete all item categories)
Configuration Sequence BOMs, BOM Status, BOM
Item Status
The abbreviations in the graphic have the following meanings:
M = Mandatory activity (must)
O = Optional activity (optional)
D = Default available for activity (default)
576
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Figure 183: Sequence for Customizing Bills of Material
Hint: When defining the BOM usage, the next step must be checking and
maintaining the settings for default values for item status.
At BOM header level, the department or person responsible and the history
requirement for bills of material can be defined. When you process a bill of
material with history requirement activated an additional authorization object
is checked (C_STUE_NOH). If this authorization is assigned to a user, the user
can change bills of material that have a history requirement without a change
master record.
The object types for BOM items may not be changed.
The user-specific settings can be defined in Customizing for each user – with a
high administrative overhead – or each user maintains their own user-specific
settings in the master data functions for bills of material.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
577
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Figure 184: BOM Status and BOM Item Status
The BOM status controls BOM processing in different application areas. When
you configure your system in Customizing under Bill of Material → Define BOM
Status, you define the statuses for different indicators that allow or disallow
BOM processing. Examples: BOM A: A BOM with status 1 can be exploded in
MRP and released for a planned order. BOM B: A BOM with status 2 cannot be
exploded in MRP or released for a planned order.
When you configure your system in Customizing (Bill of Material → BOM usage
→ Define BOM usages), you define which item statuses are allowed or disallowed
for each BOM usage (general setting is valid for all items). Fine-tuned control
is defined for each individual item. You can define item status fields as required,
optional, or disallowed for a specific application area in your company.
Hint: When defining the BOM usage, the next step must be checking and
maintaining the settings for default values for item status.
Sequence for Customizing Bills of Material
The points listed here are covered in detail in the following slides.
The Customizing settings that are delivered are adequate for a substantial range of
purposes. Do not spend time on the difference between D and K at this point.
BOM Status and BOM Item Status
578
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
BOM status:
•
•
•
Here you might want to create a status with partial release
Distribution lock for ALE
Status 3 – Show history requirement (corresponding Customizing item)
Focus on: BOM Usage
Based on this:
•
Permissible material types for bills of material
•
•
–
Priority 1 = Usage & material type specified
–
Priority 2 = Usage specified
–
Priority 3 = Material type specified
–
Priority 4 = Nothing specified
Default values for item status
Copy default for item status
Demonstration of BOM Status, BOM Usage, and Item Status
Show all the Customizing tables and make entries (optional).
Hint: Change the Material Types Allowed for BOM Header so that the
existing entries for specified BOM usage are deleted and replaced by
the line:
–>
*
*
+
.
The restriction * INTR - is effective only if you do this.
And the exercise only works if you do this.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
579
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Alternative Determination
Figure 185: Alternative Determination
Alternative selection for cases where several alternative BOMs exist can be
controlled dependent on material/plant/usage and an alternative with validity date.
It can also be controlled by other applications, such as the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
BOM explosion in general
Inventory management
Engineering
Production
Costing
Maintenance and so on.
In addition, you can specify a selection ID that decides the sequence in which the
system searches for bills of material if several bills of material have been created
for one material with different usages. For this purpose, a selection ID with a
selection priority is maintained for each BOM usage. The selection priority is
entered as a number, whereby the lowest number has the highest priority.
580
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Alternative Determination
Explain:
•
•
•
•
Order of priority (mention that this is similar in routings)
BOM applications
Alternative determination for multiple BOMs
Using one or two examples, alternative determination in related application
areas (such as MRP and production)
Variable-Size Item/ Item Category “R” Variable-Size
Item with Formula for a Cylinder
Enter this item category to represent parts of a material of different sizes under
one material number.
On the detail screen: After entry, the system calculates variable-size quantity of
the material consumed by the component usage.
Figure 186: Variable-Size Item with Formula for a Cylinder
Advantages:
•
•
MRP can be executed by exploding the BOM without any additional work
steps.
You do not have to create a separate material master for each size.
Entering a formula for variable-size item calculation also enables complex
calculations.
In Customizing for item data, you can define your own formulas and assign them
when creating new variable-size items.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
581
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Caution: You can only use the variables ROMS1 – ROMS3, the constant
pi, and the operators +, -, *, and /.
If no formula key is entered, the following formula is used:
•
•
•
Size 1 for lengths
Size 1 * Size 2 for areas
Size 1 * Size 2 * Size 3 for volumes
Variable-Size Item / Item Category: R
Variable-Size Item with Formula for a Cylinder
Customizing Item Categories → next graphic
Demonstrate the example: of a cylinder jacket and demonstrate the effect in a
BOM item of category R with material 100-700.
Item Categories
The following item categories are defined in the standard system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
582
Stock item
Non-stock item
Variable-size item
Text item
Document item
PM structure element
Class item
Intramaterial (PP-PI)
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Figure 187: Item Categories
The item category controls:
•
•
•
•
•
Whether a material must, can, or cannot be entered
Whether quantities can be negative or positive or both
Whether quantities can be negative or positive or both
Whether subitems are allowed
Which item detail screens (ItmCtrl) are required for specific item categories.
Example: A variable-size item requires variable-size item data.
Item Categories
Explain the Customizing steps:
•
•
•
Define item categories
Define object types
Allowed material types for BOM items
–
–
–
–
2010
Priority 1 = Usage specified
Priority 2 = Usage not specified & material type header specified
Priority 3 = Usage not specified & material type header not specified &
material type for item specified
Priority 4 = Nothing specified
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
583
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
On the item detail screen of BOM maintenance, show the tab pages:
•
•
Basic data
Status/Long text
The participants should be familiar with the fields from course PLM110 –
otherwise you may want to explain them briefly. (Caution: Time)
Most of the fields are just flags.
The other fields, except for the time and date fields, have Customizing settings.
The tables can be shown in Customizing:
For basic data:
•
•
•
Distribution key
Explosion type
(Special procurement types)
For status/long text:
•
•
•
•
584
Spare part indicator (purely selective indicator)
Relevancy to sales
(Relevancy to costing (all values here same meaning))
Material provision indicator
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
511
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Exercise 30: Bill of Material Configuration
Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Set the status, application and use of a BOM
•
Set up default values for a user
Business Example
You must adapt the BOM management of your SAP ECC to suit the requirements
of your company and users.
Task 1:
When configuring bills of material by defining modification parameters, what is
the effect if you change the modification parameters for BOMs by selecting the
following checkboxes?
1.
Effectivity (validity): Low date
2.
Technical type: Mult. BOM inactive
Task 2:
You need to maintain user-specific default values for your user.
1.
Set the default settings for your user so that the item increment is 8. Item
category L is the default setting when you create a material item and
category D when you create a document item.
2.
Test the user-specific settings by changing your material BOM T-F## in
plant 1000 with usage 1.
Task 3:
Define BOM usage.
1.
With usage Universal, which fields are required fields?
Task 4:
In which order of priority are bills of material (BOM usages) selected according to
the selection ID stored for BOM application PP01 (production general)?
2010
1.
Which selection ID does the BOM application PP01 use?
2.
What is the order of priority of BOM usages?
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
585
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Solution 30: Bill of Material Configuration
Task 1:
When configuring bills of material by defining modification parameters, what is
the effect if you change the modification parameters for BOMs by selecting the
following checkboxes?
1.
Effectivity (validity): Low date
a)
In Customizing choose Production → Basic data → Bill of material →
Control data for bills of material→ Define modification parameters.
Select validity. low date checkbox and press F1 (help).
When BOMs are created or edited, the default date is the earliest
processing date defined in the system: 01.01.1900.
2.
Technical type: Mult. BOM inactive
a)
In Customizing choose Production → Basic data → Bill of material →
Control data for bills of material→ Define modification parameters.
Select technical type: multiple BOM inactive checkbox and press F1
(help).
No multiple BOMs can be maintained in ECC; in other words, you
cannot maintain alternatives for an existing bill of material.
Continued on next page
586
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Task 2:
You need to maintain user-specific default values for your user.
1.
Set the default settings for your user so that the item increment is 8. Item
category L is the default setting when you create a material item and
category D when you create a document item.
a)
Set up the default values for a user in Customizing: choose Production
→ Basic data → Bill of material → Define user-specific settings.
Caution: The same settings can be maintained by the user
in the application for creating or changing a bill of material,
provided that the user has the authorization for this. On the
Change/Display Material BOM initial screen, choose Settings
→ Current settings. You can also get to the default values from
the SAP Easy Access screen: choose Production → Master
data → Bills of material → Environment → Current settings
→ User-specific settings (transaction OS29).
Highlight the settings for an existing user.
Click Copy As
Replace existing user with your user ID.
Choose Enter
2.
. Make the appropriate changes and choose Save.
Test the user-specific settings by changing your material BOM T-F## in
plant 1000 with usage 1.
a)
Change the BOM T-F##.
Choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material →
Bill of Material → Material BOM → Change.
Results: Item increments for all subsequent new items are set at
intervals of 8. For material items, item category L is proposed; for
document items, item category D is proposed.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
587
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Task 3:
Define BOM usage.
1.
With usage Universal, which fields are required fields?
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Bill of material
→ General data → BOM usage → Define BOM usage.
When universal is used, no field is set as mandatory because all fields
with „ , „ are optional entries, except PM relevancy, which cannot be
entered.
Task 4:
In which order of priority are bills of material (BOM usages) selected according to
the selection ID stored for BOM application PP01 (production general)?
1.
Which selection ID does the BOM application PP01 use?
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Bill of material
→ Alternative determination → Define applications.
Results: PP01 uses selection ID 01.
2.
What is the order of priority of BOM usages?
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Bill of material →
Alternative determination → Define order of priority for BOM usages.
The order of priority of the SelID 01 (selection ID) is:
1 (Production)
3 (Universal)
2 (Engineering/design)
Example: If a material has several bills of material with different
usages (one internal BOM number for each usage), the system searches
for a production BOM first, then for a universal BOM, and then for an
engineering/design BOM.
588
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuration of the Bill of Material
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM header
•
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM items
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
589
Unit 11: Appendix
Lesson:
516
TSCM40_I
Configuring the Work Center
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about the work center category, the field selection
control, and the default work center.
You will also learn how to configure scheduling, including the formulas, standard
value keys, and the corresponding check tables.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
•
•
Define default values for work centers
Explain the configuration settings regarding work centers
Create and test work center formulas
[Enter a description of what the instructor should discuss with the participants
about the context of the lesson. ]
Business Example
Your company has set some requirements that certain fields in the work center be
made required entries in order to save a work center. As the project team member
responsible for implementing work centers in SAP ERP, r. you must become
familiar with how to configure the work center.
Work Center Integration
(Where can the operation be integrated at the work center?)
Control key
The control key controls for which activities an operation is permitted. The control
key can be maintained in the work center and, provided the reference indicator is
not set, can be overwritten in the operation.
Showcase for the control key
Control key as a required field for the process –> maybe show
Control key can originate from work center –> maybe show in plan maintenance
590
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Show control key in work center incl. reference indicator
Show the selection of the control key in work center maintenance or routing
maintenance
Show pushbutton Choose
Show pushbutton Detailed information
Show the control key in Customizing and explain.
You do not need a new control key.
Work Center
Work Center Data
Like the material master, the work center is made up of several subscreens.
This course explains only the subscreens that are most important for routing
management. The most important fields are presented on the slide.
The work center is plant specific and can be used in the routings if the subscreens
have not all been maintained yet. However, for production orders, it is mandatory
to assign cost centers and activity types.
Demonstration for Creating Work Centers
CR03
For the slide on work center data, use work center 2050 /plant 1000 to explain the
most important fields for maintaining operations.
CR01
For work center DEMO12 /plant 1000, create the basic data screen only using
work center category 0001. Briefly explain the structure and point out default
values. Exit without saving.
Work Center Category
The work center category is the central control element for work center
maintenance.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
591
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Figure 188: Configuring Work Centers: Work Center Category
You use the task list application to define which departments can use the work
center.
If you activate creation of change documents, you can trace changes to the work
center.
You can assign a user status profile to the work center category. To maintain a
user status profile, use transaction BS02.
You can also use the work center category to control the color in which a work
center is shown in a hierarchy graphic.
Field selection control lets you define, field-by-field, which fields are ready for
input, display only, highlighted, or hidden.
The order of the screens can be specified for each work center category by using
screen sequence control.
The default work center makes work center maintenance easier and can be
defined per plant and work center category.
Configuring Work Centers - Work Center Category
Hint: A color can be assigned to each work center category for the
hierarchy graphic (as of R/3 4.6).
Demonstration for Creating Work Center Categories
As in the exercise:
592
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Work center category
PL99
Description
Demo Category 99
Task list application
only P (=routing for production,
standard routing)
Color
RED_8
To test this, create work center TEST99 using the new work center category.
=> maximum views
no default values
Fill mandatory fields only (name only) and assign work centerhierarchy 1000
(plant 1000) to work center 1100.
And:
Goto →Hierarchy →Hierarchy graphic
Save.
Work Center Configuration: Screen Control
You can define a separate screen sequence for each work center category. Several
work center categories can use the same screen sequence.
Figure 189: Configuring Work Centers: Screen Control
The screen sequence controls which views are to appear in which order, and which
views are required for checking the routing.
The screen sequence always starts with the basic data. The basic data is always
mandatory.
All other screens can be selected as and when required, can be numbered and
sorted in any order, and can be mandatory if you so decide.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
593
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
The structure of screens (for example, the subscreens) cannot be influenced by
Customizing (as is possible for the material master record).
Note: Mandatory data: This indicator is relevant to the check work center
function in work center maintenance only. If you have not yet processed
a screen of the work center and execute the Check work center function,
you see one of the following messages:
“Data is still to be maintained”, if the indicator for the screen is set.
“Data should still be maintained”, if the indicator for the screen is not set.
Configuring Work Centers – Screen Control
Use the demonstration to explain:
"Obligatory data" see notes
Demonstration of Screen Control
Screen control for work center category PL99
1 Basic Data
2 Default values
4 Scheduling
6 Capacities
Test:
CR02: Work center TEST99 => No effect
CR01: New work center of category PL99 => No effect (exit without saving)
Assign screen control to work center category PL99
Test:
CR02: Work center TEST99 => It works – there are only four tab pages
CR01: New work center of category PL99 => It works (exit without saving)
Work Center Configuration: Field Control
You can define a separate field control for each work center category. Several
work center categories can use the same field selection.
594
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Figure 190: Configuring Work Centers: Field Selection Control
The field control is defined for each screen of the work center.
For each screen, you see the fields for which you can set the display.
You can define the setting for each field as general, meaning the same for all
work center categories. You can also define this specifically for one work center
category, meaning . for one type of field selection.
You can produce a list of the settings for each field.
You can define the following settings for a field:
•
•
•
•
•
Hide completely
Display only (here, for example, fix the field contents by forcing a value
from the default work center)
Ready for input
Ready for input and required
In addition, you can highlight the field
Configuring Work Centers – Field Selection Control
Use the slide and the demonstration to explain the options for maintaining field
control:
•
•
•
Work center category-specific
For several work center categories
Cross work center category
The influencing field type of field control is not the work center category, but the
work center category is assigned in maintenance there.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
595
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Demonstration of Field Control
As in the exercise:
Adapt the field selection control for work center category PL## on tab pages Basic
Data and Capacities according to your requirements as follows:
•
•
Hide the fields Transition matrix, QDR system and Supply area on the basic
data tab page, and define the field Person responsible as a highlighted,
required field.
Hide the Other formula and Internal distribution fields on the capacities
tab page.
Following steps:
1.
Create work center (1000, XXX, PL99)
Hint: => The description is the only required field (not modifiable)
2.
(2. mode)
Customizing → Field control → Screen group - Basic data → Influencing
value: PL99
Use the settings above
Then in the „overview of influences", check
=> Basic data
Two old, unspecified influences (storage location, mixed material ...
hidden), 3 new entries with PL99
=> Capacities
3.
No unspecified influences, 2 new entries with PL99
(1. mode)
Exit work center maintenance (do not save)
CR02: with TEST99 => No effect
CR01: with new work center => No effect
4.
(2. mode)
Customizing → Work center categoryfield selection: Assign PL99 to work
center category PL99
5.
Repeat first mode => each will have influence
Control Key
The control key is the central control element of the process.
596
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Figure 191: Control Key
The control key is a required field for the process. The control key can originate
from the work center, either as a reference or as a proposal.
You use the control key to define whether an operation (also suboperation, activity
element, phase, or secondary resource):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Is read in scheduling
Is read in capacity planning
Is read in worklists in quality management (inspection characteristics)
Is read in costing
Automatically posts a goods receipt if a confirmation is entered for this
operation
Prints related shop floor papers (Print indicator), where this is defined for the
order type, plant, and MRP controller, and where the control key is checked
when printing shop floor papers:
•
–
Prints time tickets ( Print indicator must be set first)
–
Prints confirmation slips ( Print indicator must be set first)
Is processed externally
•
•
–
<blank> = internally processed
–
“+” = externally processed
–
“X” = internally processed / can be processed externally
Can be considered in scheduling (indicator Sched. external op.)
Supports confirmation:
–
–
–
–
2010
<blank> = possible, but not required
1 = milestone confirmation
2 = required
3 = impossible
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
597
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Standard Value Key
Figure 192: Standard Value Key
Step 1: Check the parameters defined. For standard value keys, only parameters
with the original two standard values of operation can be used.
Step 2: Define the standard value key. You use this to define how many of
the maximum of six standard values are used. By assigning parameters to the
individual elements of the standard value keys, you define the meaning of the
individual standard values, including dimension, unit of measure, format, and
description.
Standard Value Key
The standard value key offers the user up to six fields for entering standard values
in operations.
Show: (CA01)
•
•
An operation without a work center does not have any standard values
An operation with a work center has default values according to the work
center
Show in →Customizing(no need to create new entries):
Define parameters (origin 2 only , for example, SAP_01 to SAP_06, not SAP_14
(user field) )
Store standard value key (parameter SAP_14 cannot be used here)
598
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Configuration of Scheduling Including Formulas
Figure 193: Execution Time
The standard values defined for the routing and the formulas defined in the work
center are used in lead-time scheduling to calculate the execution time for the
individual segments (setup, processing, and teardown).
If splitting takes place, you must also take into account the formula parameters in
the formula for the number of splits.
Figure 194: Formulas
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
599
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Formulas can be assigned to each capacity in the work center to calculate the
capacity requirement. At the same time, formulas can also be permitted for
different functions (capacity requirement, scheduling, and costing).
Generation controls the immediate code generation for the formula. If no code is
generated in formula maintenance, it is generated at execution time.
There is a maximum of three lines per formula. Possible arithmetical operations
are +, -, *, /, SIN, COS, DIV, MOD, SQRT, EXP, and LOG.
Conversion of units of measure takes place automatically.
Figure 195: Setting Up Formulas
600
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Formula parameters are differentiated according to their origin. The following
origins for a formula parameter can be defined in Customizing:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
General operation value: The parameter is linked to a field in the general
operation data. The value of this field is entered in the formula. Typical
fields are lot size, base quantity, number of splits (partial lots), and number
of employees.
Work center constant: The parameter is assigned a constant value in the
work center. This value is used in the formula.
Standard value: Using the standard value key, you can assign a standard
value that is used as a parameter in the formula.
User field in the operation: The value of a custom field in the operation
is assigned to the parameter.
Value from PRT assignment: This could be either the quantity or the usage
value of the production resource/tool (PRT). This parameter can only be used
for formulas that are used for PRT management.
PRT constant: You assign a constant value to this parameter in the PRT
master record. These formula parameters can only be used in formulas for
PRT management.
General formula constant: A value is assigned to this parameter, which is
then used in the application.
Configuration of Scheduling
Execution Time
Formulas
Setting Up Formulas
Formulas and Standard Values
The control key controls for which activities an operation is permitted.
Standard values must be maintained for planning of these activities, or first
you need to use the standard value key in order to allow standard values to be
maintained.
For scheduling, capacity planning, or costing, you need formulas. This is
discussed here by referring to scheduling, or execution time.
Demonstration of Setting Up Formulas
As in the exercise, show how to create parameters and formulas:
Create a formula for periodical setup at a work center. In other words: First define
a formula parameter for the additional set-up time and a formula parameter for
the period, expressed as a quantity, after which the set-up is to be repeated. The
parameter values should have their origin in a standard value in the operation = 2.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
601
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Periodic setup
Sinterval
Parameter
SAP199
SAP299
Short keyword
Perd. Set-up
Sinterval
Keyword
Perd. Sint 99
Sinterval 99
Dimension
Time (TIME)
W/o dimensions
Standard value
Standard value unit
1
Minutes (MIN)
Piece(PC)
Now define a formula SAP199 for periodic set-up at your work center, with the
description Psetup .
•
•
•
•
Only allowed for scheduling
Generated immediately
Machine * Operation quantity / Base quantity + Periodic setup * ( (Operation
quantity – 1 ) / Setup interval )
SAP_02 * SAP_09 / SAP_08 + SAP199 * ( ( SAP_09 - 1 ) / SAP299 )
Define a new standard value key S99 with the description Key PR99 with the
following values:
Setup time
SAP_01
Machine time
SAP_02
Perd. Sint 99
SAP199
Sinterval 99
SAP299
Test the formulas on the scheduling screen of a new work center:
Create work center P-99 with work center category PL99 copying from 1905.
Copy: Copy everything and display all screens.
Save the work center.
Replace the processing formula key for execution time with the formula key
SAP1## that you created. Note the warning messages after you have confirmed
the entry.
Change the standard value key and test your formula on the Scheduling screen.
602
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Operation quantity
101 pieces
Setup time
10 minute
Machine time
1 minute
Psetup
5 minutes
Sinterval
50 pieces
=> Processing time 121 minutes
Capacity Categories and Capacities, Including Shift
Sequences
Figure 196: Capacity Categories and Capacities
•
•
2010
Creating capacities
Assigning capacities to a work center, including intervals of available
capacity, shift sequences, shifts, and so on
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
603
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Figure 197: Shift Sequences
The data in the environment for defining shift sequences can be grouped. This
helps structuring and selection.
1.
2.
3.
Create the work break schedules. Work break schedules can contain several
breaks. A break is a time interval at a fixed time or at a time relative to the
start of the shift, which is defined later.
Define the individual shifts. A shift is a fixed time interval. You can assign a
work break schedule to a shift. From this time interval and the breaks within
the assigned work break schedule, the working time is calculated.
Define the shift sequences. A shift sequence can consist of several lines (shift
numbers). For each line, you can assign a shift from step 2 to each weekday.
Capacity Categories and Capacities
Explain the possibilities for storing available capacities at the work center. Refer
also to the options of
•
•
•
Default capacity
Copy template of capacities and
Pool capacities
Continue showcase from above. In other words: Transaction CR02 in work center
PL99 (1000)
604
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
→ Capacities
1.
2.
3.
Pushbutton „ Template or (shift + control +0). In other words: Copy
available capacity from other work center.
Pushbutton „Create capacity or (shift + F4)“ Here, you can work with a
reference capacity (which can also be copied) or a pooled capacity (both
previously created using CR11).
New available capacities work with default capacity, if available.
Here, also show the assignment of shift sequences. (“2S”, “3S”, “PP” )
→ Customizing
Show capacity categories and default capacity
Shift sequences
Briefly explain the structure for maintenance of shift sequences. If you have time,
you can show this in Customizing, too.
Configuration of Scheduling
Execution Time
Formulas
Setting Up Formulas
Formulas and Standard Values
The control key controls for which activities an operation is permitted.
Standard values must be maintained for planning of these activities, or first
you need to use the standard value key in order to allow standard values to be
maintained.
For scheduling, capacity planning, or costing, you need formulas. This is
discussed here by referring to scheduling, or execution time.
Demonstration of Setting Up Formulas
As in the exercise, show how to create parameters and formulas:
Create a formula for periodical setup at a work center. In other words: First define
a formula parameter for the additional set-up time and a formula parameter for
the period, expressed as a quantity, after which the set-up is to be repeated. The
parameter values should have their origin in a standard value in the operation = 2.
2010
Periodic setup
Sinterval
Parameter
SAP199
SAP299
Short keyword
Perd. Set-up
Sinterval
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
605
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Keyword
Perd. Sint 99
Sinterval 99
Dimension
Time (TIME)
W/o dimensions
Standard value
Standard value unit
1
Minutes (MIN)
Piece(PC)
Now define a formula SAP199 for periodic set-up at your work center, with the
description Psetup .
•
•
•
•
Only allowed for scheduling
Generated immediately
Machine * Operation quantity / Base quantity + Periodic setup * ( (Operation
quantity – 1 ) / Setup interval )
SAP_02 * SAP_09 / SAP_08 + SAP199 * ( ( SAP_09 - 1 ) / SAP299 )
Define a new standard value key S99 with the description Key PR99 with the
following values:
Setup time
SAP_01
Machine time
SAP_02
Perd. Sint 99
SAP199
Sinterval 99
SAP299
Test the formulas on the scheduling screen of a new work center:
Create work center P-99 with work center category PL99 copying from 1905.
Copy: Copy everything and display all screens.
Save the work center.
Replace the processing formula key for execution time with the formula key
SAP1## that you created. Note the warning messages after you have confirmed
the entry.
Change the standard value key and test your formula on the Scheduling screen.
Operation quantity
101 pieces
Setup time
10 minute
Machine time
1 minute
Psetup
5 minutes
Sinterval
50 pieces
=> Processing time 121 minutes
606
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Other Check Tables
Figure 198: Other Check Tables
These check tables are found in Customizing, and some of them can also be found
also in the work center menu by choosing Environment → Current settings.
Suitability and wage group are parameters from human resources. These are
defined here if you do not use the SAP solution for human resources.
Other Check Tables
All of these check tables are, from a PP point of view, purely check tables with
exclusive selection help.
Link to HR: See notes for slide.
Other Customizing points in the work center menu are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2010
Task list usage (see next chapter)
Move time matrix (already covered in PLM111)
Define subsystems (= maintain RFC connection and destination)
Key for performance efficiency rate (not here, CO topic)
Distribution (covered by course SCM360)
Alternative activity texts (= overriding activity type descriptions -> CO topic)
Points on available capacity (covered by course SCM940)
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
607
Unit 11: Appendix
608
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
527
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Exercise 31: Work Center Category and
Field Selection Control, Default Work
Center (Optional)
Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Set up a work center with a separate screen sequence
•
Set up a work center with a separate field sequence
•
Set up a work center category with a default work center
Business Example
You are responsible for the system settings for work centers. A new work center
category is to be set up for work centers in discrete manufacturing.
Task 1:
Create a new work center category for your area of responsibility.
1.
Use work center category number PL## and the description Category ##.
2.
Set up the work center category for the task list application Routings for
production.
Task 2:
Define a special screen sequence for work center category PL##.
1.
For your work center category PL##, set the following screen selection
sequence: basic data, defaults, capacities, scheduling, costing, and
technology. Apart from the basic data, no other views need to be required.
Task 3:
Adapt the field selection control for work center category PL## on tab pages Basic
data and Capacities according to your requirements as follows:
1.
Hide the Transition matrix field on the basic data tab page, and define the
field Person responsible as a required field.
2.
Hide the Other formula and Internal distribution fields on the capacities
tab page.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
609
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Task 4:
Assign screen sequence and field selection to a work center category.
1.
Assign the screen sequence and field selection you have created to your
work center category PL##.
Task 5:
Create a default work center in plant 1000 for the work center category PL##
you defined in the first task.
1.
2.
610
Maintain the following data on the Basic data tab page:
Task list usage
All task list types
Standard Value Key
Normal production
Maintain the following data on the Default values tab page:
Control key
Choose one of the PP series control keys (PP01,
PP02 through PP99). It must allow scheduling,
capacity planning, and costing. It must also
print time tickets and allow confirmations.
Units of measure for
standard values
Minute
3.
Maintain capacity category machine on the Capacities tab page:
4.
Create a work center in plant 1000 to check the settings for the screen
sequence and field selection.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Solution 31: Work Center Category and
Field Selection Control, Default Work
Center (Optional)
Task 1:
Create a new work center category for your area of responsibility.
1.
Use work center category number PL## and the description Category ##.
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Define work center category.
Choose New Entries.
Cat.
PL##
Description
Category ##
Save.
2.
Set up the work center category for the task list application Routings for
production.
a)
Select your new line and choose Application in the dialog structure.
Click New Entries for the selection of application P.
Choose Save.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
611
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Task 2:
Define a special screen sequence for work center category PL##.
1.
For your work center category PL##, set the following screen selection
sequence: basic data, defaults, capacities, scheduling, costing, and
technology. Apart from the basic data, no other views need to be required.
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
Set up work center screen sequence.
Make the following entries for work center category PL##:
2
Default values
3
Capacities
4
Scheduling
5
Costing
6
Technology
Delete the numbers of screens that are not required.
Choose Save.
Task 3:
Adapt the field selection control for work center category PL## on tab pages Basic
data and Capacities according to your requirements as follows:
1.
Hide the Transition matrix field on the basic data tab page, and define the
field Person responsible as a required field.
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Define field selection.
Select the screen group Basic data and select influencing. Use your
work center category PL## as the value for influencing, then make
absolutely sure you choose Enter. Set the Transition matrix field to
hide and the Person responsible field to required entry.
Continued on next page
612
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
2.
Hide the Other formula and Internal distribution fields on the capacities
tab page.
a)
Push-button Screen group
Select the screen group Capacity and select influencing. Use your
work center category PL## as the value for influencing, then make
absolutely sure you choose Enter button. Set the Other formula and
Internal distribution fields to Hide.
Choose Save.
Task 4:
Assign screen sequence and field selection to a work center category.
1.
Assign the screen sequence and field selection you have created to your
work center category PL##.
a)
In Customizing choose, Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Define work center category.
Assign field selection PL## and screen sequence PL## to your work
center category PL##.
Choose Save.
Task 5:
Create a default work center in plant 1000 for the work center category PL##
you defined in the first task.
1.
Maintain the following data on the Basic data tab page:
Task list usage
All task list types
Standard Value Key
Normal production
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Define default work center.
Plant
1000
Work center category
PL##
Continue with Enter or push-button Basic Data (F5).
Task list usage
009
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
613
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Standard Value Key
SAP1
Hint: In the field selection control for work center category
PL##, you defined that the Person responsible field must
always be maintained. The default work center is an exception,
compared with ordinary work centers.
2.
Maintain the following data on the Default values tab page:
Control key
Choose one of the PP series control keys (PP01,
PP02 through PP99). It must allow scheduling,
capacity planning, and costing. It must also
print time tickets and allow confirmations.
Units of measure for
standard values
Minute
a)
3.
Switch to the Default values tab page. Control key, for example PP01.
Maintain capacity category machine on the Capacities tab page:
a)
Switch to the Capacities tab page.
Capacity Category: 001
Choose Save.
4.
Create a work center in plant 1000 to check the settings for the screen
sequence and field selection.
a)
From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production →
Master data → Work centers → Work center → Create.
Plant
1000
Work Center
<your choice>
Work center category
PL##
Choose Enter.
Note: Info message: “Values were set from the default work
center.”
Person responsible is now mandatory.
b)
Select the Capacities tab.
Note: The Internal Distribution and Other Formula fields are
hidden.
614
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
533
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Exercise 32: Optional: Work Center
Formulas
Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
•
Create and test formulas
Business Example
As a member of the project team, you are responsible for feasible and exact
scheduling of the company’s products
You first need to set up formulas.
Task 1:
Create a formula for periodically repeating setup at a work center. To be able to
create and test the formula, it is necessary not just to define the formula parameters
for the formula, but also to define a standard value key that supplies the formula
with values.
1.
First define a formula parameter for the additional setup time and a formula
parameter for the period, expressed as a quantity, after which the setup is to
be repeated. The parameter values should have their origin in a standard
value in the operation.
Data for the group parameters:
Periodic Setup
Sinterval
Parameter
SAP1##
SAP2##
Parameter Text
Perd. Set-up
Sinterval
Keyword
PS group ##
SI group ##
Dimension
Time (TIME)
Without dimensions
(AAAADL)
Standard value
Standard value unit
1
Minutes (MIN)
Piece(PC)
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
615
Unit 11: Appendix
2.
TSCM40_I
Define a formula for periodic setup at your work center. Call the formula
SAP1## with the description PS group ##. This formula must be valid only
for scheduling and must be generated immediately when you save. Use the
parameters from the table for this.
The formula is Machine * Operation quantity / Base quantity + Periodic
setup * ( (Operation quantity – 1 ) / Setup interval ).
3.
Define a new standard value key so that the parameters in the formula can be
supplied with values. The standard value key should allow entries for setup
time, machine time, and additional setup after 50 pieces. The key name is
S## with the description SI group ##.
Task 2:
Test the formulas on the scheduling screen of a new work center.
616
1.
Create a new work center, PL##, with work center category PL##. Copy
the Basic data, Default values, Capacities, and Scheduling screens from
work center 1905. The description of the work center is Formula test ##.
Save the work center.
2.
In the previous step, you saw a warning message, and you now want to
respond to this. Make the relevant change in your work center.
3.
Now test your formula on the Scheduling screen. Enter the following values:
Field
Entry
Operation quantity
101 pieces
Setup time
10 minutes
Machine time
1 minute
PS group ##
5 minutes
SI group ##
50 pieces
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Solution 32: Optional: Work Center
Formulas
Task 1:
Create a formula for periodically repeating setup at a work center. To be able to
create and test the formula, it is necessary not just to define the formula parameters
for the formula, but also to define a standard value key that supplies the formula
with values.
1.
First define a formula parameter for the additional setup time and a formula
parameter for the period, expressed as a quantity, after which the setup is to
be repeated. The parameter values should have their origin in a standard
value in the operation.
Data for the group parameters:
Periodic Setup
Sinterval
Parameter
SAP1##
SAP2##
Parameter Text
Perd. Set-up
Sinterval
Keyword
PS group ##
SI group ##
Dimension
Time (TIME)
Without dimensions
(AAAADL)
Standard value
Standard value unit
2.
1
Minutes (MIN)
Piece(PC)
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Standard value → Define parameters.
b)
Choose the New Entries button.
c)
Enter the parameters according to the table with origin key 2.
Define a formula for periodic setup at your work center. Call the formula
SAP1## with the description PS group ##. This formula must be valid only
for scheduling and must be generated immediately when you save. Use the
parameters from the table for this.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
617
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
The formula is Machine * Operation quantity / Base quantity + Periodic
setup * ( (Operation quantity – 1 ) / Setup interval ).
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
Capacity planning → Work center formulas → Set up work center
formula definition.
b)
Choose the New Entries button.
c)
Enter the Formula key SAP1## and Description PS–Group ##.
Hint:
•
•
•
3.
You determine the necessary parameter ID by means of
the search field for parameters.
Upper/lowercase and line breaks do not affect the formula.
Insert a blank before and after special characters
(operators).
d)
Enter the formula SAP_02 * SAP_09 / SAP_08 + SAP1## *
( ( SAP_09 - 1 ) DIV SAP2## ).
e)
Set the Generate and Allowed for scheduling flags.
Define a new standard value key so that the parameters in the formula can be
supplied with values. The standard value key should allow entries for setup
time, machine time, and additional setup after 50 pieces. The key name is
S## with the description SI group ##.
a)
In Customizing, choose Production → Basic data → Work center →
General data → Specify standard value key.
b)
Choose the New Entries button.
c)
Enter the Standard value key S## and the Description SI Group ##.
Include the following parameters in the standard value key:
d)
Field
Entry
Setup time
SAP_01
Machine time
SAP_02
PS group ##
SAP1##
SI group ##
SAP2##
Choose Save.
Continued on next page
618
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Task 2:
Test the formulas on the scheduling screen of a new work center.
1.
Create a new work center, PL##, with work center category PL##. Copy
the Basic data, Default values, Capacities, and Scheduling screens from
work center 1905. The description of the work center is Formula test ##.
Save the work center.
a)
From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production →
Master data → Work centers → Work center → Create .
Enter the data from the table below.
2.
Entry
Plant
1000
Work Center
P-##
Work center category
PL##
Reference plant
1000
Reference work center
1905
b)
Choose Enter.
c)
Ignore the warning message (different work center category) by
choosing Enter again.
d)
In the Copy from... dialog box select Basic data, Defaults, Capacities,
Scheduling and choose Copy.
e)
On the Basic Data view, enter the description: Formula test ##
f)
Go to the Scheduling tab page and replace the Processing formula with
the one you created.
g)
A warning message will appear letting you know that parameters in
your formula with origin Standard value in the operation do not appear
in the Standard Value Key. Therefore, the system will not be able to
determine the value of these parameters.
h)
Choose Enter to work through the warning but stay on this screen.
In the previous step, you saw a warning message, and you now want to
respond to this. Make the relevant change in your work center.
a)
3.
Field
Without leaving the work center, go to the Basic data tab page and
overwrite the standard value key SAP1 with S##.
Now test your formula on the Scheduling screen. Enter the following values:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
619
Unit 11: Appendix
620
TSCM40_I
Field
Entry
Operation quantity
101 pieces
Setup time
10 minutes
Machine time
1 minute
PS group ##
5 minutes
SI group ##
50 pieces
a)
Go to the Scheduling tab page and choose the Test formula button.
Enter the values from the exercise and choose Calculate.
b)
The calculated overall execution time is 121 minutes, so setup was
repeated twice.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Work Center
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Define default values for work centers
•
Explain the configuration settings regarding work centers
•
Create and test work center formulas
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
621
Unit 11: Appendix
Lesson:
540
TSCM40_I
Configuring the Routing
Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes
Lesson Overview
In this lesson you will learn about the customizing settings that controll the routing
at the header level and also the item level.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define system settings for routings
Business Example
In the project team, you are responsible for routing administration. You need
to be aware of what options your company can take advantage of to adapt their
existing routings to SAP ERP.
Configuring Routings: Control Data
In this step, you define number ranges for groups of routings, reference operation
sets, rate routings, and reference rate routings. To create a these objects, SAP R/3
requires a unique group number. You can create any of these objects with or
without a group. If you do not enter a group number, the system assigns one to the
task list. The internal group number is within the number range you define in this
step. You can also define number ranges for external assignment of group numbers.
622
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Routing
Figure 199: Routing Configuration: Control Data
In the next step, you assign number ranges you defined in the previous step to the
respective task list types. Both internal and external number ranges are assigned
here. Here you can also activate the following options for each task list type:
•
•
Write change documents
Last maintained value for the material (and plant of the material), task list
group, and sales document will default in task list maintenance
Last maintained refers to the last entry of a specific user, and not the last
entry in the system. If you would like to access fixed-user values instead
of the last maintained value, do not activate this option. Also select SET
parameters and GET parameters in the field attributes of the respective field,
such as the Material field. Entering a fixed value in the user parameters
alone is not sufficient.
•
Authorization check for deletion active.
You use this indicator to specify that a user requires deletion authority for the
relevant task list to delete a task list, change the deletion flag for a task list,
delete a sequence of a task list, or delete an operation or phase of a task list.
If you do not set this indicator, the user only needs change authority to carry
out these activities for the relevant task list type.
•
Check material type against components
In this step, you maintain column headings for standard values on the operation
overview. If all work centers where operations are processed use the same
descriptions in the standard value key, the system dynamically determines a
common description for the standard value column heading. If no common header
can be determined for a column of standard values, the system sets the description
from the Customizing table according to task list type. The same procedure
applies when a sequence or a task list is created for the operation overview.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
623
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
In this step you specify the line lengths of the various texts in routing long texts.
The length of the short text on the corresponding overview and detail screens is
always limited to 40 characters. If the long text has more than 40 characters, the
short text will display only the first 40 characters. This table setting affects the
long texts of the following objects: header, sequence, operation, suboperation,
and PRT assignment.
Configuring Routings: General Data
Define material type assignment: In this activity, you can define for each
material type which task list types can be used to create routings.
Figure 200: Routing Configuration: General Data
Define routing status: The status defines:
•
•
•
Whether a reference operation set can be used in routings (Released indicator)
Whether the routing is released for costing
Whether a consistency check is run before saving (for details of the scope of
the consistency check, see the online help)
Define task list usage: You can use task list usages to create different task lists
for a material and plant, and use routing selection to control selection. The only
parameter that can be assigned to the usage here is the dynamic modification
criterion, which is relevant to quality management only.
624
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Routing
The task list usage is used for:
•
•
Automatic selection ID (as priority list regarding routing category, usage,
and status) or
User selection (ABAP routine)
Configure planner group: Check table - selection criterion
Overview variants: Overview variants can be defined for object overviews,
where-used lists, and scheduling. These are not relevant to the engineering
workbench environment.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
625
Unit 11: Appendix
TSCM40_I
Facilitated Discussion
Discussion Questions
Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free
to use your own additional questions.
626
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Lesson: Configuring the Routing
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Define system settings for routings
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
627
Unit Summary
TSCM40_I
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the process of influencing the field characteristics of the material
master
•
Describe Process of configuring the screen layout of the material master
•
Set up a customized material master in Customizing
•
Test the settings by creating a material master
•
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM header
•
Describe the configuration activities surrounding the BOM items
•
Define default values for work centers
•
Explain the configuration settings regarding work centers
•
Create and test work center formulas
•
Define system settings for routings
628
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
545
Test Your Knowledge
Test Your Knowledge
1.
A new material type can be created by simply clicking New Entries and
entering the data.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2.
True
False
Which of the following can be used to influence the screen sequence and
attributes (required, visible, hidden) of the material master record.
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
□
3.
A
B
C
D
E
User ID
Material type
Plant
Industry
Transaction
Which of the following are required to be configured before you can create
a BOM?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
□
4.
A
B
C
D
E
BOM usage
BOM status
Item Categories
User-specific settings
None of the above
You can control which material types can be used as the header material
when creating a BOM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
5.
True
False
A material with any material type can be used as a BOM component and
this cannot be changed in the system.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□
□
2010
True
False
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
629
Test Your Knowledge
6.
TSCM40_I
Which of the following can be set in the user-specific settings?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□
□
□
□
630
A
B
C
D
Item increment
Default item category for materials
Default BOM usage
Default BOM category
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
547
Test Your Knowledge
Answers
1.
A new material type can be created by simply clicking New Entries and
entering the data.
Answer: False
A new material type can be created only by copying an existing material
type and making changes. There are so many underlying dependencies on
a material type that they must be copied to be sure all of the dependencies
are also copied.
2.
Which of the following can be used to influence the screen sequence and
attributes (required, visible, hidden) of the material master record.
Answer: B, C, D, E
Material type, plant, industry, and transaction as well as procurement
indicator can all be influencing factors in controlling the screen sequence and
field attributes of a material master record.
3.
Which of the following are required to be configured before you can create
a BOM?
Answer: E
Since all of the above can use the default settings delivered with your SAP
ECC system or are optional configuration activities, none of them is required.
4.
You can control which material types can be used as the header material
when creating a BOM.
Answer: True
In Materials types for use in BOMs, you can indicate which material types
can be used as the header material in a BOM.
5.
A material with any material type can be used as a BOM component and
this cannot be changed in the system.
Answer: False
In material types for BOM items, you can control which material types can
be entered as components on the BOM.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
631
Test Your Knowledge
6.
TSCM40_I
Which of the following can be set in the user-specific settings?
Answer: A, B
The item increment and the default item category for materials as well as
several other settings can be set in the user-specific settings. It is not possible
to default the BOM usage and BOM category in the user-specific settings
since these are picked by the transaction or the entry screen prior to BOM
maintenance.
632
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
TSCM40_I
Course Summary
Course Summary
You should now be able to:
•
•
2010
Use the relevant master data elements for the modelling of planning and
production processes
Evaluate, describe, and implement the options provided by SAP-ERP-based
planning
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
633
Course Summary
634
TSCM40_I
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Index
B
D
batch management, 108
batch master record, 108
bill of material, 28
BOM
alternative determination,
580
archiving, 178
by-product, 330
co-product, 328
comparison, 198
default settings, 575
explosion report, 196
modification parameters,
574
recursiveness, 177
status, 578
where-used list, 197–198
BOM categories, 155
BOM status, 157
BOM usage, 156
BOM validity, 167
Distribution channel, 25
Division, 25
C
change material
archive, 133
delete, 131
extending, 123
mass maintenance, 128
material status, 126
material type, 125
characteristic, 105
class, 106
class type, 105
classification, 102
Client, 21
Company code, 22
component allocation, 282
Continuous flow, 437
2010
E
engineering change
management, 302
F
field selection, 552
Float before/after production,
432
G
Group BOMs, 169
I
Individual Capacities, 436
industry sector, 73
see also influencing factors
item category
configuration, 582
variable size, 581
L
low-level code, 160
M
material assignment, 280
Material master, 27
material number, configuring,
73
material status, 126, 137
material type, 71, 135
Move time, 434
MRP area, 53
MRP groups, 82
MRP profile, 82
O
Overlapping, 437
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
635
Index
TSCM40_I
P
plant
definition, 39
Plant, 22
Processing time, 434
PRTs, 472
Purchasing group, 23
Purchasing organization, 23
Q
Queue time, 434
R
Reduction measures, 438
routing
component allocation, 282
material assignment, 280
reporting, 305
suboperation, 291
user- defined fields, 293
variable-size items, 283
routings, 31
Sales organization, 24
Scheduling margin Key, 432
screen sequence, 558
Setup time, 434
Shipping Point, 25
Splitting, 436
storage location, 45
Storage location, 22
subitems, 172
suboperation, 291
T
Tear down time, 434
U
unit of measure, 75
groups, 77
W
Wait time, 434
work center, 30
S
Sales Area, 25
636
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
Feedback
SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the
accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or
suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the
course evaluation.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
637